2013 RAV4 New Features PDF

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.
4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HD2

Model Year: 2013 Model: RAV4 Prod Date Range: [12/2012 - ]
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The 2AR-FE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.5-liter, 16-valve DOHC engine. This engine uses the Dual
Variable Valve Timing-intelligent (Dual VVT-i) system, Direct Ignition System (DIS), Acoustic Control Induction
System (ACIS) and Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i). It has been developed to achieve
high performance, quietness, fuel economy and clean emissions.
2. SPECIFICATION
No. of Cyls. and Arrangement 4-cylinder, In-line
16-valve DOHC, Chain Drive

Valve Mechanism
(with Dual VVT-i)
Combustion Chamber Pentroof Type
Manifolds Cross-flow
Fuel System Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI)
Ignition System Direct Ignition System (DIS)
Displacement 2494 cm 3 (152.2 cu. in.)
Bore x Stroke 90.0 x 98.0 mm (3.54 x 3.86 in.)
Compression Ratio 10.4 : 1
Max. Output (SAE-NET)*1 131 kW (176 HP) @ 6000 rpm
Max. Torque (SAE-NET)*1 233 N*m (172 ft*lbf) @ 4100 rpm
Open 3° to 43° BTDC

Intake
Closed 61° to 21° ABDC
Valve Timing
Open 60° to 20° BBDC
Exhaust
Closed 4° to 44° ATDC
Manufacture DENSO
Spark Plug Type SK16HR11
Plug Gap 1.0 to 1.1 mm (0.039 to 0.043 in.)
Firing Order 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
Octane Rating 87 or higher
Research Octane Number 91 or higher
U.S.A. and Canada ULEV2, SFTP

Tailpipe Emission Regulation
Others Tier2, SFTP
Evaporative Emission Regulation U.S.A. and Canada LEV2, ORVR

Evaporative Emission Regulation U.S.A. and Canada LEV2, ORVR
Others Tier2, ORVR
Engine Service Mass (Reference)*2 147 kg (324.0 lb)
*1: Maximum output and torque rating are determined using the revised SAE J1349 procedure.
*2: Weight shows the figure with oil and engine coolant fully filled.
3. MAIN FEATURES
(a) The following performance features have been achieved for the 2AR-FE engine through the use of the items
listed below:
(1) High performance and reliability
(2) Low noise and vibration
(3) Lightweight and compact design
(4) Good serviceability
(5) Clean emissions and fuel economy
ITEM (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
A cylinder head cover sub-assembly made of magnesium alloy is

- - ○ - -
used.
A taper squish shape is used for the combustion chamber. ○ - - - ○
Spiny-type liners are used in the cylinder bores. ○ - ○ - ○

Spiny-type liners are used in the cylinder bores. ○ - ○ - ○
Engine Proper
A cylinder block water jacket spacer is used. ○ - - - ○
The piston skirt is coated with resin. ○ ○ - - ○
Low tension piston rings are used. ○ - - - ○
A resin gear balance shaft is used. - ○ ○ - -
A timing chain and chain tensioner are used. - ○ - ○ -
Valve Mechanism Valve lash adjuster assemblies are used. - ○ - ○ -
Valve rocker arm sub-assemblies are used. ○ - - - ○
Lubrication System An oil filter with a replaceable element is used. - - - ○ -
Cooling System TOYOTA Genuine Super Long Life Coolant (SLLC) is used. - - - ○ -
A charcoal filter is used in the air cleaner cap. - - - - ○
Intake and Exhaust An intake manifold made of plastic is used. - - ○ - -
System A linkless-type throttle body assembly is used. - - ○ ○ ○
A thin-wall ceramic Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) is used. - - - - ○
A fuel returnless system is used. - - ○ ○ ○
Quick connectors are used to connect the fuel hose with the fuel
- - ○ ○ ○
Fuel System pipe.
12-hole type fuel injector assemblies with high atomizing

○ - - - ○
performance are used.
Serpentine Belt Drive

A serpentine belt drive system is used. - - ○ ○ -
System
Long-reach type iridium-tipped spark plugs are used. ○ - - ○ ○
The Direct Ignition System (DIS) makes ignition timing

○ - - ○ ○
adjustment unnecessary.
An Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i) is used. ○ - - - ○
Engine Control System A Dual Variable Valve Timing-intelligent (Dual VVT-i) system is
○ - - - ○
used.
An Acoustic Control Induction System (ACIS) is used. ○ - - - ○
A tumble control system is used. ○ - - - ○
A starter control (cranking hold function) is used.* ○ - - - -
*: Models with smart key system
HINT:
○: Applicable
-: Not applicable

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBP
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-intelligent (ETCS-i)
CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-intelligent (ETCS-

i) CONTROL
1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The ETCS-i is used, providing excellent throttle control in all operating ranges.
(b) The ETCS-i uses the ECM to calculate the optimal throttle valve opening that is appropriate for the respective
driving condition and uses a throttle control motor to control the opening.
(c) The ETCS-i controls the idle speed, Traction Control (TRAC), Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) system and cruise
control system.
(d) In case of an abnormal condition, this system switches to the limp mode.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBQ
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DUAL VVT-i CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
DUAL VVT-i CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The Dual VVT-i system is designed to control the intake and exhaust camshafts within a range of 40°
respectively (of Crankshaft Angle) to provide valve timing optimally suited to the engine condition. This
improves torque in all the speed ranges as well as increasing fuel economy and reducing exhaust emissions.
Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve
*1 *2
Assembly (Intake) Assembly (Exhaust)
*3 Crank Position Sensor *4 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
*5 Camshaft Position Sensor (Exhaust) *6 Camshaft Position Sensor (Intake)
Intake Mass Air Flow Meter

*7 ECM *8 Sub-assembly
Throttle Position Sensor
(b) The VVT-i system delivers excellent benefits in the different operating conditions as follows:
(1) During Idling
OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Stabilized idling speed

Reducing overlap to reduce blow back to the intake side
Better fuel economy
(2) At Light Load

OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Reducing overlap to reduce blow back to the intake side Ensured engine stability
(3) At Medium Load
OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Better fuel economy

Increasing overlap to increase internal EGR to reduce pumping loss
Improved emission control
(4) In Low to Medium Speed Range with Heavy Load
OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Advancing the intake valve close timing for volumetric efficiency Improved torque in low to medium speed
improvement range
(5) In High Speed Range with Heavy Load
OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Retarding the intake valve close timing for volumetric efficiency improvement Improved output
(6) At Low Temperatures
OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Stabilized
fast idle
Reducing overlap to reduce blow back to the intake side leads to the lean burning
speed
condition, and stabilizes the idling speed at fast idle
Better fuel
economy
(7) Starting Engine and Stopping Engine

OBJECTIVE EFFECT
Reducing overlap to minimize blow back to the intake side Improved startability
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCA
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DUAL VVT-i CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
DUAL VVT-i CONTROL

1. OPERATION
(a) Using the engine speed, intake air mass, throttle position and engine coolant temperature, the ECM can
calculate optimal valve timing for each driving condition (target valve timing). The ECM uses this calculated
timing to control the camshaft timing oil control valve assemblies. In addition, the ECM uses signals from the
camshaft position sensors and the crank position sensor to detect the actual valve timing, thus providing
feedback control to achieve the target valve timing.
(b) When the camshaft timing oil control valve assembly is positioned as illustrated below by the advance signals
from the ECM, the resultant oil pressure is applied to the timing advance side vane chamber to rotate the
camshaft in the timing advance direction:
*1 Vane *2 ECM
*a Intake Side *b Exhaust Side
*c Rotation Direction *d Oil Pressure
*e In *f Drain
(c) When the camshaft timing oil control valve assembly is positioned as illustrated below by the retard signals
from the ECM, the resultant oil pressure is applied to the timing retard side vane chamber to rotate the
camshaft in the timing retard direction:
*1 Vane *2 ECM
*a Intake Side *b Exhaust Side
*c Rotation Direction *d Oil Pressure
*e Drain *f In
(d) After reaching the target timing, the valve timing is held by keeping the camshaft timing oil control valve
assembly in the neutral position unless the traveling state changes. This adjusts the valve timing at the
desired target position and prevents the engine oil from running out.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBR
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FUEL PUMP CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
FUEL PUMP CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) 2WD Models
(1) In this vehicle, there are 2 types of fuel pump controls. The fuel pump is controlled to an optimum speed
to match the engine operating conditions, and the fuel pump operation is stopped when any of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) airbags deploy.
(2) The ECM transmits a fuel pump operation request signal to the fuel pump control ECU assembly that
corresponds to the engine operating conditions. The fuel pump control ECU assembly receives this request
signal and controls the speed of the fuel pump. As a result, under light engine loads, fuel pump speed is
kept low to reduce electric power loss.
(3) A fuel cut control is used to stop the fuel pump when any of the SRS airbags deploys. In this control, if an
airbag deployment signal from the center airbag sensor assembly is detected by the ECM, the ECM will
turn off the No. 1 EFI main relay. As a result, the power supply to the fuel pump control ECU assembly is
stopped, causing the fuel pump to stop operating. After the fuel cut control has been activated, turning
the ignition switch (engine switch*) from off to on cancels the fuel cut control, and the engine can be
restarted.

(b) AWD Models
(1) A fuel cut control is used to stop the fuel pump when the SRS airbag is deployed at the front collision. In
this system, the airbag deployment signal from the airbag sensor is detected by the ECM, which turns off
the circuit opening relay.
(2) After the fuel cut control has been activated, turning the ignition switch (engine switch*) from off to on
cancels the fuel cut control, and the engine can be restarted.

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDW
Title: 2AR-FE STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A compact and lightweight Planetary reduction-Segment conductor motor (PS) starter assembly is used.
2. SPECIFICATION
Starter Type Planetary Reduction-Segment Conductor Motor (PS) Type
Rating Output 1.7 kW
Rating Voltage 12 V
Length*1 128.1 mm (5.04 in.)
Weight 2950 g (6.50 lb)
Rotational Direction*2 Counterclockwise
*1: Length from the mounted area to the rear end of the starter
*2: Viewed from pinion side
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBT
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: STARTER CONTROL (CRANKING HOLD FUNCTION);; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STARTER CONTROL (CRANKING HOLD FUNCTION)

1. FUNCTION
(a) Once the engine switch is pressed, this function operates the starter until the engine starts, provided
that the brake pedal is depressed and the shift lever is in P or N. This prevents application of the starter
for an inadequate length of time and also prevents the engine from being cranked after it has started.
(b) When the certification ECU detects a start signal, it monitors the engine speed signal (NE) from the ECM
and operates the starter continuously until it determines that the engine has started completely.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HC3
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: STARTER CONTROL (CRANKING HOLD FUNCTION);; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
STARTER CONTROL (CRANKING HOLD FUNCTION)

1. OPERATION
(a) When the driver pushes the engine switch once and the certification ECU (smart key ECU assembly) detects a
start signal, the certification ECU (smart key ECU assembly) outputs ACCD and STAR signals and begins
cranking. Also, the driver can continue cranking for up to 30 seconds by pushing and holding the engine
switch.
(b) If the engine speed reaches approximately 500 rpm, the ECM will judge that the engine has started and will
send a signal to the certification ECU (smart key ECU assembly) using CAN communication. The certification
ECU (smart key ECU assembly) will then stop the operation of the starter.
(c) If CAN communication is cut between the certification ECU (smart key ECU assembly) and the ECM, the
certification ECU (smart key ECU assembly) will receive an engine speed signal (NE) directly from the ECM and
will stop the operation of the starter.
(d) This system cuts off the power current which activates the accessories while the engine is being cranked. This
prevents the intermittent blinking of the accessory lights caused by the voltage instability that occurs during
engine cranking.
(e) This system has the following protections:
The starter does not operate when the engine is operating normally.
If the engine switch is pushed and held, cranking will stop once the engine speed reaches a pre-
determined level. This prevents the starter from over-revving.
If the engine does not start even after approximately 6 seconds of starter operation, the
certification ECU (smart key ECU assembly) will cancel the starter relay output. Furthermore, if the
engine does not start after the engine switch has been pushed and held and cranking has continued
for 30 seconds, cranking will be canceled in order to protect the starter.
It will not be possible to operate the starter for 2 seconds after engine starting has failed and
cranking has been canceled. This helps to protect the starter.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBU
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ACOUSTIC CONTROL INDUCTION SYSTEM (ACIS) CONTROL;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ACOUSTIC CONTROL INDUCTION SYSTEM (ACIS) CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The ACIS uses a bulkhead to divide the intake manifold into 2 stages, with an intake air control valve in the
bulkhead being opened and closed to vary the effective length of the intake manifold in accordance with the
engine speed and throttle valve opening angle. This increases the power output in all ranges from low to high
speed.
*1 Crank Position Sensor *2 ECM

*3 VSV *4 Actuator
*5 Throttle Position Sensor *6 Intake Air Control Valve
*7 Vacuum Tank *8 Check Valve
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ACOUSTIC CONTROL INDUCTION SYSTEM (ACIS) CONTROL;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ACOUSTIC CONTROL INDUCTION SYSTEM (ACIS) CONTROL

1. OPERATION
(a) When Intake Air Control Valve Closed (VSV On)
(1) The ECM activates the VSV to match the longer pulsation cycle so that the negative pressure acts on the
diaphragm chamber of the actuator. This closes the intake air control valve. As a result, the effective
length of the intake manifold is increased and the intake efficiency in the medium speed range is
improved due to the dynamic effect of the intake air, thereby increasing the power output.
(b) When Intake Air Control Valve Open (VSV Off)

(1) The ECM deactivates the VSV to match the shorter pulsation cycle so that atmospheric air is led into the
diaphragm chamber of the actuator and opens the intake air control valve. When the intake air control
valve is open, the effective length of the intake air chamber is shortened and peak intake efficiency is
shifted to the low-to-high engine speed range, thus providing greater output at low-to-high engine
speeds.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBV
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: TUMBLE CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TUMBLE CONTROL
1. FUNCTION
(a) In the tumble control system, the tumble control valve remains fully closed during cold start and cold running
conditions, in order to create a strong tumble current in the combustion chamber. In addition, this system
optimally controls the ignition timing and the fuel injection volume in accordance with the opening and closing
of the valve. As a result, the system improves combustion while the engine is running cold.
*1 Tumble Control Valve *2 Actuator (DC motor)

*3 Tumble Control Valve Position Sensor *4 ECM
*5 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor *6 Fuel Injector Assembly
*7 Ignition Coil Assembly - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCB
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: TUMBLE CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TUMBLE CONTROL
1. OPERATION
(a) Engine Running Cold
(1) To improve combustion, the ECM operates the actuator to fully close the tumble control valve, in
order to create a strong tumble current in the combustion chamber. This enables the engine to
operate at a lean air-fuel ratio immediately after a cold start.
(2) Based on the signals from various sensors, the ECM retards the ignition timing in order to reduce the
amount of unburned gas and promote the warming up of the TWC. In addition, the ECM optimizes
the fuel injection volume.
(3) The vacuum pressure created downstream of the valve promotes the atomization of the fuel and
prevents the fuel from adhering to the ports.
(4) These measures help reduce exhaust gas emissions while the engine is running cold.
(b) Engine Warmed Up
(1) The ECM operates the actuator to fully open the tumble control valve. When the valve is fully open,
the passage has minimal intake resistance in order to improve engine performance.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBW
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The non-contact type accelerator pedal sensor assembly uses a Hall IC.
(b) The magnetic yoke mounted at the accelerator pedal arm rotates around the Hall IC in accordance with the
amount of effort applied to the accelerator pedal. The Hall IC converts the changes in the magnetic flux into
electrical signals, and outputs them as accelerator pedal effort to the ECM.
(c) The Hall IC contains circuits for the main and sub signals. The Hall IC converts the accelerator pedal depressed
angles into electric signals with 2 differing characteristics and outputs them to the ECM.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBX
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle body assembly to detect the opening angle of the
throttle valve. The throttle position sensor converts the magnetic flux density that changes when the
magnetic yoke (located on the same axis as the throttle shaft) rotates around the Hall IC into electric signals
to operate the throttle control motor.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBY
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: KNOCK CONTROL SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
KNOCK CONTROL SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) In a conventional knock control sensor (resonant type), a vibration plate is built into the sensor. This plate has the same
resonance point as the knocking* frequency of the engine block. This sensor can only detect vibrations in this frequency band.
HINT:
*: The term "knock" or "knocking" is used in this case to describe either preignition or detonation of the air fuel mixture in the
combustion chamber. This preignition or detonation refers to the air fuel mixture being ignited earlier than is advantageous.
This use of "knock" or "knocking" is not primarily used to refer to a loud mechanical noise that may be produced by an engine.
(b) A flat type knock control sensor (non-resonant type) has the ability to detect vibrations in a wider frequency band (from
approximately 5 kHz to 15 kHz). The sensor has the following features:
The engine knocking frequency will vary slightly depending on the engine speed. The flat type knock control sensor
can detect vibrations even when the engine knocking frequency changes. Due to the use of the flat type knock
control sensor, the vibration detection ability has been increased compared to a conventional type knock control
sensor, and more precise ignition timing control is possible.
(c) A flat type knock control sensor is installed in an engine by placing it over the stud bolt installed on the cylinder block. For this
reason, a hole for the stud bolt exists in the center of the sensor.
(d) In the sensor, a steel weight is located in the upper portion. An insulator is located between the weight and the piezoelectric
element.
(e) An open/short circuit detection resistor is integrated in the sensor. When the ignition switch (engine switch*) is on (IG), the
open/short circuit detection resistor in the knock control sensor and the resistor in the ECM keep the voltage at terminal KNK1
constant. An Integrated Circuit (IC) in the ECM constantly monitors the voltage of terminal KNK1. If the open/short circuit
occurs between the knock control sensor and the ECM, the voltage of terminal KNK1 will change and the ECM will detect the
open/short circuit and store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).

(f) Vibrations caused by knocking are transmitted to the steel weight. The inertia of this weight applies pressure to the
piezoelectric element. This action generates electromotive force.
*1 Steel Weight *2 Piezoelectric Element

*1 Steel Weight *2 Piezoelectric Element
*a Inertia - -
(g) To prevent water accumulation in the connecter, make sure to install the flat type knock control sensor in the position shown
in the following illustration:
*1 Knock Control Sensor - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBZ
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND CAMSHAFT POSITION
SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND CAMSHAFT POSITION

SENSOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A pick-up coil type crank position sensor is used. The timing rotor of the crankshaft consists of 34 teeth with
2 teeth missing. The crank position sensor outputs the crankshaft rotation signals every 10°, and the missing
teeth are used to determine the top dead center.
(b) The Magnetic Resistance Element (MRE) type intake and exhaust camshaft position sensors are used. To
detect the camshaft position, each timing rotor on the intake and exhaust camshafts is used to generate 3 (3
high output, 3 low output) pulses for every 2 revolutions of the crankshaft.
*1 Crank Position Sensor *2 Timing Rotor

*3 Camshaft Position Sensor (Exhaust) *4 Camshaft Position Sensor (Intake)
(c) The MRE type camshaft position sensor consists of an MRE, a magnet and a sensor. The direction of the
magnetic field changes due to the profile (protruding and non-protruding portions) of the timing rotor, which
passes by the sensor. As a result, the resistance of the MRE changes, and the output voltage to the ECM
changes to high or low. The ECM detects the camshaft position based on this output voltage.
(d) The differences between the MRE type camshaft position sensor and the pick-up coil camshaft position sensor
used on the conventional model are as follows:
ITEM SENSOR TYPE
MRE PICK-UP COIL
Signal Analog output changes with the engine

Constant digital output starts from low engine speeds.
Output speed.
Detection is made by comparing the NE signals with the Detection is made by comparing the NE
Camshaft
high/low output switch timing due to the protruded/non- signals with the change of waveform
Position
protruded portions of the timing rotor, or made based on the that is output when the protruded
Detection
number of the input NE signals during high/low outputs. portion of the timing rotor passes.
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) This camshaft timing oil control valve assembly controls the spool valve using duty-cycle control from the
ECM. This allows hydraulic pressure to be applied to the VVT-i controller advanced or retarded side. When the
engine is stopped, the camshaft timing oil control valve assembly (intake) is in the most retarded position,
and camshaft timing oil control valve assembly (exhaust) is in the most advanced position.
*1 Sleeve *2 Spring
*3 Spool Valve - -
*a To VVT-i Controller (Advanced Side) *b To VVT-i Controller (Retarded Side)
*c Drain *d Oil Pressure
On the exhaust side camshaft timing
*e oil control valve assembly, the advance - -
and retard sides are reversed.
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: SPARK PLUG;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SPARK PLUG
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Long-reach type iridium-tipped spark plugs are used to improve ignition performance while maintaining the
same durability as platinum-tipped spark plugs.
*1 Long-reach Type Spark Plug *2 Conventional Type Spark Plug

*3 Iridium Tip *4 Platinum Tip
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: COOLING FAN CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
COOLING FAN CONTROL

1. OPERATION
(a) The ECM activates the cooling fan relay to control the cooling fan in accordance with the engine coolant
temperature, air conditioning condition, engine speed and vehicle speed.
(b) The cooling fan speeds are controlled in 2 stages: low speed (series connection) and high speed (parallel
connection).
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A DC motor with excellent response and minimal power consumption is used for the throttle control motor.
The ECM performs the duty cycle control of the direction and the amperage of the current that flows to the
throttle control motor in order to regulate the opening of the throttle valve.
*1 Throttle Body Assembly *2 Throttle Control Motor

Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-intelligent (ETCS-i)
CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-intelligent (ETCS-

i) CONTROL
1. OPERATION
(a) The ECM drives the throttle control motor by determining the target throttle valve opening in accordance with
the respective operating condition.
(b) The ECM controls the throttle to an optimal throttle valve opening that is appropriate for driving conditions
such as the amount of the accelerator pedal effort and the engine speed in order to achieve excellent throttle
control and comfort in all operating ranges.
(c) The ECM controls the throttle valve in order to constantly maintain an ideal idle speed.
(d) As part of the TRAC system, the throttle valve is closed by a request signal from the skid control ECU if an
excessive amount of slippage is created at a driving wheel, thus facilitating the vehicle in ensuring stability
and driving force.
(e) In order to bring the effectiveness of the VSC system control into full play, the throttle valve opening angle is
controlled by effecting a coordination control with the skid control ECU.
(f) The integrated cruise control ECU of the ECM directly actuates the throttle valve for operation of the cruise
control.
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: INTAKE MASS AIR FLOW METER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
INTAKE MASS AIR FLOW METER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The compact and lightweight intake mass air flow meter sub-assembly, which is a plug-in type, allows a
portion of the intake air to flow through the detection area. By directly measuring the mass and the flow rate
of the intake air, detection precision is ensured and intake air resistance is reduced.
(b) This intake mass air flow meter sub-assembly has a built-in intake air temperature sensor.
*1 Hot-wire Element *2 Temperature Sensing Element
*3 Intake Air Temperature Sensor - -

*a A - A Cross Section - -
Air Flow - -
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: TUMBLE CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
TUMBLE CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The non-contact type tumble control valve position sensor uses a Hall IC. It detects the tumble control valve
opening angle.
(b) The sensor converts the magnetic flux density that changes when the magnetic yoke (located on the same
axis as the tumble control valve shaft) rotates around the Hall IC into electric signals and sends them to the
ECM.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCC
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The engine control system performs highly accurate, integrated control of the following systems to
achieve high performance, high power, high fuel efficiency and reduced emissions:
(1) Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI)
(2) Electronic Spark Advance (ESA)
(3) Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i)
(4) Dual Variable Valve Timing-intelligent (Dual VVT-i)
(5) Acoustic Control Induction System (ACIS)
(6) Tumble Control
(7) Fuel Pump Control
(8) Air Conditioning Cut-off Control
(9) Cooling Fan Control
(10) Starter Control (Cranking Hold Function)*
(11) Air Fuel Ratio Sensor and Oxygen Sensor Heater Control
(12) Engine Immobiliser
(13) Brake Override System
(14) Diagnosis
(15) Fail-safe

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HBO
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ENGINE CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ENGINE CONTROL
1. FUNCTION OF MAIN COMPONENTS
(a) The main components of the engine control system are as follows:
COMPONENT OUTLINE QUANTITY FUNCTION
The ECM optimally controls the engine control system to

ECM Forest 2 1 suit the operating conditions of the engine in accordance
with the signals provided by the sensors.
Air Fuel Ratio

Type with Heater
Sensor (Bank 1, 1
(Planar Type) Detects the oxygen concentration in the exhaust
Sensor 1)
emissions by measuring the electromotive force which is
Oxygen Sensor generated in the sensor itself.
Type with Heater
(Bank 1, Sensor 1
(Cup Type)
2)
Intake Mass Air

Uses a built-in hot-wire to directly detect the intake air
Flow Meter Sub- Hot-wire Type 1
mass.
assembly
Intake Air
Temperature Thermistor Type 1 Detects the intake air temperature.
Sensor
Engine Coolant
Temperature Thermistor Type 1 Detects the engine coolant temperature.
Sensor
Crank Position
Pick-up Coil Type Detects the engine speed and performs the cylinder
Sensor [Rotor 1
[36 - 2] identification.
Teeth]
Magnetic
Camshaft Position
Resistance
Sensor [Rotor 2 Performs the cylinder identification.
Element (MRE)
Teeth]
Type [3]
Throttle Position
Non-contact Type 1 Detects the throttle valve opening angle.
Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Detects the amount of pedal effort applied to the
Non-contact Type 1
Sensor Assembly accelerator pedal.
Tumble Control
Valve Position Non-contact Type 1 Detects the tumble control valve opening angle.
Sensor
Built-in
Knock Control Piezoelectric 1 Detects an occurrence of engine knocking indirectly from
Sensor Element Type the vibration of the cylinder block caused by the
(Flat Type) occurrence of engine knocking.
Camshaft Timing
Changes the oil passage to the VVT-i controller in
Oil Control Valve Solenoid Type 2
response to signals from the ECM.
Assembly
Throttle Control Regulates the opening of the throttle valve in accordance
DC Motor 1
Motor with the signals from the ECM.
The fuel injector assembly is an electromagnetically-

Fuel Injector
12-hole Type 4 operated nozzle which injects fuel in accordance with the
Assembly
signals from the ECM.
Incorporates an igniter and provides a high level of

Ignition Coil
Type with Igniter 4 voltage necessary for ignition in accordance with signals
Assembly
from the ECM.
Duty Vacuum
Controls the actuator for ACIS in accordance with ECM
Switching Valve Solenoid Type 1
signals.
(VSV for ACIS)
Iridium-tipped Sparks a high level of voltage from the ignition coil
Spark Plug 4
Type assembly inside the cylinder.
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The engine control system has the following features. The ECM controls these systems:
SYSTEM OUTLINE
An L-type SFI system detects the intake air mass with a hot-wire type
Sequential Multiport
intake mass air flow meter sub-assembly.
Fuel Injection (SFI)
The fuel injection system is a sequential multiport fuel injection system.
Electronic Spark Ignition timing is determined by the ECM based on signals from various sensors. The
Advance (ESA) ECM corrects ignition timing in response to engine knocking.
Electronic Throttle Optimally controls the throttle valve opening in accordance with the amount of
Control System- accelerator pedal effort, the throttle valve opening control request from the ECM,
intelligent (ETCS-i) and the condition of the engine and the vehicle.
Dual Variable Valve

Regulates operation of the intake and exhaust camshafts to ensure an optimal valve
Timing-intelligent
timing in accordance with the engine condition.
(Dual VVT-i)
Acoustic Control
The intake air passages are switched in accordance with the engine speed and
Induction System
throttle valve opening angle to provide high performance in all speed ranges.
(ACIS)
Controls fully closes the tumble control valve during cold start and cold running
Tumble Control
conditions to improve exhaust emissions while the engine is running cold.
Based on signals from the ECM, the fuel pump control ECU assembly
controls the fuel pump.
2WD
The fuel pump is stopped when any of the Supplemental Restraint System
Fuel Pump
(SRS) airbags are deployed.
Control
Fuel pump operation is controlled by signals from the ECM.
AWD The fuel pump is stopped when any of the Supplemental Restraint System
Air Conditioning Cut- By turning the air conditioning compressor assembly on or off in accordance with the
off Control engine condition, driveability is maintained.
Radiator cooling fan operation is controlled by signals from the ECM based on the
Cooling Fan Control engine coolant temperature sensor signal (THW) and the operating condition of the
air conditioning system.
Once the engine switch is pushed, this control continues to operate the starter until
Starter Control*
the engine has started.
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Maintains the temperature of the air fuel ratio sensor and oxygen sensor at an
and Oxygen Sensor appropriate level to increase accuracy of detection of the oxygen concentration in the
Heater Control exhaust gas.
Prohibits fuel delivery and ignition if an attempt is made to start the engine with an
Engine Immobiliser
invalid key.
The driving torque is restricted when both the accelerator and brake pedals are
Brake Override System
depressed.
When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM diagnoses and memorizes the failed
Diagnosis
section.
When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stops or controls the engine
Fail-safe
according to the data already stored in memory.

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCD
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCE
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*A 2WD Models - -
Intake Mass Air Flow Meter Sub-
assembly
*1 *2 Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
*1 *2 Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Intake Air Temperature
Sensor
*3 ECM *4 Accelerator Pedal Sensor Assembly
Fuel Suction with Pump Tube

Assembly
*5 DLC3 *6
Fuel Pump
Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve

*7 Fuel Pump Control ECU Assembly *8
Assembly (Intake)
Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve
*9 *10 Camshaft Position Sensor (Exhaust)
Assembly (Exhaust)
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor
*11 *12 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
1)
Actuator (for Tumble Control) Throttle Body Assembly
*13 Built-in Tumble Control *14 Throttle Position Sensor

valve Position Sensor Throttle Control Motor
*15 Camshaft Position Sensor (Intake) *16 Ignition Coil Assembly

*17 Fuel Injector Assembly *18 VSV (for ACIS)
*19 Knock Control Sensor *20 Crank Position Sensor

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCM
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: COOLING FAN CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
COOLING FAN CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The cooling fan control system is controlled to achieve an optimal fan speed in accordance with the
engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, engine speed and air conditioning operating conditions.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCN
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: VVT-i CONTROLLER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
VVT-i CONTROLLER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Each controller consists of a housing driven by the timing chain and a vane coupled with the intake or
exhaust camshaft.
(b) Both the intake and exhaust sides have a four-blade vane.
(c) The oil pressure sent from the advanced or retarded side path at the intake and exhaust camshafts causes
rotation in the VVT-i controller vane circumferential direction to vary the intake and exhaust valve timing
continuously.
(d) When the engine is stopped, a lock pin locks the intake camshaft at the most retarded end and the exhaust
camshaft at the most advanced end to ensure that the engine starts properly.
(e) An advance assist spring is provided on the exhaust side VVT-i controller. This spring applies torque in the
advance direction when the engine is stopped, thus ensuring the engagement of the lock pin.
*1 Intake Side VVT-i Controller *2 Housing
*3 Vane (Fixed on Intake Camshaft) *4 Lock Pin
*5 Sprocket *6 Intake Camshaft
*7 Exhaust Side VVT-i Controller *8 Advance Assist Spring
*9 Vane (Fixed on Exhaust Camshaft) *10 Exhaust Camshaft

*a At a Stop *b In Operation
Oil Pressure - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCO
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CYLINDER HEAD COVER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A lightweight magnesium alloy die-cast cylinder head cover sub-assembly is used.
(b) An oil delivery pipe is installed inside the cylinder head cover sub-assembly. This ensures lubrication to the
sliding parts of the valve rocker arm sub-assembly, improving reliability.
*1 Cylinder Head Cover Sub-assembly *2 Cylinder Head Cover Gasket
*3 Oil Delivery Pipe - -
*a View from A - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCP
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CYLINDER HEAD;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CYLINDER HEAD
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The cylinder head structure has been simplified by separating the camshaft housing (cam journal portion)
from the cylinder head.
*1 Camshaft Bearing Cap *2 Camshaft Housing

*3 Cylinder Head - -
(b) The cylinder head, which is made of aluminum, contains a pentroof-type combustion chamber. The spark plug
is located in the center of the combustion chamber in order to improve the engine's anti-knocking
performance.
(c) A taper squish combustion chamber is used to improve anti-knocking performance. In addition, engine
performance and fuel economy have been improved.
(d) Long nozzle type fuel injectors are installed in the cylinder head to reduce the distance from injector to intake
valve, thus preventing the fuel from adhering to the intake port walls, and reducing HC exhaust emissions.
*a Exhaust Side *b Intake Side
*c Taper Squish *d A - A Cross Section
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCQ
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A triple-layer metal type cylinder head gasket is used.
(b) The surface of the cylinder head gasket is coated with fluoro rubber to ensure a high level of reliability.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCR
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CYLINDER BLOCK;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CYLINDER BLOCK
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Water passages are provided between the cylinder bores. By allowing the engine coolant to flow between the
cylinder bores, this construction enables the temperature of the cylinder walls to be kept uniform.
(b) The liners are the spiny-type, which have been manufactured so that their casting exteriors form large
irregular surfaces in order to enhance the adhesion between the liners and the aluminum cylinder block. The
enhanced adhesion helps heat dissipation, resulting in a lower overall temperature and heat deformation of
the cylinder bores.
(c) Blowby gas passages are provided in the crankcase.
(d) Oil drain passages are provided in the crankcase. This prevents the crankshaft from mixing the engine oil,
which reduces rotational resistance.
(e) The oil filter bracket is integrated into the crankcase.
*1 Cylinder Block *2 Crankshaft Bearing Cap

*3 Plastic Region Tightening Bolt *4 Oil Filter Bracket
*5 Crankcase - -
*a Oil Drain Passage *b Blowby Gas Passage

*c Water Passage *d A - A Cross Section
Spiny-type Liner (Irregularly shaped

*e - -
outer casting surface of liner)
(f) An oil separator is provided in the blowby gas passage inside the cylinder block. This separates the engine oil
from the blowby gas in order to reduce the degradation and consumption of volume of the engine oil.
*1 Oil Separator *2 Case Separator
*3 Oil Separator Cover - -
(g) Through the use of the offset crankshaft, the bore center is shifted 10 mm (0.39 in.) towards the exhaust, in
relation to the crankshaft center. Thus, the side force to the cylinder wall is reduced when the maximum
pressure is applied, which contributes to fuel economy.
*a Bore Center *b Intake Side
*c Crankshaft Center *d Exhaust Side
*e Offset Crankshaft *f Center Crankshaft

*g Maximum Pressure *h Crankshaft Center
(h) A shallow bottom water jacket is used. The resulting reduction in the volume of the engine coolant improves
warm-up performance, which contributes to improved fuel economy.
(i) A cylinder block water jacket spacer is provided in the water jacket of the cylinder block.
(j) The cylinder block water jacket spacer suppresses the water flow in the bottom of the water jackets, guides
the coolant in the upper area of the water jacket and ensures uniform temperature distribution. As a result,
the viscosity of the engine oil that acts as a lubricant between the bore walls and the pistons can be lowered,
thus reducing friction.
*1 Cylinder Block Water Jacket Spacer *2 Water Jacket

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCS
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: PISTON;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PISTON
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The piston is made of aluminum alloy and the skirt area is made compact and lightweight.
(b) The piston head portion uses a taper squish shape to improve the fuel combustion efficiency.
(c) The piston skirt has been coated with resin to reduce the friction loss.
(d) The groove of the top ring is coated with anodic oxide to improve wear resistance and corrosion resistance.
(e) Low-tension piston rings are used to reduce friction and achieve excellent fuel economy.
(f) Narrow-width piston rings are used to reduce weight and friction.
(g) A No. 1 compression ring with an inside bevel shape is used.
(h) A Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD) coating has been applied to the surface of the No. 1 compression ring in
order to improve its wear resistance.
*1 Piston *2 No. 1 Compression Ring
*3 No. 2 Compression Ring *4 Oil Ring

*a Taper Squish Shape *b Anodic Oxide Coating
*c Resin Coating *d PVD Coating

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCT
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: BALANCE SHAFT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
BALANCE SHAFT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A balance shaft is used to reduce vibrations.
(b) The crankshaft directly drives the No. 1 balance shaft.
(c) In addition, a resin gear is used on the driven side to suppress noise and offer lightweight design.
*1 Balance Shaft Drive Gear *2 No. 2 Balance Shaft

*3 No. 1 Balance Shaft Housing *4 No. 1 Balance Shaft
*5 No. 2 Balance Shaft Housing *6 Crankshaft
*a Resin Gear - -
2. OPERATION
(a) In the in-line 4-cylinder engine, the crankshaft angle for the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders are at the exact
opposite (180°) positions of the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Therefore, the inertial force of the pistons and the
connecting rods of the former 2 cylinders and of the latter 2 cylinders almost cancel each other out. However,
because the position at which the piston reaches its maximum speed is located toward the top dead center
from the center of the stroke, the upward inertial force is greater than the downward inertial force. This
from the center of the stroke, the upward inertial force is greater than the downward inertial force. This
unbalanced secondary inertial force is generated twice for each rotation of the crankshaft.
(b) To cancel the unbalanced secondary inertial force, 2 balance shafts are rotated twice for each rotation of the
crankshaft and generate inertial force in the opposite direction. Also, in order to cancel the inertial force
generated by the balance shaft itself, the balance shaft actually consists of 2 shafts rotating in opposite
directions.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCU
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: VALVE MECHANISM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
VALVE MECHANISM
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The Dual VVT-i system is used to improve fuel economy and engine performance and reduce exhaust
emissions.
(b) The intake and exhaust camshafts are driven by a timing chain.
(c) Valve rocker arm sub-assemblies with the built-in needle bearings are used. This reduces the friction that
occurs between the cams and the areas (valve rocker arms) that push the valves down, thus improving fuel
economy.
(d) The valve lash adjuster assembly, which maintains a constant zero valve clearance through the use of oil
pressure and spring force, is used.
*1 No. 2 Chain Vibration Damper *2 Timing Chain

*3 Intake VVT-i Controller *4 Chain Tensioner Slipper
*5 Chain Tensioner *6 No. 1 Chain Vibration Damper
*7 Exhaust VVT-i Controller *8 Intake Valve
*9 Exhaust Valve *10 Exhaust Camshaft
*11 Intake Camshaft *12 Valve Rocker Arm Sub-assembly
*13 Valve Lash Adjuster Assembly *14 Valve
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCW
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: VALVE LASH ADJUSTER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
VALVE LASH ADJUSTER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The valve lash adjuster assembly, which is located at the fulcrum of the valve rocker arm sub-assembly,
consists primarily of a plunger, plunger spring, check ball and check ball spring.
(b) The engine oil supplied by the cylinder head and the built-in spring actuates the valve lash adjuster assembly.
The oil pressure and the spring force that act on the plunger push the valve rocker arm sub-assembly against
the cam, in order to adjust the valve clearance that is created during the opening and closing of the valve. As
a result, engine noise has been reduced.
*1 Cam *2 Valve Rocker Arm Sub-assembly
*3 Oil Passage *4 Valve Lash Adjuster Assembly
*5 Plunger *6 Check Ball

*7 Check Ball Spring *8 Plunger Spring
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCX
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CAMSHAFT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CAMSHAFT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) An oil passage is provided in the intake and exhaust camshafts in order to supply engine oil to the Dual VVT-i
system.
(b) A VVT-i controller has been installed on each front of the intake and exhaust camshafts to vary the timing of
the intake and exhaust valves.
(c) Together with the use of the valve rocker arm sub-assembly, the cam profile has been designed with an
indented R (radius). This results in increased valve lift when the valve begins to open and finishes closing,
helping to achieve enhanced output performance.
(d) A timing rotor for the camshaft position sensor is provided at each back end of the intake and exhaust
camshafts.
*1 Intake Camshaft *2 Intake VVT-i Controller

*3 Exhaust VVT-i Controller *4 Exhaust Camshaft
*5 Timing Rotor - -
*a Cam with Indented R *b Indented R Portion of Cam (Profile)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCY
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: V-RIBBED BELT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
V-RIBBED BELT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Accessory components are driven by a serpentine belt consisting of a single V-ribbed belt. It reduces the
overall engine length, weight and the number of engine parts.
(b) An automatic V-ribbed belt tensioner assembly eliminates the need for tension adjustment.
Idler Pulley (V-ribbed Belt Tensioner

*1 *2 Crankshaft Pulley
Assembly)
*3 Air Conditioning Compressor Pulley *4 Water Pump Pulley
*5 Alternator Pulley - -
(c) The tension of the V-ribbed belt is properly maintained by the tension spring enclosed in the V-ribbed belt
tensioner assembly.
*1 Spring *2 Arm
*3 Idler Pulley - -
*a Cross Section *b Fulcrum
*c Belt Loosen Direction *d Belt Tension Direction
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HCZ
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: TIMING CHAIN AND CHAIN TENSIONER;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
TIMING CHAIN AND CHAIN TENSIONER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A roller chain with a 9.525 mm (0.375 in.) pitch is used.
(b) The timing chain is lubricated by a timing chain oil jet.
(c) The chain tensioner uses a spring and oil pressure to maintain proper chain tension at all times. The chain
tensioner suppresses noise generated by the timing chain.
(d) The chain tensioner is ratchet type with a non-return mechanism.
(e) To achieve excellent serviceability, the chain tensioner is constructed so that it can be removed and installed
from the outside of the timing chain cover assembly.
*1 No. 1 Chain Vibration Damper *2 Timing Chain

*3 Chain Tensioner Slipper *4 Chain Tensioner
*5 No. 2 Chain Vibration Damper - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HD0
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CONNECTING ROD AND CONNECTING ROD BEARING;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CONNECTING ROD AND CONNECTING ROD BEARING

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The connecting rods and caps are made of micro-alloyed steel.
(b) Plastic region tightening bolts are used on the connecting rod.
(c) The connecting rod bearings are reduced in width to reduce friction.
(d) The lining surface of the connecting rod bearing has been micro-grooved to achieve an optimal amount of oil
clearance. As a result, cold-engine cranking performance has been improved and engine vibrations have been
reduced.
*1 Connecting Rod *2 Plastic Region Tightening Bolt

*3 Connecting Rod Bearing - -
*a Micro-grooved - -
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: TIMING CHAIN COVER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TIMING CHAIN COVER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) An aluminum die-cast timing chain cover assembly is used.
(b) The timing chain cover assembly has an integrated construction consisting of an oil pump and a timing chain
oil jet. Thus, the number of parts has been reduced, resulting in a weight reduction. The timing chain oil jet
lubricates the timing chain.
(c) To achieve excellent serviceability, service holes for the chain tensioner and intake VVT are provided on the
timing chain cover assembly.
*1 Timing Chain Cover Assembly *2 Timing Chain Oil Jet
*3 Oil Pump - -
*a Service Hole (for Intake VVT) *b Service Hole (for Chain Tensioner)
*c View from A - -
Title: 2AR-FE ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: CRANKSHAFT AND BEARING;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
CRANKSHAFT AND BEARING

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The crankshaft is made of micro-alloyed steel. It has 5 journals and 8 balance weights.
(b) A balance shaft drive gear is provided for the crankshaft.
(c) The lining surface of the crankshaft bearing has been micro-grooved to achieve an optimal amount of oil
clearance. As a result, cold-engine cranking performance has been improved and engine vibrations have been
reduced.
(d) The oil groove on the crankshaft bearing is made eccentric to reduce the amount of oil leakage from the
bearing. This enables the capacity of the oil pump to be reduced in order to achieve a low friction operation.
*1 No. 1 Journal *2 Balance Weight

*3 Balance Shaft Drive Gear *4 Crank Pin
*5 Oil Hole *6 Upper Main Bearing
*7 Lower Main Bearing - -
*a Oil Groove *b Micro-grooved
Title: 2AR-FE FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: FUEL RETURNLESS CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
FUEL RETURNLESS CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) This system is used to reduce evaporative emissions. As shown below, by integrating the fuel filter and fuel
pressure regulator assembly with fuel suction with pump tube assembly, it is possible to discontinue the
return of fuel from the engine area and prevent temperature rise inside the fuel tank assembly.
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper

*1 *2 Fuel Pressure Regulator Assembly
Assembly
*3 Fuel Filter *4 Fuel Pump
*5 *6 Fuel Tank Assembly
Assembly
*7 Fuel Injector Assembly *8 Fuel Delivery Pipe
Title: 2AR-FE FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: FUEL INJECTOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
FUEL INJECTOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A long nozzle type fuel injector assembly is used. This injector has 12 injection holes.
*1 Fuel Injector Assembly - -

*a View from Bottom Side - -
Title: 2AR-FE FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A fuel returnless system is used to reduce evaporative emissions.
(b) A fuel cut control is used to stop the fuel pump when the any of the Supplemental Restraint System
(c) A quick connector is used to connect the fuel pipe with the fuel hose for excellent serviceability.
Title: 2AR-FE FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Purge VSV *2 Fuel Delivery Pipe
*3 Fuel Injector Assembly *4 Quick Connector

Assembly
*5 Fuel Tank Assembly *6
Fuel Filter
Fuel Pump
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL

1. FUNCTION OF MAIN COMPONETS
(a) The main components of the exhaust emission control system are as follows:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
ECM Determines an optimal fuel injection volume based on the signals from various sensors.
Oxidizes CO and HC in the exhaust gas and deoxidizes NOx at the same time to purify them
TWC
into CO 2 , H 2 O and N 2 .
Air Fuel These sensors detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust emissions by measuring the
Ratio Sensor electromotive force which is generated in the sensor itself. For details, see the 2AR-FE ENGINE
Air Fuel CONTROL section.
Ratio Sensor [SFI SYSTEM > AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR AND HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR ]
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDA
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL

1. FUNCTION OF MAIN COMPONETS
(a) The main components of the evaporative emission control system are as follows:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Controls the canister pump module and the purge VSV in accordance with the signals from various sensors, in
ECM order to achieve a purge volume that suits the driving conditions. In addition, the ECM monitors the system
for any leak and stores a DTC if a malfunction is found.
Charcoal Canister
Contains activated charcoal to absorb the fuel vapor that is created in the fuel tank assembly.
Assembly
Vent Valve Opens and closes the fresh air line in accordance with signals from the ECM.
Leak
Detection
Canister Applies vacuum to the evaporative emission system in accordance with signals from the ECM.
Pump and
Pump
Pump Motor
Module
Canister
Pressure Detects the pressure in the evaporative emission system and sends the signals to the ECM.
Sensor
Opens in accordance with the signals from the ECM when the system is purging, in order to send the fuel
Purge VSV vapor that was absorbed by the charcoal canister assembly into the intake manifold. In system monitoring
mode, this valve controls the introduction of vacuum into the fuel tank assembly.
No. 1 Charcoal Canister

Prevents dust and debris in the fresh air from entering the system.
Filter
Fresh Air Line Fresh air goes into the charcoal canister assembly and the cleaned drain air goes out into the atmosphere.
2. OPERATING CONDITION
(a) The following are the typical conditions necessary to enable an evaporative emission leak check:
5 hours have elapsed after the engine has been turned off.*1
Altitude: Below 2400 m (8000 feet)
Battery Voltage: 10.5 V or more
Typical Enabling Conditions
Ignition Switch (Engine Switch*2): Off
Engine Coolant Temperature: 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Intake Air Temperature: 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
*1: If engine coolant temperature does not drop below 35°C (95°F), this time is extended to 7 hours. Even after that, if the
temperature is not less than 35°C (95°F), the time is extended to 9.5 hours.
*2: Models with smart key system
HINT:
The canister pump module performs a fuel evaporative emission leak check. This check is performed approximately 5 hours after
the engine is turned off. Sound may be heard coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
A pinpoint pressure test procedure is performed by pressurizing the fresh air line that runs from the canister pump module to the
No. 1 charcoal canister filter neck. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
3. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) Purge Flow Control
(1) When the engine has reached a predetermined state [closed loop, engine coolant temperature above 80°C (176°F), etc.],
stored fuel vapor is purged from the charcoal canister assembly whenever the purge VSV is opened by the ECM.
(2) The ECM changes the duty ratio cycle of the purge VSV, thus controlling purge flow volume. Purge flow volume is determined
by the intake manifold pressure and the duty ratio cycle of the purge VSV. Atmospheric pressure is allowed into the charcoal
canister assembly to ensure that purge flow is constantly maintained whenever purge vacuum is applied to the charcoal
canister assembly.
System Diagram
*1 Purge VSV (Open) *2 ECM
*3 Charcoal Canister Assembly - -
*a To Intake Manifold *b Atmosphere
(b) Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
(1) When the internal pressure of the fuel tank assembly increases during refueling, the fuel vapor enters the charcoal canister
assembly. The air that has had the fuel vapor removed from it will be discharged through the fresh air line. The vent valve is
used to open and close the fresh air line, and it is always open (even when the engine is stopped) except when the vehicle is in
monitoring mode (the valve will remain open as long as the vehicle is not in monitoring mode). If the vehicle is refueled in
system monitoring mode, the ECM will recognize the refueling by way of the canister pressure sensor, which will detect the
sudden pressure increase in the fuel tank assembly, and the ECM will open the vent valve.
System Diagram
*1 Purge VSV (Closed) *2 Canister Pump Module
*3 Vent Valve *4 Charcoal Canister Assembly
(c) EVAP Leak Check
(1) General
Approximately 5 hours after the ignition switch (engine switch*) has been turned off, the ECM operates the canister
pump module to detect any evaporative emission leakage occurring between the fuel tank assembly and the charcoal
canister assembly through changes in the fuel tank assembly pressure.
The EVAP leak check operates in accordance with the following timing chart:
Timing Chart
ORDER OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Atmospheric
The ECM turns the vent valve off (vent) and measures EVAP system pressure to 60
1) Pressure
determine the atmospheric pressure. sec.
Measurement
0.02 in. Leak The leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) limited by a 0.02 in.
360
2) Pressure orifice, and the pressure is measured. The ECM determines this as the 0.02 in. leak
sec.
Measurement pressure (reference pressure).
The leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP system
and the EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized pressure is larger than Within
EVAP Leak
3) the 0.02 in. leak pressure, the ECM determines that the EVAP system has a leak. If 15
Check
the EVAP pressure does not stabilize within 15 minutes, the ECM cancels the EVAP min.
monitor.
Purge VSV The ECM opens the purge VSV and measures the EVAP pressure increase. If the 10
4)
Monitor increase is large, the ECM interprets this as normal. sec.
Repeat 0.02
in. Leak The leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) limited by a 0.02 in. 60
5) Pressure orifice and the pressure is measured. The ECM determines this as the 0.02 in. leak sec.
Measurement pressure.
6) Final Check The ECM measures the atmospheric pressure and records the monitor result. -
(2) Atmospheric Pressure Measurement
1. When the ignition switch (engine switch*) is turned off, the purge VSV and the vent valve are turned off. Therefore,
atmospheric pressure is introduced into the charcoal canister assembly.
2. The ECM measures the atmospheric pressure using the canister pressure sensor.
3. If the measured atmospheric pressure is out of range, the ECM actuates the leak detection pump in order to monitor
the changes in the pressure.
System Diagram
*1 Purge VSV (Off) *2 ECM

*3 Canister Pump Module *4 Vent Valve (Off)
*a Atmosphere - -
Timing Chart
(3) 0.02 in. Leak Pressure Measurement
1. The purpose of this measurement is to confirm leak detection pump operation, and to provide a baseline
measurement value that is used for comparison in subsequent leak test steps.
2. The vent valve remains off, atmospheric pressure is introduced into the charcoal canister assembly and the ECM
actuates the leak detection pump, creating a vacuum in the piping close to the canister pressure sensor.
3. At this time, the pressure will not decrease below what is referred to as the 0.02 in. pressure due to the atmospheric
pressure that enters the piping close to the pump and sensor through the 0.02 in. diameter reference orifice.
4. The ECM compares its standard and this pressure. If the pressure is within the acceptable range, the ECM stores this
pressure as the 0.02 in. leak pressure.
5. If the pressure is below the standard, the ECM will determine that the reference orifice is clogged and store DTC
P043E in its memory.
6. If the pressure is above the standard, the ECM will determine that a high flow rate pressure is passing through the
reference orifice and store DTCs P043F, P2401 and P2402 in its memory.
System Diagram

*5 Reference Orifice - -
*a Atmosphere - -
Timing Chart
(4) EVAP Leak Check
1. While actuating the leak detection pump, the ECM turns the vent valve on in order to introduce a vacuum into the
charcoal canister assembly.
2. When the pressure in the system stabilizes, the ECM compares this pressure and the 0.02 in. pressure in order to
determine if a leak is present.
3. If the detected pressure is below the 0.02 in. pressure, the ECM determines that there is no leak.
4. If the detected pressure is above the 0.02 in. pressure and near atmospheric pressure, the ECM determines that
there is a gross leak (large hole) and stores DTC P0455 in its memory.
5. If the detected pressure is above the 0.02 in. pressure, the ECM determines that there is a small leak (minor leak)
and stores DTC P0456 in its memory.
System Diagram

*3 Canister Pump Module *4 Vent Valve (On)
*a Atmosphere *b Vacuum
Timing Chart
(5) Purge VSV Monitor
1. After completing an EVAP leak check, the ECM turns the purge VSV on (open) with the leak detection pump
actuated, and introduces the atmospheric pressure from the intake manifold to the charcoal canister assembly.
2. If the pressure change at this time is within the normal range (a pressure change occurs), the ECM determines the
condition to be normal.
3. If the pressure change is out of the normal range (insufficient pressure change occurs), the ECM will stop the purge
VSV monitor (purge monitor) and store DTC P0441 in its memory.
System Diagram
*1 Purge VSV (On) *2 ECM

*3 Canister Pump Module *4 Vent Valve (On)
*a Atmosphere - -
Timing Chart
(6) Repeat 0.02 in. Leak Pressure Measurement
1. While the ECM operates the leak detection pump, the purge VSV and vent valve are turned off and a repeat 0.02 in.
leak pressure measurement is performed.
2. The ECM compares the measured pressure with the pressure during the EVAP leak check.
3. If the pressure during the EVAP leak check is less than the repeat 0.02 in. leak pressure measurement, the ECM
determines that there is no leak.
4. If the pressure during the EVAP leak check is above the repeat 0.02 in. leak pressure measurement, the ECM
determines that there is a small leak and stores DTC P0456 in its memory.
System Diagram

*a Atmosphere - -
Timing Chart
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDB
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC);;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A TWC is provided in the exhaust manifold converter sub-assembly and also in the center exhaust pipe
assembly.
(b) An exhaust manifold converter sub-assembly is used for warm-up of the TWC.
Exhaust Manifold Converter Sub-

*1 *2 TWC
*1 *2 TWC
assembly
*3 Front Exhaust Pipe Assembly - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDC
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: FUEL INLET (FRESH AIR INLET);; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
FUEL INLET (FRESH AIR INLET)

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The fresh air line inlet is located near the fuel inlet pipe opening. The fresh air from the atmosphere and the
drain air cleaned by the charcoal canister assembly will go in or out of the system through the passages
shown below:
*1 Fuel Tank Cap Assembly *2 No. 1 Charcoal Canister Filter

*3 Fuel Inlet Pipe - -
*a Fresh Air *b Cleaned Drain Air
*c To Charcoal Canister Assembly - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDD
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: CANISTER PUMP MODULE;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
CANISTER PUMP MODULE

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The canister pump module consists of a vent valve, reference orifice, canister pressure sensor, leak detection
pump and pump motor.
(b) The vent valve switches the passages in accordance with the signals received from the ECM.
(c) A DC type brushless motor is used for the pump motor.
(d) A vane type leak detection pump is used.
*1 Canister Pump Module *2 Vent Valve

*3 Reference Orifice *4 Canister Pressure Sensor
*5 Pump Motor *6 Leak Detection Pump

*a Fresh Air *b Cross Sectiom
*c To Charcoal Canister Assembly - -
Simplified Diagram
*1 Canister Pump Module *2 Leak Detection Pump and Pump Motor
*3 Fliter *4 Canister Pressure Sensor
Reference Orifice [0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

*5 *6 Vent Valve
Diameter]
*a Fresh Air *b To Charcoal Canister Assembly

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDE
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Exhaust Emission Control System
(1) Three-Way Catalysts (TWCs) are used to reduce emissions in the exhaust gas.
(2) Based on the signals from the air fuel ratio sensor and oxygen sensor, the ECM controls the fuel
injection volume in order to optimize the emissions in the exhaust gas.
(b) Evaporative Emission Control System
(1) The evaporative emission control system prevents the fuel vapor that is created in the fuel tank
assembly from being released directly into the atmosphere. This system has the following controls:
Purge flow control

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
Evaporative emission (EVAP) leak check
(2) The charcoal canister assembly stores the fuel vapor that has been created in the fuel tank assembly.
(3) This system consists of a purge VSV, charcoal canister assembly, canister pump module and ECM.
(4) The ECM controls the purge VSV in accordance with the driving conditions in order to direct the fuel
vapor into the engine, where it is burned.
(5) In this system, the ECM checks for evaporative emission leaks and stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) in the event of a malfunction. An evaporative emission leak check consists of an application of
vacuum to the evaporative emission system and the ECM monitoring the system for changes in
pressure in order to detect a leak.
(6) A canister pressure sensor is included in the canister pump module.
(7) A No. 1 charcoal canister filter is provided on the fresh air line. This No. 1 charcoal canister filter is
maintenance-free.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDF
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Exhaust Emission Control System
Engine
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor
*1 *2
Fuel Injector Assembly 1)
*3 TWC *4 Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 2)

*5 ECM *6 Various Sensors
Intake Air Exhaust Gas
Evaporative Emission Control System

*1 Purge VSV *2 ECM
*3 Canister Pump Module *4 Vent Valve
*5 Leak Detection Pump and Pump Motor *6 Canister Pressure Sensor
*7 Charcoal Canister Assembly *8 Fuel Tank Assembly
*9 No. 1 Charcoal Canister Filter - -
*a To Intake Manifold *b Purge Air Line
*c Fresh Air Line - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDG
Title: 2AR-FE EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Purge VSV *2 ECM
*3 TWC *4 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
Charcoal Canister Assembly
Canister Pump Module
Vent Valve
*5 Oxygen Sensor *6 Leak Detection
Pump and Pump
Motor
Canister Pressure
Sensor
*7 Fuel Tank Assembly *8 No. 1 Charcoal Canister Filter

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDH
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: AIR CLEANER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AIR CLEANER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A paper filter type air cleaner element is used.
(b) A charcoal filter, which absorbs the HC that accumulates in the intake system when the engine is stopped, is
used in the air cleaner cap in order to reduce evaporative emissions.
(c) To ensure improved quietness, a dual-chamber resonator is used.

*1 Air Cleaner Cap *2 Charcoal Filter
*3 Air Cleaner Element *4 Air Cleaner Case
*5 Air Cleaner Inlet *6 Resonator
*a Resonator Cross Section *b Chamber A
*c Chamber B - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDI
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: THROTTLE BODY;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
THROTTLE BODY
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A linkless-type throttle body assembly is used and it achieves excellent throttle control.
(b) A DC motor with excellent response and minimal power consumption is used for the throttle control motor.
The ECM performs the duty cycle control of the direction and the amperage of the current that flows to the
throttle control motor in order to regulate the opening angle of the throttle valve.
*1 Throttle Body Assembly *2 Throttle Valve
*3 Throttle Control Motor - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDJ
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: INTAKE MANIFOLD;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
INTAKE MANIFOLD
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The intake manifold is made of lightweight plastic.
(b) A rotary type intake air control valve, which has less intake air resistance, is provided in the intake manifold.
The intake air control valve opens and closes to change the effective length of the intake manifold in 2 stages.
(c) A tumble control valve is provided in the intake manifold. This valve closes in order to create a tumble current
in the combustion chamber.
(d) A DC motor type actuator for the tumble control system is provided in the intake manifold. Based on the
signals sent by the ECM, the actuator opens and closes the tumble control valve.
(e) A vacuum type actuator for the ACIS and a VSV for ACIS are provided in the intake manifold.
(1) The actuator opens and closes the intake air control valve by the vacuum pressure controlled by the VSV.
(2) The VSV controls the vacuum applied to the actuator by way of the signal (ACIS) that is output by the
ECM.
(3) The ACIS actuator is laser-welded onto the intake air chamber.
(f) A mesh type gasket is used between the throttle body assembly and the intake manifold to improve the flow
of air within the intake manifold.
(g) To achieve a compact configuration, the vacuum tank for the ACIS is located in the dead space of the intake
manifold. Equipped with a check valve, the vacuum tank stores the vacuum applied to the actuator in order
to keep the intake air control valve fully closed even in low-vacuum conditions.
*1 Intake Manifold *2 Actuator (for Tumble Control)
*3 Tumble Control Valve *4 Throttle Body Gasket
*5 Intake Air Control Valve *6 Actuator (for ACIS)
*7 VSV (for ACIS) *8 Vacuum Tank

*a Intake Manifold Cross Section - -
HINT:
Laser-welding: In laser-welding, a laser-absorbing material (for the intake manifold) is joined to a laser-
Laser-welding: In laser-welding, a laser-absorbing material (for the intake manifold) is joined to a laser-
transmitting material (for the ACIS actuator). Laser beams are then irradiated from the laser-transmitting
side. The beams penetrate the laser-transmitting material to heat and melt the surface of the laser-absorbing
material. Then, the heat of the laser-absorbing material melts the laser-transmitting material and causes both
materials to become welded.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDK
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A linkless-type throttle body assembly is used to achieve excellent throttle control.
(b) Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i) is used to provide excellent throttle control.
(c) A plastic intake manifold is used for weight reduction.
(d) An Acoustic Control Induction System (ACIS) is used to improve the engine performance.
(e) A tumble control system is used to improve the engine performance and reduce exhaust emissions.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDL
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Air Cleaner *2 Throttle Body Assembly
*3 Intake Manifold - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDO
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A stainless steel exhaust manifold converter sub-assembly is used.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDP
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION

*1 *2 Exhaust Pipe
assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDM
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST SYSTEM: EXHAUST MANIFOLD;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A stainless steel exhaust manifold converter sub-assembly is used for improving the warm-up of the Three-
Way Catalyst (TWC) and for weight reduction.

*1 *2 TWC
assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDN
Title: 2AR-FE INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST SYSTEM: EXHAUST PIPE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
EXHAUST PIPE
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The exhaust pipe uses 2 ball joints in order to achieve a simple construction and ensured reliability.
(b) The TWC is used to reduce exhaust emissions.
*1 Front Exhaust Pipe Assembly *2 TWC
*3 Center Exhaust Pipe Assembly *4 Main Muffler

*5 Tail Exhaust Pipe Assembly *6 Sub Muffler
*7 Compression Spring *8 Bolt

*9 Gasket - -
*a Ball Joint - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDQ
Title: 2AR-FE COOLING: COOLING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The cooling system is a pressurized, forced-circulation type.
(b) A thermostat with a bypass valve is located in the water inlet housing to maintain a suitable temperature in
the cooling system.
(c) The flow of the water makes a U-turn in the cylinder block to ensure a smooth flow. In addition, a bypass
passage is enclosed in the cylinder head and the cylinder block.
(d) Warm water from the cylinder head is sent to the throttle body assembly to prevent freeze-up.
(e) Toyota Genuine Super Long Life Coolant (SLLC) is used.
*1 Reservoir Tank *2 Water Pump

*3 Radiator *4 Thermostat
*5 ATF Warmer *6 Throttle Body Assembly

*a From Heater Core *b To Heater Core
2. SPECIFICATION
2. SPECIFICATION
(a) Engine Coolant
(1) Toyota Genuine SLLC is used. The maintenance intervals are as shown in the table below:
Toyota Genuine Super Long Life Coolant (SLLC) or similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
Type coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology (coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic
Engine acids). Do not use plain water alone.
Coolant
Color Pink
Maintenance First Time 100000 miles (160000 km)

Intervals Subsequent Every 50000 miles (80000 km)
HINT:
SLLC is pre-mixed (50% coolant and 50% deionized water). Therefore, no dilution is needed when SLLC in the
vehicle is added or replaced.
(b) Thermostat
Thermostat Opening Temperature 80 °C to 84 °C (176 °F to 183 °F)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDR
Title: 2AR-FE COOLING: COOLING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
*1 Cylinder Head *2 Bypass Passage
*3 Water Pump *4 Thermostat

*5 Radiator *6 Reservoir Tank
*7 Cylinder Block *8 Throttle Body Assembly
*9 ATF Warmer *10 Heater Core

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDS
Title: 2AR-FE LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: OIL FILTER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
OIL FILTER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) An oil filter with a replaceable element is used. The element uses high-performance filter paper to improve
filtration performance. It is also combustible for environmental protection.
(b) A plastic filter cap is used for weight reduction.
(c) This oil filter has a structure which can drain the engine oil remaining in the oil filter. This prevents engine oil
from spattering when replacing the element and allows the technician to work without touching hot engine
oil.
*1 Oil Filter Bracket *2 Element
*3 Oil Filter Cap *4 Drain Plug

Hose (Inside Diameter: 15 mm (0.59
*5 Drain Pipe *6
in.))
*a When Draining Engine Oil - -
HINT:
The engine oil in the oil filter can be drained by removing the drain plug and inserting the drain pipe supplied
The engine oil in the oil filter can be drained by removing the drain plug and inserting the drain pipe supplied
with the element into the oil filter.
The engine oil maintenance interval for a model that has an oil filter with a replaceable element is the same
as that for the conventional model.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDT
Title: 2AR-FE LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: OIL NOZZLE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
OIL NOZZLE
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Oil nozzle sub-assemblies for cooling and lubricating the pistons and bores are used in the cylinder block.
(b) These oil nozzle sub-assemblies contain a check ball to prevent oil from being fed when the oil pressure is low.
This prevents the overall oil pressure in the engine from dropping.
*1 Cylinder Block *2 Oil Nozzle Sub-assembly
*3 Check Ball - -
*a View from Bottom Side *b Oil Nozzle Sub-assembly Cross Section

*c Oil - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDU
Title: 2AR-FE LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The lubrication circuit is fully pressurized and oil passes through an oil filter.
(b) This engine has an oil return system in which the oil is force-fed to the upper cylinder head and returns to the
oil pan through the oil return hole in the cylinder head.
(c) A cycloid rotor type oil pump is used. The oil pump is directly driven by the crankshaft.
(d) The Dual VVT-i system is used. This system is operated by the engine oil.
Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve
*1 *2
Assembly (Exhaust) Assembly (Intake)
*3 Intake VVT-i Controller *4 Exhaust VVT-i Controller
*5 Chain Tensioner *6 Oil Pump
*7 Oil Filter *8 Balance Shaft
*9 Oil Nozzle Sub-assembly *10 Valve Lash Adjuster Assembly
*11 Oil Delivery Pipe - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HDV
Title: 2AR-FE LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDL
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: AUDIO CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AUDIO CONTROL
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Audio Head Unit Receives each type of signal and outputs the signals to each component.
Telephone Microphone
Transmits the voice input signals to the audio head unit.
Assembly
Steering Pad Switch

Transmits the operation signals from the switches to the audio head unit.
Assembly
No. 1 Stereo Jack Transmits information about the portable audio player (USB type) connected to the
Adapter Assembly USB port or AUX port to the audio head unit.
Combination Meter
Transmits received vehicle speed signals to the audio head unit.
Assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDM
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: BLUETOOTH AUDIO CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
BLUETOOTH AUDIO CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The functions of the Bluetooth audio system that can be used vary with the version of the Audio/Video
Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) supported by the Bluetooth audio player that is being used.
(b) The available Bluetooth audio system functions differ in accordance with each Audio/Video Remote
Control Profile (AVRCP) as follows:
FUNCTION OUTLINE AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL

PROFILE (AVRCP)
VERSION VERSION VERSION 1.4

1.0 1.3 OR HIGHER
Play Starts playing the music. ○ ○ ○
Stop Stops playing the music. ○ ○ ○
Pause Pauses the music. ○ ○ ○
Track Up/Down Changes the track. ○ ○ ○
Fast Up/Down Fast-forwards or reverses. ○ ○ ○
Album Up/Down Changes the album. - ○ ○
Repeat (Single
Repeats the selected music. - ○ ○
Repeat)
Random (All Track

Plays all the music in the portable audio device at
Random) - ○ ○
random.
Scan (All Track

Scans all the music in the portable audio device. - ○ ○
Scan)
Shows the track number, playtime, track name

Music Information - ○ ○
artist name and album name.
Remaining Shows the remaining battery level of the Bluetooth

- ○ ○
Battery Level audio player.
Music List Shows the music list. - - ○
HINT:
○ : Usable
- : Not Usable
(c) The functions of the Bluetooth audio system are shown in the following table:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
In order to use the Bluetooth audio system with a Bluetooth audio player, it is
Registering
necessary to register the audio player in the audio head unit. Once a Bluetooth
a Bluetooth
audio player is registered, the Bluetooth audio system becomes available
Audio Player
automatically.
Set
Deleting a
Bluetooth
Bluetooth The user can delete a Bluetooth audio player.
Audio
Audio Player
Player
The user can select whether to connect to the Bluetooth audio player
Connecting
automatically or manually. If the Bluetooth audio player has been registered and
a Bluetooth
automatic connection is enabled, the Bluetooth audio player will be connected
Audio Player
automatically.
Selecting a
If the user has registered a second Bluetooth audio player, either one can be
Bluetooth
selected for connection.
Audio Player
Displaying
the
The user can view the information of the Bluetooth audio player on the system.
Bluetooth
Audio Player
Changing
The user can select the connection method. With this function, the user
the
determines whether to make a connection from the audio head unit to the
Connection
Bluetooth audio player or from the Bluetooth audio player to the audio head unit.
Method
Change
Displaying
Settings of
Bluetooth the
Bluetooth The user can see the Bluetooth audio information settings on the system.
Audio
Audio
Settings
Changing
the Device
The user can change a device name or a passcode.
Name or
Passcode
Initializing
the
Bluetooth The user can initialize the settings.
Audio
Settings
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDN
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The Bluetooth hands-free system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE *1 *2
By Dialing The user can call by inputting a telephone number. ○ ○
The user can call by using the phonebook data that has
By Phonebook been transferred from the user's cellular phone. The user ○ ○
can register up to 1000 numbers in the phonebook.
Dialed
The user can call by selecting a previously dialed number. ○ ○
Number
Received The user can call by selecting the telephone number of a
○ ○
Call received call.
By Call
History*3 Missed The user can call by selecting the telephone number of a
○ ○
Call missed call.
Calling with
The user can call by selecting the telephone number from all
a Bluetooth All Call
call history. However, the user can use the last 5 numbers ○ ○
Phone History
while driving.
The user can call by using registered telephone numbers

By Speed Dial*3 selected from the phonebook, dialed numbers or received ○ ○
calls.
Dialing
The user can call by giving a name registered in the
by - ○*4
phonebook.
By Voice Name
Recognition*3 Dialing
by
The user can call by giving a desired number. - ○*4
Phone
Number
Receiving a Call Using a Bluetooth When a call is received, the receive screen is displayed with
○ ○
Phone a sound.
While the user is talking on the phone, the talking screen is
Talking on a Bluetooth Phone ○ ○
displayed.
The user can register a desired telephone number from the

Speed Dial Registration phonebook, dialed numbers or received calls. Up to 5 (*1), ○ ○
18 (*2) speed dial numbers can be registered.
Editing Speed Dial The user can edit the speed dial. ○ -
Deleting Speed Dial The user can delete the speed dials individually or all at ○ -
once.
The user can set the volume. ○ ○
Initializing the settings:

○ ○
The user can initialize the settings.
Volume Settings Automatic volume settings for high speed:

When the vehicle speed is 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the
volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the ○ ○
previous volume setting when the vehicle speed drops to 70
km/h (43 mph) or less.
Transferring a phonebook data:

The user can transfer the phonebook data from the ○ ○
registered Bluetooth phone to the system.
Automatically transferring a telephone number:

When a PBAP compatible phone is connected, the
- ○
phonebook data of the phone can be automatically
transferred.
Registering phone numbers

○ ○
The user can register phone numbers in the phonebook.*5
Adding data to the phonebook:

○ ○
Changing The user can add data to the phonebook.*5
Bluetooth Editing a name:

Phone The user can edit a name that has been entered. If no name ○ ○
Settings has been entered, the number is displayed.*5
Phonebook Settings
Editing a phone number:
The user can register a phone number to "Phone#1", ○ ○
"Phone#2" or "Phone#3".*5
Editing data:
○ ○
The user can edit the registered data.*5
Deleting data:
- ○
The user can delete the data.*5
Deleting all the phone data:

○ ○
The user can delete all the phone data.*5
Deleting the call history data:

The user can delete the call history data individually or all at ○ ○
once.*5
Selecting a group icon:

○ -
The user can select the desired icon.
Receiving call display:

- ○
The user can select the method of the receiving call display.
Checking the Bluetooth connection during startup:
Screen Settings When the ignition switch is turned to ON or ACC and the - ○
Bluetooth is automatically connected, the connection check
will be displayed.
Initializing the settings:

- ○
The user can initialize the settings.
Setting a passcode:
Security Settings A passcode can be set up on every Bluetooth phone to be ○ -
registered.
In order to use the hands-free function of a Bluetooth

phone, it is necessary to register the phone in the audio
Enter Bluetooth Phone ○ -
head unit. Once a phone is registered, the hands-free
function becomes available automatically.*6
When 2 or more registered Bluetooth phones are in the

Set Selecting Bluetooth cabin, it is necessary to select which phone to use to
Bluetooth ○ -
Phone prevent the lines from being crossed. Only the selected
Phone phone is available for use as a hands-free phone.
Displaying and Change The user can set, change and initialize the information of
○ -
Bluetooth Information the Bluetooth phone displayed on the screen.
Deleting Bluetooth The user can delete a registered Bluetooth phone from the
○ -
Phone audio head unit.
In order to use the hands-free function of a Bluetooth

Bluetooth Phone phone, it is necessary to register the phone in the audio
- ○
Registration head unit. Once a phone is registered, the hands-free
function becomes available automatically.*6
When 2 or more registered Bluetooth phones are in the

Registering cabin, it is necessary to select which phone to use to
and Bluetooth Phone prevent the lines from being crossed. Only the selected - ○
Selecting a Selection*3 phone is available for use as a hands-free phone. The phone
Bluetooth registered last is automatically selected.
Phone
Bluetooth Information
The user can set, change and initialize the information of
Confirmation and - ○
the Bluetooth phone displayed on the screen.
Editing
Deleting a Bluetooth The user can delete a registered Bluetooth phone from the
- ○
Phone audio head unit.
The user can transmit the messages (Short Message Service

(SMS)/ Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS)/email) received
on the Bluetooth phone to the audio head unit.
Displaying the message text.

Checking Message - ○
Reading out of the message.
Bluetooth Calling a Short Message Service (SMS)/Multimedia
Phone Messaging Service (MMS) message sender's
Message phone number.
The user can reply to a message (Short Message Service

Reply Message (SMS)/Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS)/e-mail) received - ○
on the Bluetooth phone.
Editing Reply Message The user can edit the reply. - ○
HINT:
○ : Usable
- : Not Usable
*1: Models with radio receiver assembly
*2: Models with radio and display receiver assembly
*3: Can be operated while driving.
*4: Deluxe grade
*5: Excluding phone with PBAP
*6: Automatic connection cannot be performed with some Bluetooth phone.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDO
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: STEREO JACK ADAPTER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STEREO JACK ADAPTER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The No. 1 stereo jack adapter assembly is located inside the lower portion of the instrument panel.
*1 No. 1 Stereo Jack Adapter Assembly - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDP
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: STEERING PAD SWITCH;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STEERING PAD SWITCH

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Frequently used switches are located on the steering pad for easy use.
(b) The steering pad switches provided on the steering pad may vary in accordance with optional equipment.
Models without Radio Receiver

*A Models with Radio Receiver Assembly *B
Assembly
*1 Seek Switch *2 Volume Switch

*3 Mode Switch *4 Back Switch
*5 On-hook Switch *6 Voice Switch

*7 Off-hook Switch *8 Enter Switch
*9 Cursor Switch - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDQ
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Audio System
(1) The audio systems shown below are available:
AUDIO SYSTEM AUDIO HEAD UNIT SPEAKER
4-speaker Sound System Radio Receiver Assembly 4 Speakers
6 Speakers
Display Audio System Radio and Display Receiver Assembly
11 Speakers
(b) Bluetooth Audio System
(1) The Bluetooth audio system enables the users to listen to the music stored in a Bluetooth-compliant portable audio device
(Bluetooth audio player) through a Bluetooth connection.
(2) The Bluetooth audio system can operate a Bluetooth audio player through the audio head unit.
(c) Bluetooth Hands-free System
(1) The Bluetooth hands-free system enables drivers to place or receive phone calls using a cellular phone without releasing
their hands from the steering wheel.
(2) For safety, some functions of the Bluetooth hands-free system may not be selectable while the vehicle is being driven.
"Bluetooth" is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
(d) Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
(1) The Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) function automatically adjusts the sound volume in order to enable clear audio
quality even when vehicle noise increases (as vehicle noise increases, the volume is turned up, etc.).
(2) Vehicle speed signals are received from the combination meter assembly and used for ASL control.
(e) No. 1 Stereo Jack Adapter Assembly
(1) A No. 1 stereo jack adapter assembly is used by the audio system as an input terminal for portable audio devices.
(2) A USB port is provided that enables operation of a USB memory device, portable audio player (USB type), iPod or iPhone.
HINT:
USB, iPod and iPhone operation functions may not operate in certain conditions or with certain models.
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. that have been registered in the U.S.A. and other countries.
(f) Steering Pad Switch Assembly
(1) Steering pad switches transmits the operation signals from the switches to the audio head unit.
(g) XM Satellite Radio
(1) XM satellite radio is a service that uses the signals from 2 satellites in geostationary orbit to make it possible to capture
digital radio broadcasts (XM satellite radio) from over 170 channels. XM satellite radio enables users to constantly receive
their favorite programs.
(h) Hybrid Digital (HD) Radio
(1) HD radio is a radio system which uses In-Band, On-Channel transmission (IBOC), a method of broadcasting developed by
iBiquity. By widening each channel of the conventional FM/AM band, and by additionally broadcasting digital audio data,
various functions have been achieved. Conventional FM/AM analog broadcasts can be received without charge
(2) Digital FM broadcasts with near-CD quality sound, and the highest quality digital AM broadcasts with a sound quality level
approaching that of analog FM broadcasts can be received.
(3) Analog broadcasts are automatically switched to if the system becomes unable to receive digital broadcasts (blending
function).
(4) Multiple program content is delivered from the same radio station (multi-cast).
(5) Information data for the song currently being broadcast is provided by the iPod function which allows the user to purchase
songs via PC iTunes, and song information can be forwarded to the user's iPod (iPod tagging).
HINT:
Some HD radio services are not supported.
2. SPECIFICATION
(a) Audio Head Unit
AUDIO HEAD UNIT DESIGN SPECIFICATION
4-speaker Sound System:
AM/FM Tuner
CD Player
CD-TEXT Display Function
MP3 and WMA Playback
Function*1
Radio Receiver Assembly Bluetooth Audio System
Bluetooth Hands-free
System
Stereo Jack Adapter (USB,
AUX Port)
4-speaker System
Unit: Panasonic
Display Audio System:
6.1-inch EGA TFT Display

AM/FM Tuner
CD Player
Function*1
XM Satellite Radio*2
HD Radio*2
Bluetooth Audio System
System
AUX Port)
iPod/iPhone Operation
Function
6-speaker System
Unit: Fujitsu-ten
Radio and Display Receiver
Assembly
Display Audio System:
6.1-inch EGA TFT Display

AM/FM Tuner
CD Player
Function*1
XM Satellite Radio*2
HD Radio*2
Bluetooth Audio System
System
AUX Port)
iPod/iPhone Operation
Function
11-speaker System
Unit: Fujitsu-ten
HINT:
*1: MPEG Audio Layer-3 (MP3) and Windows Media Audio (WMA)
*2: Models for Contiguous United States and Canada
(b) 4-speaker System
LOCATION SPEAKER TYPE CALIBER IMPEDANCE INPUT RANGE
*1 Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly (Full-range) 160 mm (6.3 in.) 4 Ω 20 W
*2 Rear Speaker Assembly (Full-range) 160 mm (6.3 in.) 4 Ω 20 W
(c) 6-speaker System

*1 Front No. 2 Speaker Assembly (Tweeter) 25 mm (1.0 in.) 4 Ω 20 W
*2 Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly (Full-range) 160 mm (6.3 in.) 4 Ω 20 W
*3 Rear Speaker Assembly (Full-range) 160 mm (6.3 in.) 4 Ω 20 W
(d) 11-speaker System

*1 Front No. 2 Speaker Assembly (Tweeter + Mid-range) 80 mm (3.1 in.) 4.3 Ω 3 W
*2 Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly (Woofer) 170 mm (6.7 in.) 4.2 Ω 5 W
*3 Rear Speaker Assembly (Tweeter + Mid-range) 170 mm (6.7 in.) 4 Ω 6 W
*4 Stereo Component Speaker Assembly (Sub-woofer) 200 mm (7.9 in.) 4 Ω 5.2 W
(e) Bluetooth Hands-free System
FUNCTION RADIO RECEIVER RADIO AND DISPLAY

ASSEMBLY RECEIVER ASSEMBLY
By Dial ○ ○
By Phonebook ○ (1000 Items)*1 ○ (1000 Items)*1
Dialed Number ○ (10 Items) ○ (10 Items)
Received Call ○ (10 Items) ○ (10 Items)

By Call History*2
Missed Call ○ (10 Items) ○ (10 Items)
Calling with Bluetooth Phone
All Call History ○ ○
By Speed Dial*2 ○ (5 Items) ○ (18 Items)
Dialing by Name - ○*3

By Voice
Recognition*2 Dialing by Phone
- ○*3
Number
Received
○ ○
Receiving Call*2 Manually
Receive with Bluetooth Phone/Talk on Received Refusal - ○
Bluetooth Phone
Interrupt Call*2 ○ ○
By Dial ○ ○
Tone Sending By Registered
○ ○
Number
○ (5 Bluetooth
Registering Bluetooth Phone ○ (5 Bluetooth Phones)
Phones)
Connected
Recognition/ Connection ○ ○
Connecting Automatically
Bluetooth Phone Connected
○ ○
Manually
Setting Setting Automatic Connection ○ ○
HINT:
○ : Available
-: Not Available
*1: It is possible to have up to 1000 items per telephone (Bluetooth phone).
*2: Can be operated while driving.
*3: Deluxe grade
3. MAIN FEATURES
(a) XM Satellite Radio
(1) XM satellite radio is a subscription type digital broadcast service.
(2) In addition to the 2 satellites, XM satellite radio is supported by 800 satellite earth stations (repeaters). As a result, it can
receive broadcasts throughout the U.S.A. (except Hawaii and Alaska) and most parts of Canada.
(3) If the signals from the satellites are disrupted by a tunnel, gulch or high-rise buildings, the simultaneous broadcast (called
"gap filler") through ground based signals helps achieve excellent reception that is free of interruptions.
(4) XM satellite radio produces near CD-quality sound using a digital satellite broadcast. Digital satellite broad cast is especially
convenient for long-distance drivers because it is unnecessary to tune to different stations
*1 Satellite *2 Satellite Earth Station

(b) Radio and Display Receiver Assembly
(1) A 6.1-inch display with a Thin Film Transistor (TFT) is used.
(2) The audio screen, vehicle information screen and rear view monitor screen* can be displayed.
*: Models with monitor system
(c) Entune Services
The Entune service makes it possible to operate specified applications on the radio and display receiver assembly by
using Bluetooth to connect the navigation system to a cellular phone with the Toyota Entune application installed.
These applications are displayed on and operated from the radio and display receiver assembly.
The Entune service enables communication between the navigation system, application server and content provider
utilizing the Toyota-exclusive Entune application installed on a cellular phone.
The following applications ("Apps") are available for the Entune service: movie ticket purchase, etc. However, since
this supported application lineup is subject to change, visit http:// www.toyota.com/Entune/ for details on the
Entune service.
4. PRECAUTION
(a) Bluetooth Hands-free System
(1) Some functions of a system that uses a Bluetooth connection may not operate depending on the specification or profile of
the Bluetooth phone or Bluetooth audio player that is being used. The Bluetooth specifications and profiles required for the
operation are as follows:
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION/ ITEM RADIO RECEIVER RADIO AND DISPLAY

PROFILE ASSEMBLY RECEIVER ASSEMBLY
Version 1.1 or higher Required Required

Bluetooth
Specification Version 2.1 + Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) or
Recommended Recommended
higner
Hands Free Profile (HFP) Version 1.0 or

Required Required
higher
Hands Free Profile (HFP) Version 1.5 or Recommended Recommended
higher
Bluetooth Dial-up Networking Profile (DUN) Version 1.1 - Recommended

Hands-free
Object Push Profile (OPP) Version1.0 or
Profile higher
Personal Area Network (PAN) Version 1.0 - Required
Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) Version

1.0 or higher
Message Access Profile (MAP) Version 1.0 or

- Recommended
higher
Serial Port Profile (SPP) Version 1.0 or higher - Required
Version 1.1 or higher Required Required

Bluetooth
Specification Version 2.1 + Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) or
higner
Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)

Required Required
Version 1.0 higher
Bluetooth
Audio Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)
Version 1.2 or higher
Profile
Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)
Required Required
Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)

HINT:
- : Not available
(b) Ignition Switch Expressions
(1) The type of ignition switch used on this model differs depending on the specifications of the vehicle. The expressions listed
in the table below are used in this section.
EXPRESSION IGNITION SWITCH (POSITION) ENGINE SWITCH (CONDITION)
Ignition Switch off LOCK Off (Lock)
Ignition Switch ACC ACC On (ACC)
Ignition Switch ON ON On (IG)
Engine Start START On (Start)

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDR
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Models with Radio Receiver Assembly
Models with Radio and Display Receiver Assembly with 6-speaker System
Models with Radio and Display Receiver Assembly with 11-speaker System
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDS
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*A Models with 6-speaker System *B Models with 11-speaker System
*C Models with Monitor System - -
*1 Telephone Microphone Assembly *2 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly
*3 Front No. 2 Speaker Assembly RH *4 Front No. 2 Speaker Assembly LH
*3 Front No. 2 Speaker Assembly RH *4 Front No. 2 Speaker Assembly LH
*5 Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly LH *6 Rear Speaker Assembly LH
*7 Stereo Component Speaker Assembly *8 Rear Television Camera Assembly

*9 Stereo Component Amplifier Assembly *10 Rear Speaker Assembly RH
*11 Amplifier Antenna Assembly *12 Roof Antenna Pole Sub-assembly
*13 Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly RH - -
*1 Combination Meter Assembly *2 Steering Pad Switch Assembly

*3 Parking Brake Switch Assembly *4 No. 1 Stereo Jack Adapter Assembly
*5 Audio Head Unit - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDX
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST CONTROL;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST CONTROL

(a) The components have the following functions:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
No. 1 Ultrasonic
Detects the distance between the vehicle and on obstacle.
Sensor
No. 1 Clearance
Sounds to inform the driver according to the distance to the obstacle.
Warning Buzzer
Judges the approximate distance between the vehicle and an obstacle based on
Clearance Warning signals from the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors. Output signals are sent to the telltale
ECU Assembly light assembly.
Sounds the No. 1 clearance warning buzzer.
Telltale Light
Assembly
The indicator show the location of the obstacle and the approximate distance
Clearance
between the vehicle and the obstacle.
Warning
The indicator show an indication of a malfunctioning or frozen ultrasonic sensor
Indicator
to inform the driver.
Light
Operating this switch allows the operation of intuitive parking assist system to be
Clearance
enabled or disabled.
Sonar
Switch
Combination Meter
Transmits received vehicle speed signals to the clearance warning ECU assembly.
Assembly
Park/Neutral Position
Sends a shift R position signal to the clearance warning ECU assembly.
Switch Assembly
(a) The operating condition of each sensor differs according to its installed position as shown in the table below:
INSTALLATION POSITION OPERATING CONDITION
Rear Corner
Ignition switch is ON.
Clearance sonar switch is on.
Rear Center Shift lever is in R.
3. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) No. 1 Clearance Warning Buzzer
(1) The on and off times of the No. 1 clearance warning buzzer vary as shown in the table below, depending
on the distance between the obstacle and the ultrasonic sensor:
ULTRASONIC OBSTACLE DISTANCE [MM (IN.)] OFF TIME ON TIME

SENSOR (MS) (MS)
CENTER CORNER
Approx. 600 (23.6) to 1500

1st - 650 +/- 65 150 +/- 15
(59.1)
Approx. 450 (17.7) to 600 Approx. 400 (15.7) to 500
Detection 2nd 150 +/- 15 150 +/- 15
(23.6) (19.7)
Level
Approx. 350 (13.8) to 450 Approx. 300 (11.8) to 400
3rd 75 +/- 7.5 75 +/- 7.5
(17.7) (15.7)
4th Approx. 350 (13.8) or less Approx. 300 (11.8) or less 0 Continuous
(b) Detection Area

(1) The detection areas of the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors are as shown in the following illustration.
(2) These detection areas are applicable when positioning a 60 mm (2.36 in.) diameter pole parallel or
perpendicular to the ground. The ranges vary depending on the measuring method and type of obstacle.
No. 1 Ultrasonic Sensor Distance Area

ULTRASONIC SENSOR OBSTACLE DISTANCE [MM (IN.)]
CENTER CORNER
A B
1st Approx. 600 (23.6) to 1500 (59.1) -
2nd Approx. 450 (17.7) to 600 (23.6) Approx. 400 (15.7) to 500 (19.7)
Detection Level
3rd Approx. 350 (13.8) to 450 (17.7) Approx. 300 (11.8) to 400 (15.7)
4th Approx. 350 (13.8) or less Approx. 300 (11.8) or less
(c) Clearance Warning Indicator Light
(1) The driver is informed that there is an obstacle nearby by the flashing of the clearance warning indicator
assembly located on the instrument panel. Also, the No. 1 clearance warning buzzer sounds
simultaneously.
*1 Clearance Warning Indicator Light - -

*a Rear Corner LH *b Rear Center
*c Rear Corner RH - -
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If a system malfunction is detected, the clearance warning ECU assembly stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) in its memory. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDY
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: ULTRASONIC SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
ULTRASONIC SENSOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The No. 1 ultrasonic sensor consists of a circuit portion and a microphone that transmits and receives
ultrasonic waves.
(b) The circuit portion is filled with urethane to prevent water from entering.
*1 No. 1 Ultrasonic Sensor *2 Microphone

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IDZ
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: CLEARANCE WARNING BUZZER;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CLEARANCE WARNING BUZZER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) When the ultrasonic sensor transmits ultrasonic waves and receives the reflected waves from an obstacle, the
No. 1 clearance warning buzzer sounds in stages in accordance with the distance to the obstacle.
*1 No. 1 Clearance Warning Buzzer - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IE0
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: CLEARANCE WARNING ECU;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CLEARANCE WARNING ECU

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The clearance warning ECU assembly performs overall control of the system, including switching
between transmission and reception of the ultrasonic sensor signals, processing the received wave
signals, determining the presence of obstacles, actuating the No. 1 clearance warning buzzer and
determining the presence of an open circuit in the sensors.
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The intuitive parking assist system uses the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors to detect any obstacles at the rear
corner or the rear of the vehicle.
(b) The intuitive parking assist system informs the driver of the approximate distance between the No. 1
ultrasonic sensors and the obstacles as well as their positions by displaying them on the telltale light
assembly and by sounding the No. 1 clearance warning buzzer.
2. PRECAUTION
(a) Ignition Switch Expressions
(1) The type of ignition switch used on this model differs depending on the specifications of the vehicle.
The expressions listed in the table below are used in this section.
(b) The detection function of the intitive parking assist system may not operate properly in the following
conditions:
(1) When ice, snow or mud gets on the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors. If the material is removed, the system
will work properly.
(2) When a No. 1 ultrasonic sensor is frozen. If the No. 1 ultrasonic sensor is no longer frozen, the
system will work properly.
(3) When the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors are covered with something. If the material is removed, the
system will work properly.
(c) Especially in cold weather, a malfunction warning may occur (the buzzer may sound) due to frozen No. 1
ultrasonic sensors. If the malfunction warning occurs, be sure to check the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors. If
the malfunction warning occurs and there is no mud, ice or snow on the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors, a No.
1 ultrasonic sensor may be malfunctioning.
(d) In the following conditions, the detection range may be affected:
(1) When foreign matter such as snow or mud gets on the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors.
(2) When the vehicle is operated in direct sun light or in a freezing climate.
(e) The system may improperly detect obstacles in the following conditions:
(1) When the vehicle is being driven on bumpy road, gravel road or grass.
(2) When the sound of horns from other vehicles, the sound of a motorcycle engine, the sound of the air
brakes of a large truck, or an object that generates ultrasonic waves is in the vicinity.
(3) When there is a downpour, or water is splashing on the vehicle.
(4) When the vehicle posture tilts significantly.
(5) When an antenna for a wireless transmitter is mounted on the vehicle.
(6) When the No. 1 ultrasonic sensors are covered with ice, snow or mud.
(7) When the vehicle travels alongside a tall curb or a square curb.
(8) When other vehicles with sonar are nearby.
(9) When a towing hitch is mounted on the vehicle.
(10) When the bumper is damaged.
(f) There are cases in which the objects listed below cannot be detected:
(1) Thin objects such as wire or rope.

(2) Objects with surfaces that are too small to reflect ultrasonic waves such as wire gauze or a fence.
(3) Objects that absorb sound waves such as cotton or snow.
(4) Objects that have sharp edges.

(5) Objects that are short.
(6) Objects that are tall and protrude at the top.
(g) Others
(1) Objects directly underneath the bumpers cannot be detected. Some objects located lower than the
No. 1 ultrasonic sensors, or thin objects, may not be detected as the vehicle comes close to these
objects.
(2) An object might not be detected if the vehicle is too close.
(3) The No. 1 ultrasonic sensors might not detect properly if they are exposed to strong shocks such as
when being struck or having objects thrown at them.
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
No. 1 Ultrasonic Sensor (Rear Corner No. 1 Ultrasonic Sensor (Rear Center
*1 *2
LH) LH)
No. 1 Ultrasonic Sensor (Rear Center No. 1 Ultrasonic Sensor (Rear Corner
*3 *4
RH) RH)
*5 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly - -

*1 Combination Meter Assembly *2 No. 1 Clearance Warning Buzzer
*3 Clearance Warning ECU Assembly *4 Telltale Light Assembly
*5 Clearance Warning Indicator Light *6 Clearance Sonar Switch

Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: MONITOR SYSTEM: MONITOR CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
MONITOR CONTROL
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Rear Television Camera Transmits a video signal representing the area behind the vehicle to the radio and
Assembly display receiver assembly.
Receives signals from the park/neutral position switch assembly and turns
Radio and Display the rear television camera assembly on and off.
Receiver Assembly Displays the image transmitted by the rear television camera assembly on
the screen.
Park/Neutral Position
Sends a shift R position signal to the radio and display receiver assembly.
Switch Assembly
(a) Operating Condition
(1) The ignition switch is ON.
(2) The shift lever is moved to R.
(3) The back door is closed.
3. FUNCTION
(a) Area Displayed on Screen
(1) On the display, objects on the right of the vehicle appear on the right side of the display panel, and objects
on the left of the vehicle appear on the left side of the display panel.
(2) The rear television camera assembly uses a wide-angle lens. The perceived distance from images that
appear on the screen will differ from the actual distance.
Vehicle Width Extension Guide Lines
*a *b Distance Guide Line (Blue)
(Blue)
*c Distance Guide Line (Red) *d Vehicle Center Guide Lines (Blue)
HINT:
The area displayed on the screen may vary in accordance with vehicle status or road conditions.
The area covered by the rear television camera assembly is limited. The rear television camera assembly does
not show objects close to either corner of the bumper or show the area under the bumper.
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) The rear view monitor system is equipped with a diagnosis function which can display the diagnosis menus.
For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEA
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: MONITOR SYSTEM: TELEVISION CAMERA;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TELEVISION CAMERA
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Rear Television Camera Assembly
(1) The rear television camera assembly consists of a wide-angle lens and a Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor (CMOS).
(2) An image captured by the rear view television camera lens is converted into electrical signals in
accordance with the light intensity by using the CMOS image element, and the signals are then output to
the radio and display receiver assembly.
(3) The image output from the rear television camera assembly is reversed to match the rear view seen from
the inside rear view mirror. Therefore, the view actually seen is displayed on the screen in the horizontal
reverse.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEB
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: MONITOR SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) To assist the driver in parking the vehicle by monitoring the area behind it, the rear view monitor system has a rear television
camera assembly mounted on the back door.
(b) A view of the area behind the vehicle will be displayed on the radio and display receiver assembly.
(c) When the shift lever is in R and the ignition switch is ON, the rear view monitor system displays an image of the area behind the
vehicle on the radio and display receiver assembly via the rear television camera assembly.
(d) When the driver moves the shift lever to any position other than R, the rear view display will stop.
2. PRECAUTION
(1) The type of ignition switch used on this model differs depending on the specifications of the vehicle. The expressions listed in
the table below are used in this section.
(b) General Precautions
(1) Do not rely entirely on the rear view monitor system. Use caution, just as when driving any vehicle.
(2) Never drive while looking only at the screen. The image on the screen may differ from actual conditions. Backing up while
looking only at the screen may cause an accident or cause the vehicle to hit an object. Be sure to confirm the safety of the
surroundings when driving the vehicle.
(c) Television Camera Precautions

(1) The area covered by the rear television camera assembly is limited. The rear television camera assembly does not show
objects close to either corner of the bumper or show items under the bumper. The clearance distance that appears on the
screen is different from the actual distance because the rear television camera assembly uses a wide-angle lens.
(2) The camera is unable to capture a clear image if the glass in front of the lens is dirty. Therefore, clean the glass if it has water
drops, snow or dirt on it.
(3) In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, but this is not a malfunction:
In the dark (for example, at night).

When the temperature near the lens is very high or low.
When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when humidity is high (for example, when it rains).
When the camera has scratches or dirt on it.
When foreign matter (for example, mud) is adhering to the camera lens.
When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens.
(4) Flicker effect: when the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc., the lights and the
illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
(5) When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure washer, do not spray water on the rear television camera assembly or the
surrounding area. High-pressure water can damage the camera.
(d) Road Condition Precautions
(1) Depending on the number of occupants, the load conditions, the slope of the road and bumps in the road, a disparity may
occur between the display indication and the actual distance to the road surface. Operate the vehicle carefully.
*a Steep Uphill Incline behind Vehicle *b Disparity
Vehicle Posture Changed by
*c Steep Downhill Incline behind Vehicle *d
Passengers and Load
(2) If a steep uphill incline is behind the vehicle, an obstacle will appear to be further away than it actually is, as shown in the
illustration below:
*a Screen Image in Case A *b Screen Image in Case B
(3) Drive carefully when any 3-dimensional objects such as walls or vehicles are behind the vehicle as the distance and estimated
guide lines are provided based on the road surface.
The distance indication as shown on the screen varies between 3-dimensional objects such as a vehicle and objects
on a flat plane such as the road surface. As shown in the following illustration, points A and B are actually vertically
in the same position and point C is a short distance away from them: however, the points are displayed in order of
distance from the vehicle, B, C and A. Therefore, the vehicle comes into contact with the 3-dimensional object if it is
backed up to point B on the screen.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEC
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: MONITOR SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IED
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: MONITOR SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly *2 Rear Television Camera Assembly
*3 Radio and Display Receiver Assembly - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEE
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: AIRBAG CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
AIRBAG CONTROL
(a) The main components in the airbag system have the following functions:
COMPONENTS OUTLINE
The center airbag sensor assembly receives signals from the deceleration sensor
and safing sensor built into the center airbag sensor assembly and one of the front
airbag sensors, determines whether the horn button assembly, instrument panel
passenger without door airbag assembly, lower No. 1 instrument panel airbag
assembly*1, front seat cushion airbag assembly*2 , curtain shield airbag assembly
Center Airbag and front seat belt pretensioner should be activated, and diagnoses system
Sensor Assembly malfunctions.
(Airbag ECU The center airbag sensor assembly receives signals from the deceleration sensor
Assembly) and the safing sensor built into the center airbag sensor assembly, side airbag
sensor assembly and No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly, determines whether the
front seat airbag assembly, curtain shield airbag assembly and front seat belt
pretensioner should be activated, and diagnoses system malfunctions.
The center airbag sensor assembly sends the airbag deployment signal to the ECM
through the Controller Area Network (CAN) to operate the fuel pump control.
Horn Button
Assembly
Instrument Panel
Passenger Airbag
without Door
Assembly
Lower No. 1
Instrument Panel These consist of an inflator, a bag, and so on. The inflator deploys gas in accordance with an
Airbag Assembly*1 expansion signal from the center airbag sensor assembly and deploys the bag.
Front Seat Airbag

Assembly
Front Seat
Cushion Airbag
Assembly RH*2
Curtain Shield
Airbag Assembly
The front airbag sensor uses an electrical type deceleration sensor. Based on the deceleration
Front Airbag
of the vehicle during a frontal collision, a distortion is created in the sensor and converted into
Sensor
an electrical signal.
Side Airbag Sensor
Assembly Detects the deceleration of the vehicle during a collision, and transmits the signal to the
center airbag sensor assembly.
No. 2 Side Airbag
Sensor Assembly
Combination Meter
Assembly
The SRS warning light turns on to alert the driver when the center airbag sensor assembly
SRS
detects a malfunction in the SRS airbag system.
Warning
Light
Occupant The occupant detection ECU judges whether the front passenger seat is occupied based on
Detection ECU signals from the occupant detection sensor and the front seat inner belt assembly RH.
*1: Models with SRS driver knee airbag

*2: Models with SRS seat cushion airbag
(a) If the impact of a collision is greater than the specified value, the SRS is activated automatically. The center
airbag sensor assembly includes the safing sensor and deceleration sensor. The safing sensor is designed to
turn on at a lower deceleration rate than the deceleration sensor.
(1) In case of a frontal collision, the center airbag sensor assembly determines whether airbag deployment or
pretensioner activation is necessary based on signals from the deceleration sensor and the front airbag
sensor. If the safing sensor turns on simultaneously, current flows to the squibs to deploy the SRS
components as shown in the illustration below. However, a deployment ignition signal may be output with
the deceleration sensor on signal even without a signal from a front airbag sensor.
(2) In case of a side collision, the center airbag sensor assembly determines whether airbag deployment is
necessary based on signals from the side airbag sensor assembly. If the safing sensor turns on
simultaneously with either the side airbag sensor assembly, current flows to the squibs to deploy the SRS
as shown in the illustration below:
(3) In case of a rear side collision, the center airbag sensor assembly determines whether airbag deployment
is necessary based on signals from the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly.
3. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) Airbag for Frontal Collision
(1) For frontal collisions, there are 6 airbags and 2 seat belt pretensioners: an SRS driver airbag (horn button
assembly), SRS front passenger airbag (instrument panel passenger without door airbag assembly), SRS
driver knee airbag (lower No. 1 instrument panel airbag assembly), SRS curtain shield airbag (curtain
shield airbag assembly LH and RH), SRS seat cushion airbag (front seat cushion airbag assembly RH), SRS
seat cushion airbag (front seat cushion airbag assembly RH), front seat outer belt assembly LH and front
seat outer belt assembly RH. The deployment of the airbags and the activation of the seat belt
pretensioners occur simultaneously.
(b) Airbags for Side or Side Rear Collision

(1) For a side collision, if the side airbag sensor assembly detects an impact, it informs the center airbag
sensor assembly, and the center airbag sensor assembly causes the SRS front side airbag (front seat
airbag assembly) and SRS curtain shield airbag (curtain shield airbag assembly LH and RH) to be deployed
and front seat outer belt LH and RH to be activated and operated simultaneously.
Side Collision
(2) For a side rear collision, if the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly detects an impact, it informs the center
airbag sensor assembly via the side airbag sensor assembly, and the center airbag sensor assembly causes
the SRS curtain shield airbag (curtain shield airbag assembly RH and LH) to be deployed.
Side Rear Collision

(c) Airbag for Roll Over
(1) If the vehicle is tilted and rolls over, the center airbag sensor assembly activates the seat belt
pretensioners for the driver and front passenger and left and right curtain shield airbags based on signals
that show the vehicle's roll angle and rotation speed.
(2) If the vehicle rolls over in a side collision, the center airbag sensor assembly causes the front seat side
airbag assembly and curtain shield airbag assembly to deploy based on signals from the side airbag sensor
assembly and No.2 side airbag sensor assembly. Meanwhile, the center airbag sensor assembly activates
the seat belt pretensioners for the driver and front passenger and the curtain shield airbag on the opposite
side of the collision, based on lateral deceleration and rotation speed signals.
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) Summary
(1) If the center airbag sensor assembly detects a malfunction in the SRS airbag system, the center airbag
sensor assembly stores the malfunction data in memory, in addition to illuminating the SRS warning light.
(b) SRS Airbag System DTCs
(1) The 5-digit DTCs can be read after connecting a Techstream to the DLC3.
(2) If the SRS airbag deploys, the center airbag sensor assembly turns on the SRS warning light. However, in
contrast to the ordinary diagnosis function, a DTC is not stored. The SRS warning light cannot be turned
off. It is necessary to replace the center airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEF
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DRIVER AIRBAG;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
DRIVER AIRBAG
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The inflator and bag are built into the horn button assembly.
*1 Bag *2 Inflator
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEG
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PASSENGER AIRBAG;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PASSENGER AIRBAG
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The instrument panel passenger without door airbag assembly is located in the upper section of the
instrument panel of the front passenger seat.
(b) The instrument panel passenger without door airbag assembly consists of an inflator and a bag.
*1 Bag *2 Inflator

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEH
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The lower No. 1 instrument panel airbag assembly consists of an airbag door, an inflator and a bag.
*1 Inflator *2 Bag
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEI
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SIDE AIRBAG;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SIDE AIRBAG
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The front seat airbag assemblies are installed in the seat backs of the driver seat and the front passenger
seat. Each front seat airbag assembly is a one-piece design, consisting of an inflator and a bag.
*1 Bag *2 Inflator
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEJ
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The curtain shield airbag assemblies are installed in the area close to the sides of the headliner. Each curtain
shield airbag assembly is a one-piece design, consisting of an inflator and a bag.
*1 Inflator *2 Bag
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEK
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) driver and front passenger and curtain shield airbags are used as
supplements to the seat belts to help to reduce the shocks to the head and chest of the driver or front
passenger in the event of a frontal collision.
(b) An SRS driver knee airbag is used as a supplement to the seat belt to help to reduce the shock to the knee of
the driver in the event of a frontal collision.*
*: Models with SRS driver knee airbag
(c) SRS front side airbags are used during a side collision to help reduce the impact to the chests of the driver and
front passenger.
(d) An SRS seat cushion airbag is used as a supplement to the seat belts to prevent the front passenger from
sliding forward in the event of a front impact collision.*
*: Models with SRS seat cushion airbag
(e) SRS curtain shield airbags are used in the event of a frontal or a side or side rear collision to help reduce the
impact to the heads of the front passenger or rear passengers.
*A Models with SRS Driver Knee Airbag *B Models with SRS Seat Cushion Airbag
*1 SRS Front Passenger Airbag *2 SRS Driver Airbag
*3 SRS Driver Knee Airbag *4 SRS Seat Cushion Airbag
*5 SRS Front Side Airbag *6 SRS Curtain Shield Airbag
2. PRECAUTION
(a) Event Data Recorder (EDR)
(1) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how vehicle's systems have performed in certain crash or near-crash
situations (for example, situations involving airbag deployment or collisions with a road obstacle). The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
(2) The EDR is designed to record such data as:
How various systems were operating

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened/buckled
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal
The vehicle speed
(3) These data can be used to gain a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTICE:
Data are only recorded by the EDR in serious crash situations. No data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data (for example, name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
driving conditions and no personal data (for example, name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, may be able to combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties which have the necessary special equipment, such as law enforcement agencies,
will be able to read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
(4) Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
For use by Toyota in a law suit
Ordered by a court of law
(5) However, if necessary, Toyota will:
Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the
specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEL
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEM
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly RH *2 Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly RH
*3 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly RH *4 Front Airbag Sensor RH

*5 Front Airbag Sensor LH *6 ECM
*7 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly LH *8 Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly LH
*9 No. 2 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly RH *10 No. 2 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly LH
*11 Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly LH - -
*A Models with SRS Driver Knee Airbag *B Models with SRS Seat Cushion Airbag
*1 SRS Warning Light *2 Telltale Light Assembly
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network

*3 Combination Meter Assembly *4
Body ECU)
Body ECU)
Lower No. 1 Instrument Panel Airbag

*5 DLC3 *6
Assembly
*7 Horn Button Assembly *8 Front Seat Airbag Assembly LH
Center Airbag Sensor Assembly (Airbag

*9 *10 Occupant Detection ECU
ECU Assembly)
Front Seat Cushion Airbag Assembly
*11 *12 Front Seat Airbag Assembly RH
RH
Instrument Panel Passenger without

*13 *14 AIRBAG ON/OFF Indicator Lights
Door Airbag Assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEN
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION CONTROL

(a) The main components in the occupant detection system have the following functions:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
The occupant detection ECU judges whether the front passenger seat is occupied
Occupant Detection ECU based on signals from the 2 occupant detection sensors and the front seat inner belt
assembly RH.
Occupant Detection The output values of this sensor, which vary in accordance with the distortion that
Sensor acts on the brackets, are output to the occupant detection ECU.
Front Seat Inner Belt The front seat inner belt assembly RH detects whether or not the front passenger seat
Assembly RH belt is fastened.
Combination SRS
The SRS warning light turns on to alert the driver when the center airbag sensor
Meter Warning
assembly detects a malfunction in the airbag system.
Assembly Light
Inform the driver whether the occupant detection ECU puts the instrument
AIRBAG
Telltale panel passenger airbag without door assembly and front seat outer belt
ON/OFF
Light assembly RH into an active state or inactive state.
Indicator
Assembly If a malfunction occurs in the occupant classification system, the AIRBAG
Light
OFF indicator light and the SRS warning light come on.
2. OPERATIONG CONDITION
(a) The front passenger SRS components and indicator lights operate as follows according to the occupant
classification.
ITEM OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
ADULT CHILD CHILD UNOCCUPIED MALFUNCTION

SEAT
SRS Front Passenger Airbag (Instrument Panel Passenger

○ - - - -
Airbag without Door Assembly)
SRS Seat Cushion Airbag RH (Front Seat Cushion Airbag

○*2 - - - -
Assembly RH)*1
SRS Front Side Airbag RH (Front Seat Airbag Assembly

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
RH)
Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly RH ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
AIRBAG ON Indicator Light On Off Off Off Off

AIRBAG OFF Indicator Light Off On On On On
HINT:
○ : Enabled
- : Disabled
*1: Models with SRS seat cushion airbag
*2: Not be deployed when the front passenger seat belt has been unfastened.
3. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) In the occupant classification system, the occupant detection ECU calculates the weight of the occupant
based on signals from the occupant detection sensors.
(b) This system recognizes the occupant as a child if it detects a weight of less than criteria value "B", and
disables the SRS front passenger air bag (instrument panel passenger without door airbag assembly) and SRS
seat cushion airbag RH (front seat cushion air bag assembly RH).
(c) The occupant detection ECU uses criteria value "A" to judge whether the seat is occupied by a child in
accordance with the signals from the 2 occupant detection sensors and front seat inner belt assembly RH, and
criteria value "B" to judge whether the occupant is an adult or child (with child seat).
(d) The occupant detection ECU judges that the seat is unoccupied when the judgment value is lower than
criteria value "A" and the front seat inner belt assembly RH is off.
(e) If the ignition switch is turned to ON under the following conditions, the system performs an initial check and
illuminates the AIRBAG OFF indicator light. Then, the system prohibits the deployment of the SRS front
passenger airbag (instrument panel passenger without door airbag assembly) and SRS front seat cushion
airbag RH (front seat cushion airbag assembly RH).
(f) If the judgment value is lower than criteria value "B" and the front seat inner belt assembly RH is on, the
occupant detection ECU judges that a child seat is installed.
(g) If the judgment value is higher than criteria value "A", but lower than criteria value "B", and the front seat
inner belt assembly RH is off, the occupant detection ECU judges that the seat is being occupied by a child.
(h) When the ignition switch is turned to ON under the following conditions, the system performs an initial check
and illuminates the AIRBAG OFF indicator light to indicate that the SRS front passenger airbag (instrument
panel passenger without door airbag assembly) and SRS front seat cushion airbag RH (front seat cushion
airbag assembly) have been deactivated.
(i) When the judgment value is higher than criteria value "B", the occupant detection ECU judges that the seat is
occupied by an adult.
(j) If the ignition switch is turned to ON in the following state, the system performs an initial check and
illuminates the AIRBAG ON indicator light, indicating that the SRS front passenger airbag (instrument panel
passenger without door airbag assembly), SRS front seat cushion airbag RH (front seat cushion airbag
assembly RH), SRS front side airbag RH (front seat airbag assembly RH) and front seat outer belt assembly RH
are active.
(k) After the ignition switch is turned to ON, the occupant detection ECU lights up the AIRBAG ON/OFF indicator
lights via the center airbag sensor assembly based on the timing chart below in order to check the indicator
light circuits:
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If the occupant detection ECU detects a malfunction in the occupant classification system, the occupant
detection ECU stores the malfunction data in memory. If the airbag sensor assembly detects a malfunction in
the occupant detection ECU, the center airbag sensor assembly illuminates the SRS warning light and AIRBAG
OFF indicator light.
(b) The occupant detection ECU outputs 5-digit Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to the Techstream.
(c) The 5-digit DTCs can be read after connecting the Techstream to the DLC3. For details, refer to the Repair
Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEO
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The occupant classification system judges whether the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or
child (with a child seat) or is unoccupied in accordance with the load that is applied to the front
passenger seat and whether the seat belt is fastened.
(b) This system restricts the deployment of the front passenger airbag assembly and front seat outer belt
assembly RH.
(c) The system informs the driver of the result of the judgment through the use of the AIRBAG ON/OFF
indicator lights.
(d) This system consists of an occupant detection ECU, 2 occupant detection sensors, AIRBAG ON/OFF
indicator lights, front seat inner belt assembly RH and center airbag sensor assembly.
2. PRECAUTION
(a) To avoid potential death or serious injury caused by the occupant classification system not detecting the
conditions correctly, observe the following:
(1) Wear the seat belt properly.
(2) Make sure that the front passenger seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before
someone sits in the front passenger seat.
(3) Make sure that the AIRBAG ON indicator light is illuminated when using a seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the AIRBAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If a seat belt extender is in use while
the AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the instrument panel passenger without door airbag
assembly, lower No. 2 instrument panel airbag assembly and front seat outer belt assembly RH may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
(4) Do not put a heavy load in the front passenger seat back pocket or attach a seat back table to the
front passenger seat back.
(5) Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting hands or feet on the front passenger seat
back from the rear seat.
(6) Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with feet or press on the seat back with legs.
(7) Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
(8) Do not recline the front passenger seat back so far that it touches the rear seat. This may cause the
AIRBAG OFF indicator light to illuminate, which indicates that the passenger airbags will not deploy in
the event of a severe accident. If the seat back touches the rear seat, return the seat back to a
position where it does not touch the rear seat.
(b) Keep the front passenger seat back as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seat
back excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt.
(1) Make sure that the AIRBAG ON indicator light is illuminated when an adult sits in the front passenger
seat. If the AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit properly with their
back upright and against the seat, with legs comfortably extended and to wear the seat belt
correctly. If the AIRBAG OFF indicator light remains illuminated nonetheless, ask the passenger to sit
in the rear seat. When it is unavoidable to sit in the front passenger seat, ask the passenger to move
the seat as far back as possible and remain properly seated.
(2) When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper manner.
(3) Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impacts. Otherwise, the SRS warning
light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system.
(4) Do not install child restraint systems on the rear seat so that they come into contact with the front
seat backs.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEP
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IEQ
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
Combination Meter Assembly

*1 *2 DLC3
SRS Warning Light
Center Airbag Sensor Assembly (Airbag
*3 ECU Assembly) *4 Front Seat Inner Belt Assembly RH

*3 ECU Assembly) *4 Front Seat Inner Belt Assembly RH
*5 Occupant Detection Sensor LH *6 Occupant Detection ECU

Telltale Light Assembly
*7 Occupant Detection Sensor RH *8 AIRBAG ON/OFF Indicator

Light
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IER
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) 12 V power outlet socket assemblies are located as follows:
Inside the lower portion of the instrument panel

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IES
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Power Outlet Socket Assembly - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHD
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SEAT CUSHION AIRBAG;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
SEAT CUSHION AIRBAG

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The front seat cushion airbag assembly is installed in the seat cushion of the front passenger seat. The front
seat cushion airbag assembly is a one-piece design, consisting of an inflator and a bag.
*1 Bag *2 Inflator
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHE
Title: SEAT: POWER SEAT CONTROL SYSTEM: SEAT CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SEAT CONTROL
(a) The main components have the following functions:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Operates the motors in accordance with the signals from the front
Position Control ECU and power seat switch.
Switch Assembly Recalls seat positions in accordance with the operation of the seat
memory switch.
Lumbar Support Switch Operates the lumbar support.
Seat Memory Switch Operates the driving position memory function.
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Various signals are transmitted and received via the Controller Area Network
Network Body ECU) (CAN) by way of the main body ECU.
(a) Memory Function for Driver Seat
(1) The operating conditions of the memory function are as follows:
FUNCTION CONDITION OPERATION
Either of the following conditions is met while

the ignition switch is ON:
Stores the seat position.
Button 1 or 2 is pushed while the
When the memory setting is
Memory "SET" button is being pushed.
completed, the buzzer will sound for
Button 1 or 2 is pushed within 3
0.5 seconds.
seconds after the "SET" button is
pushed.

Shift position is in P.
Button 1 or 2 is pushed.
Button 1 or 2 is pushed within 180 seconds

after:
Recalls the seat position that was memorized in
Recall Ignition switch is off.
the position control ECU.
Driver door is opened.
Button 1 or 2 is pushed within 60 seconds

after:
Ignition switch is off.
Driver door is closed.
3. FUNCTION
(a) Front Power Seat Control System
(1) The front power seat control system can be used to control the driver seat using the power seat
switch assembly.
(2) The lumbar support function, which offers extra support over a substantial area of the lower back, is
used.
(3) The front power seat operates as follows:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Manual The user can perform slide, reclining, front vertical, seat lifter and lumbar support adjustments by
Control operating the position control ECU and switch assembly and lumbar support switch.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHF
Title: SEAT: POWER SEAT CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Front Power Seat Control System
(1) A front power seat control system is provided for the driver seat.
(2) A memory function is used in the power seat control system for the driver seat.
2. SPECIFICATION
(a) The power seat control system for the driver seat has the following functions:
ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION STROKE
NO. ITEM
(1) Seat Slide 240 mm (9.4 in.)
(2) Seat Reclining 52 degrees
(3) Front Vertical 34.2 mm (1.3 in.)

(4) Seat Lifter 56.7 mm (2.2 in.)
(5) Lumbar Support 30 mm (1.2 in.)
3. PRECAUTION
(1) The type of ignition switch used on this model differs depending on the specifications of the vehicle. The
expressions listed in the table below are used in this section.
Engine Start START On(Start)

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHG
Title: SEAT: POWER SEAT CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHH
Title: SEAT: POWER SEAT CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 *2 Seat Memory Switch
Body ECU)
*3 Lumbar Support Adjuster Assembly *4 Power Seat Tilt Motor Assembly

Position Control ECU and Switch
*5 Power Seat Slide Motor Assembly *6
Assembly
*7 Power Seat Lifter Motor Assembly *8 Power Seat Reclining Motor Assembly

Assembly Position Control ECU and Switch
Assembly
*9 Seat Slide Switch *10
Vertical Switch Seat Reclining Switch
Seat Lifter Switch
*11 Lumbar Support Switch - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHI
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SEAT HEATER CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SEAT HEATER CONTROL

(a) The main components have the following functions:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Seat Heater The seat heater is sewn into the internal surfaces of the seat cushion and the seat back. It
Assembly warms up the seat surfaces using the heat caused by electrical resistance.
Seat Heater
Switch By operating this switch, the seat heater system is turned HI or LO.
Assembly
2. FUNCTION
(a) Seat Heater System
(1) The seat heater system is operated by pressing the seat heater switch assembly. The temperature
can be adjusted between 2 stages by pressing the HI switch or LO switch of the seat heater switch
assembly.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHJ
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SEAT HEATER SWITCH;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SEAT HEATER SWITCH

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) When the HI switch or LO switch of the seat heater switch assembly is pressed, the indicator light of that
switch is turned on.
*1 Indicator Light *2 Front Seat Heater Switch LH

*3 Front Seat Heater Switch RH - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHK
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Seat Heater System
(1) A seat heater system is provided in the driver seat and front passenger seat.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHL
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004IHM
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Seat Heater Switch Assembly LH *2 Seat Heater Switch Assembly RH
*3 Seat Back Heater RH *4 Seat Cushion Heater RH
*5 Seat Cushion Heater LH *6 Seat Back Heater LH

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004XON
Title: 2AR-FE BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: CHARGING CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
CHARGING CONTROL
1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) When whole status of driving, this system regulates the generated voltage in order to place the
amperage estimation value close to the target value. This reduces the load on the engine as a result of
the electric generation of the generator, thus contributing to the fuel economy of the engine.
(b) This control consists of a generator control ECU assembly with a built-in battery current sensor and
battery temperature sensor, generator, various sensors, switches and ECM.
(c) The ECM detects the driving condition based on signals from various sensors and switches generator
control ECU assembly detects the charging condition based on signals from the generator assembly,
battery currentsensor and battery temperatur sensor. The ECM determines the vehicle driving
conditions, and based on this information, the generator control ECU assembly sends a voltage request
signal to the generator assembly.
(d) The generator control ECU assembly stops the charging control and the generator switches to normal
power generation mode under the following conditions:
(1) Low battery capacity
(2) Low battery temperature
(3) Battery current sensor or battery temperature sensor malfunction
(4) Engine started
(5) Communication failure (local communication between generator control ECU assembly and ECM)
(6) Generator assembly malfunction
(7) Battery charged for approximately 2.5 to 4 hours
(8) Accumulated driving time becomes approximetely 20 hours

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004XOO
Title: 2AR-FE BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The generator control ECU assembly installed on the negative (-) terminal of the battery detects the battery
charge and discharge current and calculates the battery capacity.
(b) A shunt resistor is used for detection of the charge and discharge current. The battery charge and discharge
current is converted and calculated by measuring the voltage drop across the shunt resistor.
*1 Generator Control ECU Assembly - -
This illustration is shown as an

*a - -
example.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004XOP
Title: 2AR-FE BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The battery temperature sensor is built into the generator control ECU assembly.
(b) The battery characteristic (battery internal resistance) of taking in current for charging varies according
to battery electrolyte temperature. If the electrolyte temperature is too low or too high, the battery
internal resistance will increase, resulting in early deterioration. To prevent this, the battery temperature
sensor sends the temperature to generator control ECU assembly.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004XOQ
Title: 2AR-FE BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Charging control is used. The generator control ECU assembly regulates the charging voltage of the
generator assembly in accordance with the driving conditions and the charge state of the battery.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004XOR
Title: 2AR-FE BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004ZJW
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: MAJOR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Models for U.S.A. 1
(1) Major Dimensions, Vehicle Weights and Performance
BODY TYPE 5-DOOR WAGON
VEHICLE GRADE LE XLE LIMITED LE
MODEL CODE ASA44L- ASA44L- ASA44L- ASA42L-

ANTXKA ANTMKA ANTGKA ANTXKA
4570 4570 4570 4570

Length mm (in.)
(179.9) (179.9) (179.9) (179.9)
Width mm (in.) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6)
Overall
1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4)
Height mm (in.) 1705 1705 1705 1705
(67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4
2660 2660 2660 2660

Wheel Base mm (in.)
(104.7) (104.7) (104.7) (104.7)
1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)

Front mm (in.) 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8) 1570 1570
(61.8)*2 (61.8)*2
Tread*1
1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)
Rear mm (in.) 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8) 1570 1570
(61.8)*2 (61.8)*2
Front mm (in.) 1012 (39.8) 988 (38.9) 988 (38.9) 1012 (39.8)
Effective Head Room
Rear mm (in.) 987 (38.9) 989 (38.9) 989 (38.9) 987 (38.9)
Front mm (in.) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6)
Effective Leg Room
Rear mm (in.) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2)
Front mm (in.) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3)
Shoulder Room
Rear mm (in.) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4)
Front mm (in.) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8)
Overhang
Rear mm (in.) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4)
Min. Running Ground Clearance mm (in.) 159 (6.3) 159 (6.3) 159 (6.3) 159 (6.3)
Angle of Approach degrees 29 29 29 29

Angle of Departure degrees 22 22 22 22
Front kg (lb) - - - -
Curb Weight Rear kg (lb) - - - -
Total kg (lb) 1600 (3550) 1615 (3585) 1625 (3610) 1545 (3435)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rear kg (lb) - - - -
Total kg (lb) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070)
Luggage Compartment Capacity L (cu. ft.) 577 (20.4) 577 (20.4) 577 (20.4) 577 (20.4)
L (Imp.
Fuel Tank Capacity 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2)
gal)
km/h
Max. Speed 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
Max. Cruising Speed - - - -
(mph)
km/h
1st Gear 59 (37) 59 (37) 59 (37) 63 (39)
(mph)
km/h
2nd Gear 103 (64) 103 (64) 103 (64) 109 (68)
(mph)
km/h
3rd Gear 137 (85) 137 (85) 137 (85) 146 (91)
(mph)
Max. Permissible Speed
km/h
4th Gear 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
5th Gear 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111)
(mph)
km/h
6th Gear 170 (106) 170 (106) 170 (106) 157 (98)
(mph)
0 to 60
sec. 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.9
mph
Acceleration
0 to 1/4
sec. 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.3
mile
10.6
(34.8)*2
Tire m (ft.) 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8)
11.2
Turning Diameter (Outside (36.7)*3
Front) 11.4
(37.4)*2
Body m (ft.) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4)
12.0
(39.4)*3
*1: Unladen vehicle

*2: Models with 17-inch wheels
*4: Models with roof rail
(2) Engine, Engine Electrical and Chassis
MODEL CODE ASA44L-ANTXKA ASA44L-ANTMKA ASA44L-ANTGKA ASA42L-ANTXKA
Engine Type 2AR-FE 2AR-FE 2AR-FE 2AR-FE
No. of Cyls. and

4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line
Arrangement
16-valve DOHC, 16-valve DOHC, 16-valve DOHC, 16-valve DOHC,

Valve Mechanism Chain Drive (with Chain Drive (with Chain Drive (with Chain Drive (with
Dual VVT-i) Dual VVT-i) Dual VVT-i) Dual VVT-i)
Bore x 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0

mm (in.)
Stroke (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86)
Displacement cm 3 (cu. in.) 2494 (152.2) 2494 (152.2) 2494 (152.2) 2494 (152.2)
Compression Ratio 10.4 : 1 10.4 : 1 10.4 : 1 10.4 : 1
Fuel System SFI SFI SFI SFI
Octane Rating 87 or higher 87 or higher 87 or higher 87 or higher
Max. Output kW@rpm 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000

[SAE-NET]*1 (HP@rpm) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000)
Max. Torque N*m@rpm 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100

[SAE-NET]*1 (ft.*lbf@rpm) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100)
Battery
Voltage and
Capacity 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52
Amp. hr.
(5HR)
Alternator
Watts 1200 1200 1200 1200
Output
Starter
kW 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Output
Clutch Type - - - -
Transaxle Type U760F U760F U760F U760E
1st 3.300 3.300 3.300 3.300
2nd 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
3rd 1.420 1.420 1.420 1.420

Transaxle
4th 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Gear Ratio
5th 0.713 0.713 0.713 0.713
6th 0.608 0.608 0.608 0.608
Reverse 4.148 4.148 4.148 4.148
Differential (Final) Gear

Ratio 4.071 4.071 4.071 3.819
Transfer Gear Ratio 0.439 0.439 0.439 -
Rear Differential Gear Ratio 2.277 2.277 2.277 -
Rear
Differential in. 135 (5.3) 135 (5.3) 135 (5.3) -
Gear Size
Front Ventilated Disc Ventilated Disc Ventilated Disc Ventilated Disc

Brake Type
Rear Solid Disc Solid Disc Solid Disc Solid Disc
Parking Brake Type Duo-servo Drum Duo-servo Drum Duo-servo Drum Duo-servo Drum
Brake
Booster Type in. Single, 10 Single, 10 Single, 10 Single, 10
and Size
Suspension Front MacPherson Strut MacPherson Strut MacPherson Strut MacPherson Strut
Type Rear Double-wishbone Double-wishbone Double-wishbone Double-wishbone
Front Standard Standard Standard Standard

Stabilizer Bar
Rear Standard Standard Standard Standard
Steering Gear Type Rack and Pinion Rack and Pinion Rack and Pinion Rack and Pinion
Steering Gear Ratio 14.5*2

14.5 14.5 14.5
(Overall) 14.7*3
Power Steering Type Electric Motor Electric Motor Electric Motor Electric Motor
(b) Models for U.S.A. 2
VEHICLE GRADE XLE LIMITED LE XLE

ANTMKA ANTGKA CNTXKA CNTMKA
4570 4570 4570

Length mm (in.) 4570 (179.9)
(179.9) (179.9) (179.9)
Overall Width mm (in.) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6)
1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4)

Height mm (in.) 1705 1705 1705 1705
(67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4
2660 2660 2660

Wheel Base mm (in.) 2660 (104.7)
(104.7) (104.7) (104.7)
1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)

Front mm (in.) 1570 (61.8) 1570 1570 1570
(61.8)*2 (61.8)*2 (61.8)*2
Tread*1
1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)

Rear mm (in.) 1570 (61.8) 1570 1570 1570
(61.8)*2 (61.8)*2 (61.8)*2
Front mm (in.) 988 (38.9) 988 (38.9) 1012 (39.8) 988 (38.9)
Effective Head Room
Rear mm (in.) 989 (38.9) 989 (38.9) 987 (38.9) 989 (38.9)
Front mm (in.) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6)
Effective Leg Room
Rear mm (in.) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2)
Front mm (in.) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3)
Shoulder Room
Rear mm (in.) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4)
Front mm (in.) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8)
Overhang
Rear mm (in.) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4)
Total kg (lb) 1560 (3465) 1575 (3500) 1600 (3527) 1615 (3560)
Total kg (lb) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070)
L (Imp.
gal)
km/h
Max. Speed (mph) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
km/h
(mph)
1st Gear km/h 63 (39) 63 (39) 59 (37) 59 (37)
(mph)
km/h
2nd Gear 109 (68) 109 (68) 103 (64) 103 (64)
(mph)
km/h
3rd Gear 146 (91) 146 (91) 137 (85) 137 (85)
Max. Permissible Speed (mph)
km/h
4th Gear 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
5th Gear 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111)
(mph)
km/h
6th Gear 157 (98) 157 (98) 170 (106) 170 (106)
(mph)
0 to 60
sec. 8.9 8.9 9.0 9.0
mph
Acceleration
0 to 1/4
sec. 16.3 16.3 16.4 16.4
mile
10.6
(34.8)*2
Tire m (ft.) 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8)
11.2
Front) 11.4
(37.4)*2
Body m (ft.) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4)
12.0
(39.4)*3
*1: Unladen vehicle

VEHICLE GRADE XLE LIMITED LE XLE
MODEL CODE ASA42L-ANTMKA ASA42L-ANTGKA ASA44L-CNTXKA ASA44L-CNTMKA
No. of Cyls. and

Arrangement

Bore x 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0

mm (in.)
Stroke (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86)
Max. Output kW@rpm 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000

[SAE-NET]*1 (HP@rpm) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000)
Max. Torque N*m@rpm 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100

[SAE-NET]*1 (ft.*lbf@rpm) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100)
Battery
Voltage and
Capacity 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52
Amp. hr.
(5HR)
Alternator
Watts 1200 1200 1200 1200
Output
Starter
kW 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Output
Clutch Type - - - -
Transaxle Type U760E U760E U760F U760F
1st 3.300 3.300 3.300 3.300
2nd 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
3rd 1.420 1.420 1.420 1.420

Transaxle
4th 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Gear Ratio
5th 0.713 0.713 0.713 0.713
6th 0.608 0.608 0.608 0.608
Reverse 4.148 4.148 4.148 4.148

3.819 3.819 4.071 4.071
Ratio
Transfer Gear Ratio - - 0.439 0.439
Rear Differential Gear Ratio - - 2.277 2.277
Rear
Differential in. - - 135 (5.3) 135 (5.3)
Gear Size

Brake Type
Brake
and Size

Stabilizer Bar
Steering Gear Ratio 14.5*2

14.5 14.5 14.5
(Overall) 14.7*3
(c) Models for U.S.A. 3

VEHICLE GRADE LIMITED LE XLE LIMITED

CNTGKA CNTXKA CNTMKA CNTGKA
4570 4570 4570

Length mm (in.) 4570 (179.9)
(179.9) (179.9) (179.9)
Width mm (in.) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6)
Overall
1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4)
Height mm (in.) 1705 1705 1705 1705
(67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4
2660 2660 2660

Wheel Base mm (in.) 2660 (104.7)
(104.7) (104.7) (104.7)
1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)

Front mm (in.) 1570 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8) 1570
(61.8)*2 (61.8)*2
Tread*1
1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)
Rear mm (in.) 1570 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8) 1570
(61.8)*2 (61.8)*2
Front mm (in.) 988 (38.9) 1012 (39.8) 988 (38.9) 988 (38.9)
Effective Head Room
Rear mm (in.) 989 (38.9) 987 (38.9) 989 (38.9) 989 (38.9)
Front mm (in.) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6)
Effective Leg Room
Rear mm (in.) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2)
Front mm (in.) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3)
Shoulder Room
Rear mm (in.) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4)
Front mm (in.) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8)
Overhang
Rear mm (in.) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4)
Total kg (lb) 1620 (3571) 1545 (3406) 1560 (3439) 1570 (3461)
Gross Vehicle Weight

Rear kg (lb) - - - -
Total kg (lb) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070)
L (Imp.
gal)
km/h
Max. Speed 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
(mph)
km/h
1st Gear 59 (37) 63 (39) 63 (39) 63 (39)
(mph)
km/h
2nd Gear 103 (64) 109 (68) 109 (68) 109 (68)
(mph)
km/h
3rd Gear 137 (85) 146 (91) 146 (91) 146 (91)
(mph)
km/h
4th Gear 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
5th Gear 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111)
(mph)
km/h
6th Gear 170 (106) 157 (98) 157 (98) 157 (98)
(mph)
0 to 60
sec. 9.0 8.9 8.9 8.9
mph
Acceleration
0 to 1/4
sec. 16.4 16.3 16.3 16.3
mile
10.6 10.6
(34.8)*2 (34.8)*2
Tire m (ft.) 11.2 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8) 11.2
(36.7)*3 (36.7)*3
Turning Diameter (Outside
Front)
11.4 11.4
(37.4)*2 (37.4)*2
Body m (ft.) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4)
12.0 12.0
(39.4)*3 (39.4)*3
*1: Unladen vehicle

VEHICLE GRADE LIMITED LE XLE LIMITED
MODEL CODE ASA44L-CNTGKA ASA42L-CNTXKA ASA42L-CNTMKA ASA42L-CNTGKA
No. of Cyls. and

Arrangement

Bore x 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0

mm (in.)
Stroke (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86)
Max. Output kW@rpm 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000

[SAE-NET]*1 (HP@rpm) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000)
Max. Torque N*m@rpm 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100

[SAE-NET]*1 (ft.*lbf@rpm) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100)
Battery
Voltage and
Capacity 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52
Amp. hr.
(5HR)
Alternator
Watts 1200 1200 1200 1200
Output
Starter
kW 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Output
Clutch Type - - - -
Transaxle Type U760F U760E U760E U760E
1st 3.300 3.300 3.300 3.300
2nd 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
3rd 1.420 1.420 1.420 1.420

Transaxle
4th 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Gear Ratio
5th 0.713 0.713 0.713 0.713
6th 0.608 0.608 0.608 0.608
Reverse 4.148 4.148 4.148 4.148

Ratio 4.071 3.819 3.819 3.819
Transfer Gear Ratio 0.439 - - -
Rear Differential Gear Ratio 2.277 - - -
Rear
Differential in. 135 (5.3) - - -
Gear Size

Brake Type
Brake
and Size

Stabilizer Bar
Steering Gear Ratio 14.5*2 14.5*2

14.5 14.5
(Overall) 14.7*3 14.7*3
(d) Models for Canada 1


CNTXKK CNTMKK CNTGKK CNTXKK
4570 4570 4570 4570

Length mm (in.)
(179.9) (179.9) (179.9) (179.9)
Width mm (in.) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6)
Overall
1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4)
Height mm (in.) 1705 1705 1705 1705
(67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4 (67.1)*4
2660 2660 2660 2660

Wheel Base mm (in.)
(104.7) (104.7) (104.7) (104.7)
1560 (61.4)
1570
Front mm (in.) 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8)
(61.8)*2
Tread*1
1560 (61.4)
Rear mm (in.) 1570 (61.8) 1570 (61.8) 1570 1570 (61.8)
(61.8)*2
Front mm (in.) 1012 (39.8) 988 (38.9) 988 (38.9) 1012 (39.8)
Effective Head Room
Rear mm (in.) 987 (38.9) 989 (38.9) 989 (38.9) 987 (38.9)
Front mm (in.) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6)
Effective Leg Room
Rear mm (in.) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2)
Front mm (in.) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3)
Shoulder Room
Rear mm (in.) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4)
Front mm (in.) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8)
Overhang
Rear mm (in.) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4)
Total kg (lb) 1600 (3527) 1615 (3560) 1620 (3571) 1545 (3406)
Total kg (lb) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070)
Fuel Tank Capacity L (Imp. 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2)
gal)
km/h
Max. Speed 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
(mph)
km/h
1st Gear 59 (37) 59 (37) 59 (37) 63 (39)
(mph)
km/h
2nd Gear 103 (64) 103 (64) 103 (64) 109 (68)
(mph)
km/h
3rd Gear 137 (85) 137 (85) 137 (85) 146 (91)
(mph)
km/h
4th Gear 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
5th Gear 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111) 178 (111)
(mph)
km/h
6th Gear 170 (106) 170 (106) 170 (106) 157 (98)
(mph)
0 to 60
sec. 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.9
mph
Acceleration
0 to 1/4
sec. 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.3
mile
10.6
(34.8)*2
Tire m (ft.) 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8) 10.6 (34.8)
11.2
Front) 11.4
(37.4)*2
Body m (ft.) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4)
12.0
(39.4)*3
*1: Unladen vehicle

MODEL CODE ASA44L-CNTXKK ASA44L-CNTMKK ASA44L-CNTGKK ASA42L-CNTXKK

No. of Cyls. and 4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line
Arrangement

Bore x 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0 90.0 x 98.0

mm (in.)
Stroke (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86) (3.54 x 3.86)
Max. Output kW@rpm 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000 131@6000

[SAE-NET]*1 (HP@rpm) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000) (176@6000)
Max. Torque N*m@rpm 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100 233@4100

[SAE-NET]*1 (ft.*lbf@rpm) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100) (172@4100)
Battery
Capacity Voltage and
12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52 12 - 52
(5HR) Amp. hr.
Alternator
Watts 1200 1200 1200 1200
Output
Starter
kW 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Output
Clutch Type - - - -
Transaxle Type U760F U760F U760F U760E
1st 3.300 3.300 3.300 3.300
2nd 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
3rd 1.420 1.420 1.420 1.420

Transaxle
4th 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Gear Ratio
5th 0.713 0.713 0.713 0.713
6th 0.608 0.608 0.608 0.608
Reverse 4.148 4.148 4.148 4.148

4.071 4.071 4.071 3.819
Ratio
Transfer Gear Ratio 0.439 0.439 0.439 -
Rear Differential Gear Ratio 2.277 2.277 2.277 -
Rear
Differential in. 135 (5.3) 135 (5.3) 135 (5.3) -
Gear Size
Brake Type
Brake
and Size

Stabilizer Bar
Steering Gear Ratio 14.5 14.5 14.5*2 14.5

(Overall) 14.7*3
(e) Models for Canada 2
VEHICLE GRADE XLE LIMITED
MODEL CODE ASA42L- ASA42L-CNTGKK

CNTMKK
Length mm (in.) 4570 (179.9) 4570 (179.9)
Width mm (in.) 1845 (72.6) 1845 (72.6)

Overall
1660 (65.4) 1660 (65.4)
Height mm (in.)
1705 (67.1)*4 1705 (67.1)*4
Wheel Base mm (in.) 2660 (104.7) 2660 (104.7)
1560 (61.4)
Front mm (in.) 1570 (61.8)
1570 (61.8)*2
Tread*1
1560 (61.4)
Rear mm (in.) 1570 (61.8)
1570 (61.8)*2
Front mm (in.) 988 (38.9) 988 (38.9)

Effective Head Room
Rear mm (in.) 989 (38.9) 989 (38.9)
Front mm (in.) 1081 (42.6) 1081 (42.6)

Effective Leg Room
Rear mm (in.) 944 (37.2) 944 (37.2)
Front mm (in.) 1455 (57.3) 1455 (57.3)
Shoulder Room
Rear mm (in.) 1407 (55.4) 1407 (55.4)
Front mm (in.) 910 (35.8) 910 (35.8)

Overhang
Rear mm (in.) 1000 (39.4) 1000 (39.4)
Min. Running Ground Clearance mm (in.) 159 (6.3) 159 (6.3)
Angle of Approach degrees 29 29
Angle of Departure degrees 22 22
Front kg (lb) - -
Curb Weight Rear kg (lb) - -
Total kg (lb) 1560 (3465) 1570 (3485)
Front kg (lb) - -
Gross Vehicle Weight Rear kg (lb) - -
Total kg (lb) 2300 (5070) 2300 (5070)
Luggage Compartment Capacity L (cu. ft.) 577 (20.4) 577 (20.4)
Fuel Tank Capacity L (Imp. gal) 60 (13.2) 60 (13.2)
km/h
Max. Speed 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
Max. Cruising Speed km/h

- -
(mph)
km/h
1st Gear 63 (39) 63 (39)
(mph)
km/h
2nd Gear 109 (68) 109 (68)
(mph)
km/h
3rd Gear 146 (91) 146 (91)
(mph)
km/h
4th Gear 200 (124) 200 (124)
(mph)
km/h
5th Gear 178 (111) 178 (111)
(mph)
km/h
6th Gear 157 (98) 157 (98)
(mph)
0 to 60 mph sec. 8.9 8.9

Acceleration 0 to 1/4
sec. 16.3 16.3
mile
10.6 (34.8)*2, 11.2

Tire m (ft.) 10.6 (34.8)
Front)
Body m (ft.) 11.4 (37.4) 11.4 (37.4)*2, 12.0
(39.4)*3
*1: Unladen vehicle

VEHICLE GRADE XLE LIMITED
MODEL CODE ASA42L-CNTMKK ASA42L-CNTGKK
Engine Type 2AR-FE 2AR-FE
No. of Cyls. and Arrangement 4-cylinder, In-line 4-cylinder, In-line
16-valve DOHC, Chain Drive 16-valve DOHC, Chain Drive

Valve Mechanism
(with Dual VVT-i) (with Dual VVT-i)
Bore x Stroke mm (in.) 90.0 x 98.0 (3.54 x 3.86) 90.0 x 98.0 (3.54 x 3.86)
Displacement cm 3 (cu. in.) 2494 (152.2) 2494 (152.2)
Compression Ratio 10.4 : 1 10.4 : 1
Fuel System SFI SFI
Octane Rating 87 or higher 87 or higher
kW@rpm
Max. Output [SAE-
(HP@rpm) 131@6000 (176@6000) 131@6000 (176@6000)
NET]*1
Max. Torque [SAE- N*m@rpm

233@4100 (172@4100) 233@4100 (172@4100)
NET]*1 (ft.*lbf@rpm)
Battery Capacity Voltage and Amp.

12 - 52 12 - 52
(5HR) hr.
Alternator Output Watts 1200 1200
Starter Output kW 1.7 1.7
Clutch Type - -
Transaxle Type U760E U760E
1st 3.300 3.300
2nd 1.900 1.900
3rd 1.420 1.420

Transaxle Gear
4th 1.000 1.000
Ratio
5th 0.713 0.713
6th 0.608 0.608
Reverse 4.148 4.148
Differential (Final) Gear Ratio 3.819 3.819
Transfer Gear Ratio - -
Rear Differential Gear Ratio - -
Rear Differential
in. - -
Gear Size
Front Ventilated Disc Ventilated Disc

Brake Type
Rear Solid Disc Solid Disc
Parking Brake Type Duo-servo Drum Duo-servo Drum
Brake Booster Type

in. Single, 10 Single, 10
and Size
Front MacPherson Strut MacPherson Strut

Suspension Type
Rear Double-wishbone Double-wishbone
Front Standard Standard

Stabilizer Bar
Rear Standard Standard
Steering Gear Type Rack and Pinion Rack and Pinion
Steering Gear Ratio (Overall) 14.5 14.5*2, 14.7*3
Power Steering Type Electric Motor Electric Motor
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005D8E
Title: INTRODUCTION: FEATURES: MODEL CODE AND LINE-UP;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
MODEL CODE AND LINE-UP

1. MODEL CODE
Engine: 2AR-FE
ASA42
Drive Type: 2WD
1 BASIC MODEL CODE
Engine: 2AR-FE
ASA44
Drive Type: AWD
2 STEERING WHEEL POSIOTION L: Left-hand Drive
A: RAV4 (Produced by TMC*1)

3 MODEL NAME
C: RAV4 (Produced by TMMC*2)
4 BODY TYPE N: 5-door Wagon
5 GEAR SHIFT TYPE T: 6-speed Automatic, Floor
X: LE (Base)
6 GRADE M: XLE (Middle)
G: LIMITED (High)
7 ENGINE SPECIFICATION K: DOHC and SFI
A: U.S.A.*3
8 DESTINATION
K: Canada
HINT:
*1: TMC: Toyota Motor Corporation
*2: TMMC: Toyota Motor Manufacturing Canada Inc.
*3: A package model option for Puerto Rico, Mexico and U.S. territories is included.
DESTINATION ENGINE DRIVE TYPE BODY TYPE TRANSAXLE
6-SPEED AUTOMATIC
U760E U760F
ASA42L-ANTXKA -
ASA42L-ANTMKA -
ASA42L-ANTGKA -
2WD
ASA42L-CNTXKA -
ASA42L-CNTMKA -
ASA42L-CNTGKA -
U.S.A.
- ASA44L-ANTXKA
- ASA44L-ANTMKA
- ASA44L-ANTGKA
2AR-FE AWD 5-door Wagon
- ASA44L-CNTXKA
- ASA44L-CNTMKA
- ASA44L-CNTGKA
ASA42L-CNTXKK -
2WD ASA42L-CNTMKK -
ASA42L-CNTGKK -
Canada
- ASA44L-CNTXKK
AWD - ASA44L-CNTMKK
- ASA44L-CNTGKK
2. MODEL LINE-UP
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005D8F
Title: INTRODUCTION: FEATURES: EXTERIOR APPEARANCE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
EXTERIOR APPEARANCE
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005D8G
Title: INTRODUCTION: FEATURES: PERFORMANCE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PERFORMANCE
1. OUTLINE
(a) 2AR-FE Engine
(1) The 2AR-FE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.5-liter, 16-valve DOHC engine. This engine uses the
Dual Variable Valve Timing-intelligent (Dual VVT-i) system, Direct Ignition System (DIS), Acoustic
Control Induction System (ACIS) and Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i). It has
been developed to achieve high performance, quietness, fuel economy and clean emissions.
Engine Type 2AR-FE
No. of Cyls. and Arrangement 4-cylinder, In-line
Valve Mechanism 16-valve DOHC, Chain Drive (with Dual VVT-i)
Item Displacement 2494 cm 3 (152.2 cu. in.)
Max. Output [SAE-NET]* 131 kW @ 6000 rpm (176 HP @ 6000 rpm)
Max. Torque [SAE-NET]* 233 N*m @ 4100 rpm (172 ft.*lbf @ 4100 rpm)
HINT:
*: Maximum output and torque rating are determined by revised SAE J1349 standard.
(b) Automatic Transaxle
(1) U760E and U760F 6-speed automatic transaxles are used.
(c) Suspension
(1) A MacPherson strut type independent suspension is used for the front.
(2) A double-wishbone type independent suspension is used for the rear.
(d) Brake
(1) A ventilated disc brake is provided for the front brake.
(2) A drum-in type solid disc brake is provided for the rear brake.
(3) The following brake control functions are provided: Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic Brake
force Distribution (EBD), brake assist, Auto LSD, Traction Control (TRAC) and Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC).
(e) Steering
(1) A rack and pinion type steering gear assembly is used.
(2) An Electric Power Steering (EPS) system is used.
(3) A manual tilt and telescopic mechanism is used.

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005D8H
Title: INTRODUCTION: FEATURES: EQUIPMENT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
EQUIPMENT
1. OUTLINE
(a) Interior
(1) The interior design aims to offer a new SUV driving pleasure by combining a "sporty cockpit-like driver's
area" with a "spacious and open atmosphere inherent of an SUV", which expresses a bold structure based
on functionality and a refined feel of the interior space.
(2) A clear and refined design realized by the structure that consists of shapes, quality materials and color
schemes with making the best use of a functional layout.
(3) A feeling of a framed area and a spacious, open atmosphere: The driver's area is cockpit-like framed, (*a in
illustration) while the soft padded instrument panel is extended beyond the vehicle centerline to create a
wide feel. (*b in illustration) This gives a sense of unity between the framed driver's area and the
front/rear passengers' area with a spacious, open atmosphere.
(b) Instrument Panel
(1) Realization of a combination of the "strong, stable impression by a bold architecture through axes" (*a in
illustration) and a "refined and soothing impression by soft padding". (*b in illustration)
(2) Decoration panels and molding soft pads are used in each part of the instrument panel, thus achieving an
improved quality.
*1 Center Register *2 Driver Side Silver Panel
*3 Driver Side Register *4 Driver Side Ornament
*5 Meter Cluster *6 Cup Holder Ring
*7 Shift Knob *8 Shift Gate Panel
*9 Console Box Door *10 Center Lower Garnish
*11 Passenger Side Soft Ornament *12 Passenger Side Register
*13 Passenger Side Silver Panel *14 Steering
*a Decorative Parts *b Leather or Artificial Leather Parts
(3) A ring-shaped illumination is provided on the cup holder of the floor console in consideration for usability
during nighttime. Blue is used as the illumination color in the whole cabin, thus contributing to the
creation of a high-class interior space.
Ring-shaped Blue Nighttime
*1 Silver Painting Ring *2
Illumination
(4) An open tray is provided in the upper portion of the ornament for the front passenger seat to offer a lidless
storage space which can be easily used. A soft mat is provided on the bottom surface of the tray.
*1 Passenger Side Open Tray - -
(5) Storage spaces, which were created with usability in mind, are provided in various places of the
instrument panel, thus achieving improved convenience.
*1 Cup Holder *2 Delta Tray
*3 Open Tray *4 Stereo Jack Adapter
*5 Accessory Socket - -
(6) A sliding door is used for the console box, which can move back and forth in accordance with the physical
size of the user.
(7) An open tray on which a cellular phone or an audio player can be placed is provided in the front portion of
the floor console.
(8) An external input terminal and an accessory socket are provided in the lower portion of the instrument
panel.
(9) A deep delta tray, which can accommodate an audio player, etc., stood up on its side, is provided next to
the console tray.
(10) Related functions are collectively positioned around the console tray. It is possible for the user to put an
audio player on the console tray and listen to it while charging.
(11) A cup holder, which can accommodate a large size cup, is provided.
(12) A large size storage which can accommodate 18 CDs is provided in the console box.
(c) Door Trim
(1) Component layout that takes operability into consideration. (*a in illustration) Functional items such as
switches, door handle, grip and storage placed at the front section. (*a in illustration) Soft padding used
widely at the rear section that touches the passenger. (*b in illustration)
*a Front Side (Functional Area) *b Rear Side (Comfort Area)
(2) Decorations and soft pads similar to those of the instrument panel are used.
(3) A bottle holder and an accessory pocket which can accommodate A4 size paper are provided in the lower
portion of the front door trim.
*1 Door Ornament (Decorative Parts) *2 Door Arm Rest (Leather Patrs)

*3 Accessory Pocket or Bottle Holder - -
(d) Center Cluster
(1) A simple switch arrangement which is horizontally laid out is used for the audio.
(2) Plating may be used on the opening area of the CD slot and the switch separator depending on the
specification, thus producing a high-class feel.
(3) Switches and a display are arranged close to each other for the automatic air conditioning, thus taking
into account operability and visibility.
(4) Plated rings are used for the dials of the air conditioning, thus taking improved quality into consideration.
Models with Automatic Air Conditioning
*1 CD Slot *2 Audio Dial

*3 Center Register Knob *4 Separator between Switches
*5 Push Start Switch (Ring) *6 Air Conditioning Dial (Ring)
Models with Manual Air Conditioning
*1 Air Conditioning Dial (Ring) - -
(e) Audio and Visual System
(1) XM satellite radio is provided. XM satellite radio is a subscription type digital broadcast service.
(2) Hybrid Digital (HD) radio is provided.

(f) Bluetooth Audio System
(1) The Bluetooth audio system is provided.
(g) Bluetooth Hands-free System
(1) The Bluetooth hands-free system is provided.
(h) Sliding Roof System
(1) The sliding roof system uses a single glass panel to perform the tilt up-and-down and slide open-and-close
operations.
(i) Smart Key System
(1) The smart key system is provided.
(j) Monitor System
(1) To assist the driver in parking the vehicle by monitoring the area behind it, the rear view monitor system
has a rear television camera assembly mounted on the back door.
(k) Blind Spot Monitor System
(1) The blind spot monitor system is provided.
(l) Mirror System

(1) The mirror heater system is provided.
(m) Intuitive Parking Assist System
(1) The intuitive parking assist system is provided.

(n) Parking Assist Monitor System
(1) The parking assist monitor system is provided.
(o) Cruise Control System

(1) The cruise control system is provided.
(p) Lane Departure Alert System
(1) The lane departure alert system is provided.

(q) Automatic Light Control System
(1) The automatic light control system is provided.
(r) Light Automatic Turn-off System

(1) The light automatic turn-off system is provided.
(s) Daytime Running Light
(1) The daytime running light system is provided.
(t) Automatic High Beam (AHB) System
(1) The AHB system is provided.
(u) Illuminated Entry System
(1) The illuminated entry system is provided.
(v) Power Back Door System

(1) The power back door system is provided.
(w) Power Door Lock System
(1) The power door lock system is provided.

(1) The power door lock system is provided.
(x) Windshield Deicer System
(1) The windshield deicer system uses a heater element in the windshield glass to help reduce the formation
of ice where the front wipers rest.
(y) Window Defogger System

(1) The window defogger system uses a heater wire on the back door glass.
(z) Air Conditioning System
(1) The automatic air conditioning system or manual air conditioning system is provided.
(aa) Power Outlet Socket System
(1) The power outlet socket system is designed for use as a power supply for electrical appliances in the
vehicle.
(2) DC 12 V power outlet socket assemblies are located in the lower portion of the instrument panel.
(ab) Combination Meter Assembly
(1) The analog display type combination meter assembly is used.
(2) The meter features a center speedometer with large scale markings and a red needle for a bold sporty
look, and an outer silver frame is surrounded by a detailed, fine texture appropriate for the meter and
gauge area to create a minute quality appearance.
*1 Meter Ring - -
*a Frame Texture - -
(ac) Supplemental Restraint System
(1) The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) driver and front passenger airbags are used as supplements to
the seat belts to help reduce the shocks to the head and chest of the driver or front passenger in the
event of a frontal collision.
(2) The SRS knee airbags are used as a supplement to the seat belt to help reduce the shock to the knee of
the driver in the event of a frontal collision.
(3) The SRS front seat side airbags are used during a side collision to help reduce the impact to the chests of
the driver and front passenger.
(4) The SRS curtain shield airbags are used in the event of a side or side rear collision to help reduce the
impact to the heads of the front passenger or rear passengers.
(5) The SRS seat cushion airbags (front seat cushion airbag assemly RH) are used as a supplement to the seat
belts to prevent the driver and front passenger from sliding forward in the event of a front impact collision.
(ad) Color
(1) Color List
EXTERIOR COLOR INTERIOR COLOR
COLOR NO. COLOR NAME
040 Super White 2
070 White Pearl Crystal Shine
1F7 Silver Metallic
1G3 Gray Metallic Black

Terra Cotta
202 Black
Gray
3R3 Red Mica Metallic Beige
4T3 Bronze Mica Metallic
6V4 Dark Green Mica
8V5 Graysh Blue Metallic

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYP
Title: DOOR / HATCH: POWER BACK DOOR SYSTEM: POWER BACK DOOR CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
POWER BACK DOOR CONTROL

(a) The main components of the power back door system have the following functions:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Power Back Motor Opens and closes the back door when actuated by the power back door ECU.
Door Unit Detects the operation conditions of the back door and outputs a pulse signal to the power
Assembly Hall IC
back door ECU.
Controls the power back door system in accordance with the signals received
from the switches, sensors and ECUs.
Power Back Door ECU
Receives the signals from the Hall IC to detect the back door position and the
(Multiplex Network
opening and closing speed of the back door.
Door ECU)
Informs the user by sounding the buzzer and flashing the hazard warning light
when each operation switch is pressed.
Back
Door
Latches and unlatches the back door when actuated by the power back door ECU.
Lock
Motor
Half-
Back Door latch Detects if the back door is ajar.
Lock Switch
Assembly
Detects the initial (neutral) position of the driven gear of the back door lock motor. This
Position
switch turns on when the driven gear is in the neutral position and turns off when the
Switch
driven gear is in any position other than neutral.
Courtesy Detects whether the back door is open or closed. This switch turns on when the back door
Switch is open or ajar and turns off when the back door is closed.
Back Door Control The back door opens or closes when the back door control switch in the vehicle is turned
Switch on.
Door Control Switch The power back door closes when the door control switch assembly (on the back door
Assembly jamb) is turned on (pressed).
Back Door Opener The back door opens when the back door opener switch assembly on the outside of the
Switch Assembly vehicle is turned on (operated).
PWR DOOR OFF

Switch (Power Back Setting this switch prohibits system operation.
Door Main Switch)
Touch Sensor (Power

Detects if an object is jammed in the back door during the closing operation of the back
Back Door Sensor door.
Back Door Sensor door.
Assembly)
Back Door Buzzer and

When the power back door system starts to operate, the back door buzzer and wireless
Wireless Door Lock
door lock buzzer sound to inform the user that the system is operating.
Buzzer
Combination Meter
Receives a hazard warning light blinking signal to blink the hazard warning light.
Assembly
Receives the power back door button signal and transmits it to the certification ECU*1 or
Door Control Receiver
main body ECU*2.
Main Body ECU

Transmits a back door lock/unlock control signal, vehicle speed signal and shift position P
(Multiplex Network
signal to the power back door ECU via the Controller Area Network (CAN).
Body ECU)
Electrical Key
Transmitter Sub- Transmits the power back door button signal to the door control receiver.
assembly

*2: Models without smart key system
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The power back door system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Upon receiving an on signal from the back door control switch or the power back door button with the
Opener
back door unlocked, the power back door ECU actuates the back door lock motor and the power back
Function
door unit assembly in order to release the latch of the back door and open the back door.
Upon receiving an on signal from the back door control switch, the door control switch assembly with
Closer the back door open or the power back door button, the power back door ECU actuates the power back
Function door unit assembly and the back door lock motor in order to close the back door and engage the latch
of the back door lock.
Upon receiving the signals from a touch sensor or the Hall ICs of the power back door unit assembly,
Jam
the power back door ECU detects that an object is jammed in the back door, and the door operation
Protection
is stopped after moving back a certain distance upward during the closing operation and suspended
Function
during the opening operation. The back door buzzer sounds twice when a jammed object is detected.
Back Door
Open/Close
In accordance with the signals received from the Hall ICs, the power back door ECU performs control
Speed
so as to make the opening and closing speed of the back door even.
Control
Function
By conducting any of the following operations during the opening or closing operation of the power
back door, the operation will be canceled:
Suspending The power door off switch is turned off.

Control The power back door button on the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is pressed.
Function The back door control switch is pressed.
The back door opener switch assembly is pressed.
The door control switch is pressed.

By pressing the back door close switch for 2.8 seconds while holding the back door at the
desired back door opening angle by the hand, the back door buzzer sounds 4 times as an
Memory answer back and the power back door ECU memorizes the angle. From the next time the
Function back door is opened, the back door will stop at the set angle.
By pressing the back door close switch for 7 seconds after the set angle is memorized, the
memorized position is initialized.
Assist When the back door is stopped and then manually operated in the closing direction, the power back
Function door ECU drives the power back door unit assembly to operate the back door until it is fully closed.
When each operation switch is operated, the following operations are performed in accordance with
the back door condition:
When the power back door button on the back door control switch or the electrical key
Switch transmitter sub-assembly is pressed, opening operation is performed when the back door is
Operation closed and the closing operation is performed when the back door is open.
Function When the back door opener switch assembly is pressed, the opening operation of the back
door is performed.
When the door control switch assembly is pressed, the closing operation of the back door is
performed.
HINT:
If power supply is stopped such as when the battery terminals are removed, initialization is required. The back
door should be fully closed with power being supplied for initialization.
(b) Opener Function 1
(1) When the back door control switch or the power back door button of the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly is operated, the opener function operates as follows:
After the back door control switch or the power back door button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly
1 is pressed for approx. 0.8 seconds, the back door buzzer sounds for 0.8 seconds and the hazard warning light
blinks twice.
2 The back door lock assembly releases the latch.
The back door courtesy switch is turned on and the motor in the power back door unit assembly starts to
3
operate.
4 The back door lock motor is returned to the initial position and the half-latch switch is turned on.
After the power back door ECU detects a back door stop position pulse, the motor in the power back door unit
5
assembly is stopped.
(c) Opener Function 2
(1) When the back door opener switch assembly is operated, the opener function operates as follows:
When the back door opener switch assembly is pressed, the back door buzzer sounds for 0.8 seconds and the
1
hazard warning light blinks twice.
2 After the back door buzzer sounds, the back door lock assembly releases the latch.
2 After the back door buzzer sounds, the back door lock assembly releases the latch.
When the back door opener switch assembly is not input again before the latch begins to be released, the
3
motor in the power back door unit assembly starts to operate when the back door courtesy switch is turned on.
4 The back door lock motor is returned to the initial position and the half-latch switch is turned on.
After the power back door ECU detects a back door stop position pulse, the motor in the power back door unit
5
assembly is stopped.
(d) Closer Function 1
(1) When the back door control switch or the power back door button of the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly is operated, the closer function operates as follows:
After the back door control switch or the power back door button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly
1 is pressed for approx. 0.8 seconds, the back door buzzer sounds for 0.8 seconds and the hazard warning light
blinks twice.
blinks twice.
2 The motor in the power back door unit assembly begins to operate.
3 When the half-latch switch is turned off, the voltage of the motor is reduced.
The back door lock motor performs the closing operation 1.0 second after the half-latch switch is turned off, and
4
stops the operation when the back door courtesy switch is turned off.
(e) Closer Function 2
(1) When the door control switch assembly is operated, the closer function operates as follows:
When the door control switch assembly is turned on, the back door buzzer sounds for 0.8 seconds and the
1
hazard warning light blinks twice.
2 The motor in the power back door unit assembly starts to operate.
3 When the half-latch switch is turned off, the voltage of the motor is reduced.
4
4
stops the operation when the back door courtesy switch is turned off.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYQ
Title: DOOR / HATCH: POWER BACK DOOR SYSTEM: TOUCH SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TOUCH SENSOR
1. COUNSTRUCTION
(a) The touch sensor consists of conductive rubber and a core wire. When the conductive rubber is compressed,
its resistance value goes down and electric current flows through the core wire. This signal is input to the
power back door ECU, which determines the back door condition.
*1 Touch Sensor LH (Power Back Door *2 Touch Sensor RH (Power Back Door
Sensor Assembly LH) Sensor Assembly RH)

Sensor Assembly LH) Sensor Assembly RH)
*3 Core Wire - -
*a Normal Condition *b Compressed Condition
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYR
Title: DOOR / HATCH: POWER BACK DOOR SYSTEM: POWER BACK DOOR DRIVE UNIT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
POWER BACK DOOR DRIVE UNIT

1. COUNSTRUCTION
(a) The power back door unit assembly consists of a motor and a reduction gear, and opens and closes the back
door by converting the rotational motion of the motor into linear motion through the screw mechanism.
*1 Motor *2 Spring
*3 Reduction Gear - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYS
Title: DOOR / HATCH: POWER BACK DOOR SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The power back door system enables the back door to be opened and closed automatically by a motor in
accordance with signals from the back door control switch or the power back door button on an electrical
key transmitter sub-assembly. In addition, a door control switch assembly has been provided on the back
door for convenience.
(b) A spindle type power back door is used to achieve improved rearward visibility. Also, the user can set the
opening angle of the back door in the preferences. For example, if the garage has a low ceiling, the
opening angle of the back door can be set not to hit the ceiling.
(c) This system is controlled by the power back door ECU.
2. PRECAUTION
EXPRESSION IGNITION SWITCH ENGINE SWITCH

(POSITION) (CONDITION)

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYT
Title: DOOR / HATCH: POWER BACK DOOR SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYU
Title: DOOR / HATCH: POWER BACK DOOR SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Wireless Door Lock Buzzer *2 Power Back Door Unit Assembly LH
Touch Sensor LH (Power Back Door
*3 *4 Door Control Switch Assembly
Sensor Assembly LH)
Power Back Door ECU (Multiplex

*5 Back Door Lock Assembly *6
Network Door ECU)
*7 Back Door Buzzer *8 Touch Sensor RH (Power Back Door
Sensor Assembly RH)
*9 Power Back Door Unit Assembly RH *10 Door Control Receiver
*11 Back Door Opener Switch Assembly *12 Power Back Door Button
Electrical Key Transmitter Sub-

*13 - -
assembly
*A Models with Smart Key System - -

Body ECU)
PWR DOOR OFF Switch (Power Back

*3 Back Door Control Switch *4
Door Main Switch)
Certification ECU (Smart Key ECU
*5 - -
Assembly)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYV
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DOOR LOCK CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
DOOR LOCK CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The power door lock control system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Manual Lock
This function can lock or unlock all doors by operation of the door control switch.
and Unlock
Key-linked
This function, which is linked with the key cylinder, can lock or unlock all the doors when a
Lock and
lock or unlock operation is effected.
Unlock
Manual When the door lock operation is conducted by the entry function*1 or wireless door lock
Unlock control function, this function prevents the doors from being unlocked by unlock operation via
Prohibition the door control switch.
When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is inserted in the interior
Key actuation area and the door lock operation is performed while the driver door is
Confinement open, all the doors will be unlocked.*1
Prevention When the key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder and the door lock operation is
performed while the driver door is open, all the doors will be unlocked.*2
When the mechanical key is inserted into the door key cylinder and is turned once, the driver
door is unlocked. Then, the mechanical key is turned again, the rest of the doors are
2-step Unlock unlocked. In addition, when the unlock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly*1 or door control transmitter sub-assembly*2 is pressed once, the driver door is
unlocked. Then, the button is pressed again, the rest of the doors are unlocked.
When the conditions listed below are met, this function causes all the doors to be
Speed automatically locked:
Sensitive
The vehicle speed is above approx. 20 km/h (13 mph).
Automatic
All the doors are closed.
Door Lock*1
Any door is unlocked.
When the conditions listed below are met, this function causes all the doors to be
automatically locked:
Shift-linked
The ignition switch is changed from ACC or off to ON.
Automatic
All the doors are closed.
Door Lock
The shift lever is moved out of the P position.
Any of the doors are in an unlocked state.
Shift-linked
When the ignition switch is ON and the shift lever is moved to P position from a position other
Automatic
than P, all of the doors will be automatically unlocked.
Door Unlock
Driver Door
Opening- When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly*1 or door control transmitter sub-
linked assembly*2 is inserted in the interior actuation area and the door lock operation is performed
Automatic while the driver door is open, all the doors will be unlocked.
Door Unlock
The on or off setting of some functions and settings can be performed using the Techstream.
Customization In addition, some functions are not available depending on specification. For details, refer to
the Repair Manual.

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYW
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) This system is controlled by the main body ECU.
(b) The main body ECU outputs signals to the respective door lock motors.
2. PRECAUTION


Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYY
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*A Models with Power Back Door System - -
Power Window Regulator Master

Switch Assembly
*1 ECM *2
Door Control Switch
Front Door with Motor Lock Assembly Front Door Courtesy Light Switch
*3 *4
LH Assembly LH
Rear Door with Motor Lock Assembly Rear Door Courtesy Light Switch
*5 *6
LH Assembly LH
*7 Front Door Courtesy Light Switch *8 Back Door Lock Assembly

Assembly RH
Power Back Door ECU (Multiplex Rear Door Courtesy Light Switch
*9 *10
Network Door ECU) Assembly RH
Rear Door with Motor Lock Assembly Front Door with Motor Lock Assembly
*11 *12
RH RH
Front Passenger Side Power Window

Regulator Switch Assembly
*13 - -
Door Control Switch
*A Models without Smart Key System - -

Body ECU)
*3 Key Unlock Warning Switch - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FYZ
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The wireless door lock control system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Pressing the lock button of the door control transmitter sub-assembly locks all doors and the
All Doors Lock
back door.
All Doors Pressing the unlock button of the door control transmitter sub-assembly unlocks all doors and
Unlock the back door.
All Doors
Pressing the unlock button on the door control transmitter sub-assembly once unlocks the
Unlock (2-
driver door, and pressing it again within 5 seconds unlocks all the doors.
step Unlock)
Power Back
Pressing the power back door button for approx. 1 second opens and closes the power back
Door Open or
door.
Close*
Automatic If none of the doors are opened for 60 seconds after being unlocked by the wireless door lock
Lock control, all the doors are locked again automatically.
When the doors are being locked or unlocked using the door control transmitter
sub-assembly, the wireless door lock buzzer sounds and the hazard warning lights
blink once while locking and twice while unlocking.
Answer Back
When the power back door is opened and closed by using the door control
transmitter sub-assembly, the hazard warning lights blink twice as an answer
back.
Door Ajar If any door is open or ajar, pressing the lock button of the door control transmitter sub-
Warning assembly will cause the wireless door lock buzzer to sound for about 5 seconds.
Keeping the panic button on the door control transmitter sub-assembly pressed for longer
than 1 seconds causes the following alarm functions to be activated.
Panic Alarm Sounds the vehicle horn.

Flashes the hazard lights, headlights, and taillights.
Illuminates the interior lights (if the interior light switch is in the DOOR position).
The on or off setting of some functions and settings can be performed using the Techstream.
Customization In addition, some functions are not available depending on specification. For details, refer to
the Repair Manual.
*: Models with power back door system

2. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If there is a malfunction in the system, the main body ECU stores the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
in its memory. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005FZ0
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The door control transmitter sub-assembly for the wireless door lock control has a lock button, an unlock
button, a panic button and a power back door button*.

*1 Lock Button *2 Unlock Button
*3 Panic Button *4 Power Back Door Button

Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The wireless door lock control system is a convenient system for locking and unlocking all the doors from
a distance.
(b) In this system, the door control receiver performs the code identification process and the main body ECU
performs door lock control.
(c) A key-integrated type door control transmitter sub-assembly is used, and it contains up to a maximum of
4 buttons: lock button, unlock button, panic button and power back door button*.
(d) When preparing a new door control transmitter sub-assembly to replace one that has been lost, it is
necessary to register the recognition code. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
(e) The content applies to models without the smart key system. For models with the smart key system,
see Wireless Door Lock Control Function in Smart Key System.
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Door Control Transmitter Sub- *2 Wireless Door Lock Buzzer

assembly
*3 *4
LH Assembly LH
*5 *6
LH Assembly LH
Front Door Courtesy Light Switch

*7 *8 Back Door Lock Assembly
Assembly RH
Power Back Door ECU (Multiplex Rear Door Courtesy Light Switch
*9 *10
Network Door ECU) Assembly RH
Rear Door with Motor Lock Assembly

*11 Door Control Receiver *12
RH
Front Door with Motor Lock Assembly

*13 *14 No. 1 Room Light Assembly
RH
*15 Map Light Assembly *16 Vehicle Horn (Horn Assemblies)

Body ECU)
Transponder Key Coil
*3 Key Unlock Warning Switch *4 Ignition Key Ring

*3 Key Unlock Warning Switch *4 Ignition Key Ring
Illumination
Title: MIRROR (EXT): MIRROR SYSTEM: MIRROR CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
MIRROR CONTROL
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Inputs a mirror heater operation signal to the air conditioning amplifier
assembly.*1
Rear Defogger Switch
Inputs a mirror heater operation signal to the timer circuit built into the
No. 2 heater control sub-assembly.*2
Air Conditioning Amplifier Operates and controls the mirror heater system in accordance with the signals
Assembly*1 from the rear window defogger switch.
No. 2 Heater Control Operates and controls the mirror heater system in accordance with the signals
Sub-assembly*2 from the rear window defogger switch.
*1: Models with automatic air conditioning system

*2: Models with manual air conditioning system
2. SYSTEM COTNROL
(1) Mirror Heater Function
The timer heaters are activated when the ignition switch is turned to ON and the rear
window defogger switch is pushed. The timer circuit*1 built into the air conditioning
amplifier assembly*2 or No. 2 heater control sub-assembly keeps the mirror heaters and
defogger heater on for approximately 15 minutes.
3. FUNCTION
(a) The outer rear view mirror assemblies have the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Remote Control The adjustment axis of the mirror surface of the electric remote mirrors can be
Electric Function controlled by using the outer mirror switch assembly.
Remote Manual
Mirror The outer mirror switch assembly can be used to retract the outer rear view
Retractable
mirror assemblies.
Function*1
The mirror heaters use a heater element in both outer rear view
mirrors to help defog them.
Mirror Heater Function*2 The mirror heaters are controlled by the timer circuit built into the air
conditioning amplifier assembly*3 or No. 2 heater control
subassembly*4.
*1: Models with manual retractable function

*2: Models with mirror heater function
Title: MIRROR (EXT): MIRROR SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Outer Rear View Mirror Assembly
(1) An electrical remote control type outer rear view mirror assembly is used.
(b) Mirror Heater System
(1) The mirror heaters use a heater element in both outer rear view mirror assemblies to help defog
them.
2. PRECAUTION


Title: MIRROR (EXT): MIRROR SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: MIRROR (EXT): MIRROR SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
Models with Automatic Air Conditioning Models with Manual Air Conditioning
*A *B
System System
*1 Outer Mirror Switch Assembly *2 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly

*3 Outer Rear View Mirror Assembly LH *4 Outer Rear View Mirror Assembly RH
*5 Rear Window Defogger Switch - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0A
Title: NETWORKING: MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The multiplex communication system uses the following 2 communication protocols:
(1) The Controller Area Network (CAN) is used for communication between the engine, chassis and body
electrical system.
(2) The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) is used for communication within the body electrical system.
(b) The CAN has 2 types, with different communication speeds: the HS-CAN (high speed) and the MS-CAN
(medium speed).
(c) The main body ECU is used as a gateway to transmit data between the buses.
2. MAIN FEATURES
(a) Multiplex communication uses serial communication data that consists of bits and frames in order to
exchange information between the various ECUs. This allows a reduction of the amount of wiring used in the
vehicle.
(1) A bit is the basic unit of communication used to represent the information. A bit is represented by binary
values of "0" or "1".
(2) A frame is a body of data transmitted together. A frame contains a header that indicates the beginning,
and an end message that indicates the end.
(b) Differences between CAN and LIN
(1) The protocols, which are the rules for establishing data communication, differ between CAN and LIN. If the
ECUs in the networks use different data frameworks such as communication speed, communication wire
or signals, they will be unable to understand each other. Therefore, protocols (rules) must be established
among them.
(2) Compared to LIN, CAN features high-speed data transmission. Therefore, CAN is able to transmit larger
amounts of data faster than other protocols. This feature makes it possible to transmit data accurately for
the powertrain and chassis control systems. These systems require large amounts of data to be
transmitted in short periods of time.
PROTOCOL CAN LIN
HS-CAN MS-CAN
Communication Speed 500 kbps* 250 kbps* 9.6 kbps* (Max. 20 kbps*)
Communication Wire Twisted-pair Wire AV Single Wire
Drive Type Differential Voltage Drive Single Wire Voltage Drive
Data Length 1-8 Bytes (Variable) 2, 4, 8 Bytes (Variable)
HINT:
*: bps is an abbreviation of "Bits Per Second", indicating the number of bits that can be transmitted per
second.
(c) Communication Wire
(1) A twisted pair of wires is used for CAN communication. A single Automobile Vinyl (AV) wire is used for LIN
communication.
COMMUNICATION WIRE OUTLINE
This communication wire is a pair of twisted wires. Communication

Twisted-
is driven by applying different voltages to the 2 lines in order to
pair
send a single signal. This system, which is called a "Differential
Wire
Voltage Drive", reduces noise.
This is a lightweight single communication wire that consists of a

AV
single core line surrounded by insulation. Voltage is applied to this
Single
line in order to drive communication, and this system is called a
Wire
"Single Wire Voltage Drive".
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0B
Title: NETWORKING: MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0C
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) is used for communication within the body electrical system.
(b) The LIN is used in the following systems:
(1) Automatic air conditioning system
(2) Charging system
(3) Steering lock system
(4) Smart key system
(5) Sliding roof system
(6) Door lock control system
(7) Power window control system
(c) See the respective system for details.

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0D
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0E
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION

*A Models with Smart Key System *B
System

*1 *2 Air Conditioning Control Assembly
Assembly)
*3 Steering Lock ECU *4
Body ECU)
*A Models with Sliding Roof System *B 2WD Models with 2AR-FE Engine
*1 Sliding Roof Control ECU *2 Generator Assembly

Driver Side Power Window Regulator
*3 Generator Control ECU Assembly *4
Motor Assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0F
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial data communication network for real time application. It is
a multiplex communication network to be equipped in a vehicle, and has communication speeds of 500
kbps (HS-CAN) and 250 kbps (MS-CAN), and the ability to detect malfunctions.
(b) The HS-CAN consists of a V bus, sensor bus and local bus.
(c) The MS-CAN consists of a sub bus 1.
(d) The communication wire used is a twisted-pair wire. The bus line has a high line (2.5 V to 3.5 V of
voltage is applied) and a low line (1.5 V to 2.5 V of voltage is applied).
(e) The main body ECU has a gateway function. The ECU connects the respective buses in order to establish
communication between each bus.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0G
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0H
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*A Models with Smart Key System *B AWD Models
Models with Radio and Display Receiver

*C Models with Memory Function *D
Assembly
Models with HDD Navigation Receiver
*E - -
Assembly

*1 *2 4WD ECU Assembly
Assembly)
*3 Power Steering ECU Assembly *4 Combination Meter Assembly

*5 *6 DLC3
Body ECU)
*7 Steering Sensor *8 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly
*9 *10 Radio and Display Receiver Assembly
Assembly
*11 Navigation Receiver Assembly *12 Center Airbag Sensor Assembly
Models with Lane Departure Alert

*A *B 2WD Models with 2AR-FE Engine
System
*C Models with Blind Spot Monitor System *D Models with Power Back Door System
*1 Lane Departure Warning Camera *2 Generator Control ECU Assembly
*3 ECM *4 Skid Control ECU

Power Back Door ECU (Multiplex
*5 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor LH *6
Network Door ECU)
*7 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor RH - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0I
Title: SLIDING ROOF / CONVERTIBLE: SLIDING ROOF SYSTEM: SLIDING ROOF CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
SLIDING ROOF CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The sliding roof system have the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Manual Open- Opens or closes the sliding roof while the open switch or close switch is pressed for 0.3 seconds or
and-close less. The sliding roof stops as soon as the switch is released.
Opens the sliding roof up to the fully opened position when the open switch is pressed
One-touch for 0.3 seconds or more.
Auto Open Stops opening the roof at the comfort stop position to suppress wind noise. By pressing
the open switch once again, the sliding roof can be fully opened.
One-touch
Fully closes the sliding roof when the close switch is pressed for 0.3 seconds or more.
Auto Close
Manual Tilt Up- Tilts up or down the sliding roof while the up switch or down switch is pressed for 0.3 seconds or
and-down less. The sliding roof stops as soon as the switch is released.
One-touch
Fully tilts up or down the sliding roof when the up switch or down switch is pressed for 0.3
Auto Tilt Up-
seconds or more.
and-down
The jam protection function automatically stops the sliding roof and moves it open halfway (or to
Jam Protection the fully tilted up position) if a foreign object gets jammed in the sliding roof during close or tilt
down operation.
Key Off The key off operation function makes it possible to operate the sliding roof for approximately 43
Operation seconds after the ignition switch is turned ACC or off, if the front doors are not opened.
Sliding Roof When the ignition switch is turned from ON to off and the driver door is opened with the sliding
Open Warning roof open, the buzzer in the combination meter assembly sounds once.
HINT:
The sliding roof control ECU memorizes the initial position of the sliding roof. This memory is not cleared if the
battery terminals are disconnected. However, initialization is necessary after the sliding roof drive gear sub-
assembly is replaced. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
(b) Jam Protection Function
(1) To control the jam protection function, the sliding roof control ECU monitors the amount of movement
and judges jamming of the sliding roof based on the pulse signals from Hall IC1 and the movement
direction of the sliding roof from the phase difference between the pulses from Hall IC1 and Hall IC2.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0J
Title: SLIDING ROOF / CONVERTIBLE: SLIDING ROOF SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The sliding roof system uses a single glass panel to perform the tilt up-and-down and slide open-and-
close operations.
(b) The sliding roof control ECU controls the sliding roof system. This ECU uses 2 Hall ICs to detect the
position of the sliding roof. The sliding roof control ECU and the 2 Hall ICs are integrated in the sliding
roof drive gear sub-assembly.
2. PRECAUTION
(a) The sliding roof control ECU memorizes the initial position of the sliding roof. This memory is not cleared
if the battery terminals are disconnected. However, initialization is necessary after the sliding roof drive
gear sub-assembly has been replaced.


Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0K
Title: SLIDING ROOF / CONVERTIBLE: SLIDING ROOF SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0L
Title: SLIDING ROOF / CONVERTIBLE: SLIDING ROOF SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Tilt Up/Down Switch *2 Open/Close Switch
*3 Sliding Roof Drive Gear Sub-assembly *4 Map Light Assembly

*5 Front Door Courtesy Light Switch LH - -
Combination Meter Assembly Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network
*1 *2
- Buzzer Body ECU)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0M
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: SMART KEY CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
SMART KEY CONTROL

(a) The main components of the smart key system have the following functions:
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Engine Switch (Push

Transmits the engine switch signal to the certification ECU.
Start Switch)
Receives the ID code and transmits it to the certification ECU when the
Transponder electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is too weak to respond to the
Key tuner based on the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 indoor electrical key antenna
Amplifier assemblies.
The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly consists of a mechanical key, a

transmitter for the wireless door lock control, a transceiver for the smart key
system and a transponder chip for the immobiliser control.
The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly consists of a mechanical key, a
transceiver for the smart key system and a transponder chip for the
immobiliser control.
Receives signals from the antennas and returns the ID code to the door control
receiver.
When receiving the request signals that are output by the indoor electrical key
Electrical Key antenna assemblies, door electrical key antennas and outside electrical key
Transmitter Sub- antenna, the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly outputs information such
assembly as the key ID and vehicle ID.
When the driver pushes the lock button, unlock button, power back door
button* on the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly, the electrical key
transmitter sub-assembly outputs a request signal.
When receiving the radio wave that is output by the transponder key amplifier
in the engine switch, the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly outputs
information such as the key ID and vehicle ID.
The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly integrates with the mechanical key
in order to unlock the doors when the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly
battery is low.
Turns the power source off, on (ACC), on (IG) or on (Start) in accordance with
the shift lever position and the state of the stop light switch assembly.
Controls the start function in accordance with the signals received from the
switches and each ECU.
Certifies the ID code received from the door control receiver and transmits the
Certification ECU certification results to the steering lock ECU.
(Smart Key ECU Judges and certifies the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
Assembly) Controls the indoor electrical key antenna assemblies, door electrical key
antennas and outside electrical key antenna.
antennas and outside electrical key antenna.
Transmits door lock/unlock request signals during the entry function.
Transmits the steering lock/unlock request signals to the steering lock ECU.
Transmits the immobiliser set/unset request signals to the ECM.
Records the ID codes between the certification ECU and steering lock ECU.
Stop Light Switch

Outputs the state of the brake pedal to the certification ECU.
Assembly
Receives the engine start request signal from the certification ECU, turns on
the starter relay assembly, and starts the engine.
ECM
Receives the signal from the certification ECU and performs engine ignition and
injection.
Main Body ECU Receives the request signal from the certification ECU and actuates the door
(Multiplex Network lock motors to unlock or lock all the doors.
Body ECU) Transmits the condition of each door to the certification ECU.
Unlock
Transmits the door unlock request signal to the certification ECU.
Sensor
Lock
Outside Transmits the door lock request signal to the certification ECU.
Sensor
Door Handle
Assembly Door
Electrical Receives the request signal from the certification ECU and forms an actuation area
Key around the front doors.
Antenna
Indoor Electrical Key Receives the request signal from the certification ECU and forms an actuation area inside
Antenna Assembly the interior of the vehicle.
Outside Electrical Key Receives the request signal from the certification ECU and forms an actuation area
Antenna around the back door.
Receives the ID code from the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly in the actuation
Door Control Receiver
area and transmits it to the certification ECU.
Buzzer
When the certification ECU detects human errors, it warns the driver by
sounding the wireless door lock buzzer, blinking the smart watning indicator,
Combination
Smart and sounding the buzzer in the combination meter assembly in accordance
Meter
Warning with the request signal from the ECU.
Assembly
Indicator Illuminates or flashes, using different colors to inform the driver of the power
source mode or of a system malfunction.
(a) The special functions of the smart key system only work when the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
in the actuation area formed by the 6 antennas.
(b) The No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 indoor electrical key antenna assemblies form the actuation area of the start
function.
(c) The door electrical key antennas and the outside electrical key antenna form the actuation area of the entry
function.
function.
No. 1 Indoor Electrical Key Antenna

*1 *2 Door Electrical Key Antenna LH
Assembly
*3 *4 Outside Electrical Key Antenna
Assembly
*5 *6 Door Electrical Key Antenna RH
Assembly
Approx. 0.7 m to 1.0 m (2.3 ft. to 3.3
*a *b Interior Actuation Area
ft.)
*c Exterior Actuation Area - -
ACTUATION DETAILS
AREA
The interior actuation area of the indoor electrical key antennas is formed when the driver door is
Interior closed, while the brake pedal is depressed, when the engine switch is pressed, when a warning is
activated, or when the lock sensor or lock switch is on.
The exterior actuation area formed by the door electrical key antennas and the outside electrical key
Exterior antenna is approx. 0.7 m to 1.0 m (2.3 ft. to 3.3 ft.) from the outside door handle assembly of the
front doors, or the outside electrical key antenna.
The exterior actuation area of the door electrical key antennas is formed by transmitting a request
Around signal every 0.25 seconds while the engine switch is off and each door is locked. In this way, the
Front Door proximity of a key can be detected. When locking the door using the lock sensor on the outside door
handle assembly, the actuation area is formed when the lock sensor is touched.
Around The exterior actuation area of the outside electrical key antenna is formed when the lock switch or
Back Door back door opener switch is on.
3. FUNCTION
(a) Start Function
(1) The start function has different power source modes to suit the brake pedal condition and shift lever
position.
(2) When the driver carrying an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly enters the vehicle while the power
source mode is off and presses the engine switch without depressing the brake pedal, the power source
mode turns on (ACC) to show smart warning indicator will blink green. With each pressing of the engine
switch, the power source mode switches as follows: off → on (ACC) → on (IG) → off.
(3) When the driver who is carrying an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly enters the vehicle while the
power source mode is off, and depresses the brake pedal while the shift lever is in P or N, the smart
warning indicator illuminates green. Pressing the engine switch with the smart warning indicator
illuminated will cause the engine to start.
(4) When starting the engine with the vehicle stopped, pressing the engine switch while the shift lever is in P
will cause the power source mode to turn off. Pressing the engine switch when the shift lever is in any
position other than P will cause the mode to turn on (ACC).
(5) Transition of the power source mode when the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low or
the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is not operating normally due to an electromagnetic
interference is as follows:
1. The driver uses the mechanical key to unlock the door and enters the vehicle while carrying the
electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
2. The driver places the TOYOTA mark of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly in contact
with the front of the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.
3. Within approximately 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, the driver releases the brake pedal
and presses the engine switch.
4. With each pressing of the engine switch, the power source mode changes as follows: off → on
(ACC) → on (IG) → off.
(6) When starting the engine while the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low or the electrical
key transmitter sub-assembly is not operating normally due to an electromagnetic interference:
1. The driver uses the mechanical key to unlock the door and enters the vehicle while carrying the
electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
with the front of the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal while the shift lever is in P
or N.
3. Within approximately 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds and the smart warning indicator
illuminates green, the driver presses the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.
4. Pressing the engine switch starts the engine.
HINT:
Normally, the operation of the engine switch is disabled while the vehicle is being driven. However, if the
engine must be stopped in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion, the driver can press the engine
switch either 3 times in rapid succession or for approximately 2 seconds or more to stop the engine.
If no signals are transmitted to the power management control ECU due to a malfunction in the stop light
switch assembly or park/neutral position switch assembly, the engine will not start even if the driver presses
the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal. In this case, the driver can start the engine by the
following operations. Press the engine switch to turn the power source mode from off to on (ACC), and press
the engine switch again and hold it for 15 seconds or more.
The above 2 operations must be applied only in emergency situations. Under normal conditions, the engine
must not be stopped by pressing the engine switch during driving or started without depressing the brake
pedal when the shift lever is in any position other than P or N.
(b) Entry Function

(1) The entry function consists of the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
This function is a convenient system for locking and unlocking all the doors at a distance. The
Wireless
operation of this function in the smart key system is the same as that of the wireless door lock
Door Lock
control system. However, the receiver in the certification ECU uses a door control receiver to perform
Control
the control.
Entry When an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly enters the exterior actuation area of the door
Illumination electrical key antenna, each interior light and engine switch illumination light will illuminate.
Entry Allows switching between 2 modes that can be operated with the entry unlock function.
Unlock
All Door Mode
Mode
Driver Door Mode
Switching
Unlocks the doors by the outside door handle assembly being held and the unlock sensor being
touched while the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in the exterior actuation area of the
Entry door electrical key antenna.
Unlock
The driver outside door handle assembly unlocks the driver door.
The front passenger outside door handle assembly unlock all doors.
All doors are locked by touching the lock sensor of the driver or front passenger outside door handle
Entry Lock
assembly or by pressing the lock switch of the back door.
Entry Back
The back door is unlocked by pressing the back door opener switch of the back door.
Door Unlock
Key Confine Prevents the confinement of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly if the door is locked from
Prevention the outside door handle assembly or lock switch while the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
still inside the vehicle.
The following key functions can be canceled by following certain procedures:
Entry unlock/lock
Key Cancel Back door open
Key Cancel Back door open
Prevention of key confinement
Warning
To prevent the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery and the vehicle battery from
Battery becoming discharged, the battery saving function activates when the vehicle remains unused for a
Saving long period of time or the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly has been detected in the exterior
actuation area for more than 10 minutes.
The smart key system causes the certification ECU to sound the buzzer in the combination meter
Warning
assembly and uses the smart warning indicator in order to alert the driver.
Key Code A total of 7 keys can be registered. Key registration enables the registering (writing and storing) of
Registration transmitter recognition codes in the EEPROM that is contained in the certification ECU.
(c) Wireless Door Lock Control Function
(1) The wireless door lock control function has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
All Doors Lock Pressing the lock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly locks all doors.
All Doors
Pressing the unlock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly once unlocks the driver
Unlock (2-
door, and pressing it again within 5 seconds unlocks all the doors.
step Unlock)
All Doors
Pressing the unlock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly unlocks all doors.
Unlock
Power Back
Pressing the power back door button for approximately 1 second opens and closes the power back
Door Open or
door.
Close*
When the doors are being locked or unlocked through the operation of the electrical key
transmitter sub-assembly, the wireless door lock buzzer sounds and the hazard lights blink once
Answer Back
during locking and twice during unlocking. Also, the answer back function operates when the doors
are locked by the auto relock function.
Automatic If none of the doors are opened within 60 seconds after they have been unlocked by the wireless
Relock door lock control, all the doors will be locked again automatically.
Door Ajar If any door is open or ajar, pressing the lock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly
Warning will cause the wireless door lock buzzer to sound for about 5 seconds.
The on or off setting of some functions and settings can be performed using the Techstream or
Customization multi-display. In addition, some functions are not available depending on the specification. For
details, refer to the Repair Manual.
(d) Entry Unlock Mode Switching
(1) The entry unlock mode can be switched between the following 2 modes in accordance with the driver's
intention:
All Door Mode

Driver Door Mode (Default)
(2) In all door mode, all doors are unlocked by touching the driver or front passenger touch sensor. In driver
(2) In all door mode, all doors are unlocked by touching the driver or front passenger touch sensor. In driver
door mode, only the driver door is unlocked by touching the driver side touch sensor, and all doors are
unlocked by touching the front passenger side touch sensor.
(3) The switching of the entry unlock mode is performed when the power source mode is off and the key
indicator light is not illuminated. Within a distance range of 1 m from the vehicle, press and hold both the
lock and unlock buttons of the key for approximately 5 seconds.
(4) During the switching of the entry unlock mode, the wireless door lock buzzer or the buzzer combination
meter assembly will sound to inform the driver of the state of the entry unlock mode.
(e) Entry Unlock Function
(1) When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in the actuation area surrounding the driver seat,
gripping the driver side outside door handle assembly will unlock the driver door only, and gripping the
passenger side outside door handle assembly will unlock all doors.*1
(2) When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in any of the exterior actuation areas, all doors are
unlocked by grabbing the driver or front passenger outside door handle assembly.*2
(3) After all doors have been unlocked, the wireless door lock buzzer sounds twice as an answer back and the
hazard lights flash twice at the same time.
HINT:
*1: Driver door mode
*2: All door mode

*1 Unlock Sensor - -
(f) Entry Lock Function

(1) When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in any of the exterior actuation areas, all doors are
locked by touching the lock sensor of the driver or front passenger outside door handle assembly or by
pressing the lock switch of the back door.
(2) After all doors have been locked, the wireless door lock buzzer sounds once as an answer back and the
hazard lights flash once at the same time.
(3) If the doors do not lock when the lock sensor on the topside of an outside door handle assembly is
touched, touch the lock sensors on the top and bottom sides simultaneously by pinching the handle.
*1 Lock Sensor *2 Lock Switch
(g) Entry Back Door Unlock Function
(1) When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in the actuation area surrounding the back door,
pressing the back door opener switch will unlock the back door.
*1 Back Door Opener Switch - -
(h) Warning Function

(1) When any of the situations below occur, the smart key system sounds the wireless door lock buzzer,
sounds a buzzer in the combination meter assembly, and illuminates the smart warning indicator in order
to alert the driver.
SITUATION CONDITION
The driver opens the driver door and tries to leave the vehicle with the shift lever in any position
A
except P.
B The driver door is opened while the steering is unlocked.
C The occupant leaves with the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
The engine switch is operated while the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is outside the
D
actuation area.
E The vehicle is driven without an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
F The entry lock is operated while the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is inside the vehicle.
G The entry lock is operated while any of the doors is ajar.
H An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is confined inside the vehicle interior.
I The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low.
J The steering lock cannot be released.
K An abnormality related to the smart key system is detected.
L An engine start method is displayed.
M The system assumes that the driver is unfamiliar with the proper way to start the engine.
An attempt is made to turn off the engine switch with the shift lever in any position other than P or
N
N.
O Automatic power off operation occurs.
P Immobiliser function certification completion occurs.
(2) In situation A
There are 2 patterns for situation A.

Pattern 1:
When the shift lever is in a position other than P, the engine switch is in a mode other than off and the
driver opens the door and attempts to get out of the vehicle, the following control is performed:
Possible Effects without Warning Sudden vehicle start, vehicle theft, vehicle roll-away
The warning is started when all the following conditions are satisfied:
Power source is in a mode other than off.

Warning Condition Shift lever is in any position except P.
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph).
Buzzer Sounds continuously

Warning Method Smart Warning Indicator -
Wireless Door Lock Buzzer -
The warning is stopped when one of the following conditions is met:
Power source mode is turned off.

Warning Stop Condition Shift lever is moved to P.
Vehicle speed is more than 5 km/h (3 mph).
Pattern 2:
In addition to the conditions of pattern 1, the driver closes the door and attempts to leave the vehicle
holding the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly. In these situations, the following control is
performed:
Possible Effects
Sudden vehicle start, vehicle theft, vehicle roll-away
without Warning
Power source mode is anything other than off.

Shift lever is in any position except P.
Warning Condition
The state of the driver door is changed from open to closed.
No electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle interior.

Combination
Meter Assembly
Warning Method Smart Warning Blinks (yellow)
Indicator
Wireless Door Lock Buzzer Sounds continuously
Combination
Buzzer Power source mode is off.
Meter Assembly
Shift lever is in P.
Warning Stop Wireless Door Lock Buzzer An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
Warning Stop Wireless Door Lock Buzzer An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
Condition detected in the vehicle interior.
Power source mode is off.

Combination Smart Warning
An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
Meter Assembly Indicator
detected in the vehicle interior.
(3) In situation B
There are 3 patterns for situation B.
Pattern 1:
When the driver opens the driver door and tries to leave the vehicle while the shift lever is in P, the power
source mode is not off and the steering is unlocked, the following control is performed:
Possible Effects without Warning Vehicle theft
Power source mode is on (ACC).

Warning Condition Or when all of the following conditions are satisfied for 1 second:

Steering is unlocked.
Buzzer Intermittently sounds

Power source mode is on (IG).

Warning Stop Condition
Power source mode is off and steering is locked.
Pattern 2:
In addition to the conditions of pattern 1, the driver closes the driver door and attempts to leave the
vehicle holding the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly. In these situations, the following control is
performed:
Possible Effects without

Vehicle theft
Warning

Shift lever is in any position except P.
Warning Condition The state of the driver door is changed from open to closed.
No electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle
interior.
Buzzer Sounds once
Warning Method Smart Warning Indicator Blinks (yellow)
Wireless Door Lock Buzzer Sounds 3 times

An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle
interior.
Pattern 3:
In addition to the conditions of pattern 2, when an attempt is made to unlock all the doors using the
entry function and the lock sensor is touched, the following control is performed:
Possible Effects
Vehicle theft
without Warning

Shift lever is in P.
Warning Condition No electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle interior.
Electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle exterior.
Touching of the lock sensor is detected.
Buzzer Sounds once

Combination
Meter Assembly Smart Warning
Warning Method Blinks (yellow)
Indicator
Combination
Buzzer Sounds once
Meter Assembly
Approx. 5 seconds have elapsed from the

time the warning started.
Shift lever is in any position other than P.
Warning Stop Wireless Door Lock Buzzer Vehicle speed is more than 5 km/h (3 mph).
Condition An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
Any door is opened.
Any door is closed.

Combination Smart Warning
An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is
Meter Assembly Indicator
(4) In situation C
If the power source mode is anything other than off when a passenger gets out of the vehicle while
holding the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly, the following control is performed:

Engine cannot be restarted.
Warning
Power source is in a mode other than off.

The state of any door other than the driver door is changed from open to
Warning Condition closed.
interior.
Buzzer Sounds once

Wireless Door Lock Buzzer Sounds 3 times

interior.
(5) In situation D
When the engine switch is pressed while the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is not in the cabin or
the engine cannot be started properly, the following control is performed:

Driver confusion
Warning
The warning is activated when all of the following conditions are met:
Immobiliser function is set.

Warning Condition No electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle
interior.
The engine switch is pressed.
Buzzer Sounds once

Approx. 15 seconds have elapsed from the time the warning started.
interior.
(6) In situation E

The driver started driving without having an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly in the vehicle
interior. In this situation, the following control is performed:

Engine cannot be restarted.
Warning
Power source mode is on (IG).

Warnings have occurred under situation C.
Warning Condition
interior.
Buzzer Sounds 9 times


interior.
(7) In situation F
If the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is left in the vehicle interior and the lock sensor is touched,
the following control is performed:

Vehicle theft
Warning

All doors are closed.
Warning Condition An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle interior.
Lock sensor is touched.
Any door is unlocked.
Buzzer -

Warning Stop Condition Doors are locked through the manual lock, wireless door lock function or
key-linked lock operation.
The state of any door is changed from closed to open.
(8) In situation G
Any door is ajar, and the locking of the doors is attempted through the entry lock function by touching
the lock sensor of an outside door handle assembly. In this situation, the following control is performed:

Vehicle theft
Warning

Any door (other than the one performing the entry operation) is open.
Warning Condition
Lock sensor is touched.
Electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle
exterior.
Buzzer -
Doors are unlocked through the wireless door lock control function.
Entry unlock operation is performed.
(9) In situation H

An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is confined inside the vehicle interior. In this situation, the
following control is performed:

Vehicle theft
Warning
Keyless lock function* has been operated.

Warning Condition
An electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle interior.
Buzzer Sounds once

The power source mode is switched.

Doors are locked through the manual lock, wireless door lock function or
Warning Stop Condition key-linked lock operation.
The state of any door is changed from closed to open.
HINT:
*: With all closed doors locked, an open door is put in the locked door lock position, and is closed while pulling
the outside door handle assembly, thus locking all the doors.
(10) In situation I
The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low. In this situation, the following control is
performed:
Possible Effects Usability function

without Warning Smart key system does not function.
After the power source mode has been on (IG) continuously for approx. 20
minutes or more, it is changed from on (IG) to off.
Electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low.
Warning Condition Or all of the following conditions are satisfied:
Power source mode has been turned from off to on (IG) and the engine is
running.
Electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low.
Warnings have occurred under situation I.*
Buzzer Sounds once

Warning Stop
Condition
HINT:
*: The power source mode is turned off 20 minutes after being turned on (IG).
(11) In situation J
The steering lock cannot be released, or the shift lever is moved to any position other than P before the
steering lock is completely unlocked. In these situations, the following control is performed:

Usability function
Warning
The steering lock does not release when performing the release operation, preventing
Warning Condition
the engine from starting.
Buzzer Sounds once

Warning Method Smart Warning Indicator Quickly blinks (green)
Warning Stop Condition Approx. 15 seconds have elapsed from the time the warning started.
Steering lock is unlocked.
(12) In situation K
When an abnormality related to the smart key system is detected, the following control is performed:

Smart key system does not function.
Warning
The warning is activated when one of the following conditions is met:
Steering lock actuator assembly malfunction or steering lock/unlock detection

switch failure causes.
Warning Condition
An abnormality in the IG relay output circuit has occurred 3 times or more.
An abnormality is determined in vehicle speed or the vehicle speed signal is
stopped.
Buzzer Sounds once

Warning Stop Condition The steering lock actuator assembly malfunction has been resolved.
A failure of the lock/unlock detection switch in the steering lock actuator
assembly has been resolved.
(13) In situation L
The driver uses a mechanical key to open the door and presses the engine switch, but no electrical key
transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle interior. Or, the driver presses the engine switch, but
no electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected 2 consecutive times in the vehicle interior. In these
situations, the following control is performed:
Possible Effects
Usability function
without Warning
Any of the following conditions is satisfied at the time the engine switch is pressed:
Immobiliser function is set.

Warning Condition No electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is detected in the vehicle interior.
Unlocking with a mechanical key or operating the engine switch has resulted in
a certification failure 2 consecutive times.
Buzzer Sounds once

Warning Stop
Condition
(14) In situation M
If the shift lever is in a position in which the engine cannot be started, the display will show a shift lever
position in which the engine can be started:

Usability function
Warning
Shift lever is in any position other than P or N.
Engine is stopped (starter is not cranking).
Warning Condition
After the power source mode has turned on (IG), more than 0.5 seconds
have elapsed.
Buzzer Sounds once

Power source mode turns to anything other than on (IG).
Warning Stop Condition Engine is started.
Shift lever is moved to P or N.
(15) In situation N
There are 2 patterns for situation N.
Pattern 1:
A warning message appears on the multi-information display when the driver attempts to turn the engine
switch off with the shift lever in any position other than P or N.
Possible Effects
Battery discharge, vehicle roll-away
without Warning
After the power source mode is turned from on (IG) to off with the shift lever in P or N, the
Warning Condition
power source mode is turned on (ACC).

Warning Stop
Shift lever is moved to P.
Warning Stop
Shift lever is moved to P.
Condition
Power source mode turns to anything other than on (ACC).
Pattern 2:
The shift lever is moved to P from the Pattern 1 situation.

Battery discharge, vehicle roll-away
Warning
After the power source mode is turned off with the shift lever in any position except P,
Warning Condition
the shift lever is moved to P.
Buzzer Sounds once

Warning Stop Condition Power source mode is turned to anything other than on (ACC).
Shift lever is in any position other than P.
(16) In situation O
An automatic power off operation is detected. In this situation, the following control is performed:
Possible
Effects
Usability function
without
Warning
Shift lever position is in P.

Warning
The power source mode is turned off by the automatic power off operation after the
Condition
power source mode has been on (ACC) or on (IG) with the engine stopped and with the
vehicle speed at 0 km/h (0 mph) for a certain amount of time.
Buzzer -
Warning Combination Meter Assembly
Smart Warning Indicator -
Method
Warning
Stop Approx. 10 seconds have elapsed from the time the warning started.
Condition Power source mode is turned to anything other than off.
(17) In situation P
The buzzer built into the combination meter assembly sounds when an electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly with a depleted battery is touched to the engine switch while depressing the brake. In this
situation, the following control is performed:

Usability function
Warning
Warning
Warning Condition Key certification result is OK.
Buzzer Sounds once

Warning Stop Condition Engine speed is 500 rpm or more.
Driving is possible.
The immobiliser function is set and the smart ignition matching check is
stopped or incompatible.
(i) Battery Saving Function
(1) Battery saving preserves the vehicle and electrical key transmitter sub-assembly batteries. The battery
saving function is activated when the vehicle remains parked for a long time and when the electrical key
transmitter sub-assembly is left in the exterior actuation area.
CONDITION CONDITION OUTLINE
Condition 1:
No response from the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly for more than 5 days.
Door electrical key antennas and outside When the engine switch is turned on
electrical key antenna stop emitting (IG), the control is canceled and the
signals for creating the actuation area. In system is returned to normal.
addition, the lock sensors or unlock
sensors of all the seats are available, so
touching the sensor can lock or unlock.
When the vehicle
remains parked When the engine switch is turned on
for a long time. (IG), the control is canceled and the
Condition 2:
system is returned to normal. When
No response from the electrical key transmitter sub-
one of the following conditions is met,
assembly for more than 14 days.
the control is returned to condition 1:
Door electrical key antennas and outside
The doors are locked or
electrical key antenna stop emitting
unlocked using the wireless
signals for creating the actuation area.
door lock control function.
The lock sensors and unlock sensors
A door is locked or unlocked
except for the driver door are disabled.
using the mechanical key.
Door is opened to closed.
The control is stopped when one of the

following conditions is met:
When the This state continues longer than 10 minutes. The doors are locked or
electrical key unlocked using the wireless
Electrical key antenna that is detecting
transmitter sub- door lock control function.
the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly is left in
the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly is left in The doors are locked or
assembly stops emitting signals for
the exterior unlocked by touching the
creating the actuation area.
actuation area. lock/unlock sensor.
A door is locked or unlocked
using the mechanical key.
(2) In addition to the above functions, the auto power off function helps to reduce drain on the vehicle
auxiliary battery by turning the power source mode to off (a) when approximately 20 minutes have
elapsed since the shift lever was moved to P with the power source mode on (ACC) or (b) when
approximately 60 minutes have elapsed since the engine was turned off with the shift lever in P, the
power source mode on (IG) and the vehicle stationary.
(j) Battery Saving Function of Electrical Key Transmitter Sub-assembly
(1) This function cancels the signal reception waiting state of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly,
reducing the consumption of current from its battery.
(2) The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly can be placed into and taken out of battery saving mode.
When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in battery saving mode, the smart key system will
not be able to detect the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly, as the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly will not respond to signals from the vehicle. The smart key system will not operate if the
electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in battery saving mode.
(3) Pressing the unlock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly twice while pressing the lock
button (the indicator light of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly blinks 4 times) selects battery
saving mode for the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
(4) Battery saving mode can be canceled by pressing any button on the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly.
(k) Key Cancel Function
(1) The following system functions can be deactivated by using the key cancel procedure:
Entry Lock
Entry Unlock
Prevention of Key Confinement
Warning
(2) The system functions can be deactivated by using the following key cancel procedure when the engine
switch is off and the driver door is closed and unlocked:
The procedure is as follows:
Press the unlock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly once.
Within 5 seconds of the step above, open the driver door (driver door: close →
open).
Within 5 seconds of the step above, press the unlock button of the electrical key
transmitter sub-assembly twice.
Key Cancel
Repeat close → open for the driver door twice* (driver door: open → close → open
Procedure
→ close → open).
Press the unlock button of the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly twice.*
Repeat close → open for the driver door once* (driver door: open → close → open).
Within 5 seconds of the step above, close the driver door.
When the cancel procedure is complete, the buzzer sounds twice. Meanwhile, when the
procedure is performed again to resume the system, the buzzer sounds once.
HINT:
*: All these 3 steps are performed within 30 seconds of the previous step.
(l) Key Code Registration Function

(1) The table below shows the 4 special ID code registration function modes through which up to 7 different
codes can be registered. The codes are electronically registered (written and stored) in the EEPROM. For
details, refer to the Service Bulletin.
MODE FUNCTION
Clears all previously registered codes and registers only the newly received codes. This mode is used
Rewrite
whenever an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly or the certification ECU is replaced.
Adds a newly received code while preserving previously registered codes. This mode is used when adding
Add
a new electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
Confirms how many codes are currently registered. When adding a new code, this mode is used to check
Confirm
how many codes already exist.
Clears all registered codes and prohibits the wireless door lock function. This mode is used when a key is
Prohibit
lost.
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) The certification ECU can detect malfunctions in the smart key system when the power source is on (IG).
(b) When the ECU detects a malfunction, the smart warning indicator blinks in yellow to warn the driver. At the
same time, the ECU stores a 5-digit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in its memory.
(c) The indicator light warning continues for 15 seconds even after the engine switch is turned off.
(d) 5-digit DTCs can be read after connecting the Techstream to the DLC3.
(e) The smart key system may not operate successfully if a malfunction occurs.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0N
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: COMBINATION METER;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
COMBINATION METER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Combination Meter Assembly
*1 Smart Warning Indicator - -
(1) The current power condition can be confirmed through the illumination or blinking and emission color of
the smart warning indicator provided on the combination meter assembly.
(2) When the certification ECU detects an abnormality of the smart key system, the entry warning indicator
blinks in yellow to inform the driver.
POWER SOURCE CONDITION SMART WARNING INDICATOR
BRAKE PEDAL NOT BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED WITH SHIFT LEVER IN P
DEPRESSED OR N
Off Off On (Green)
On (ACC), On (IG) Blinks slowly (Green) On (Green)
Engine Running Off Off
Steering Wheel Lock not Blinks (Green) for 15

Blinks (Green) for 15 seconds
Unlocked seconds
Smart Key System Blinks (Yellow) for 15

Malfunction seconds Blinks (Yellow) for 15 seconds
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0O
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: CERTIFICATION ECU;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
CERTIFICATION ECU
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The certification ECU includes the IG1 relay and IG2 relay actuation circuits, CPU and hold circuit.
(b) The hold circuit is provided to prevent the power supply to the relays from being cut off when an abnormality
occurs in the IG1 relay and/or IG2 relay actuation circuits while driving.
HINT:
The certification ECU constantly stores the present power source mode in its memory. Therefore, if the power
to the certification ECU is interrupted due to the removal of the battery, the certification ECU restores the
power source after the battery is reconnected. For this reason, if the battery is removed when the power
source is in a mode other than off, the power will be restored to the vehicle at the same time the power is
restored to the certification ECU by reconnecting the battery. Therefore, before removing the battery, be sure
to turn the power source off.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0P
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly and door control receiver can operate on 2 different RF channels.
When an electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is brought within an exterior detection area, key verification
begins. If key verification fails due to radio wave interference, the channel will be switched and key verification
will be performed again. The multi-channel system begins verification using the channel on which the last
verification was successfully performed. When verification fails, the system switches to the other channel.
Exterior detection areas are created using LF waves (emitted from the vehicle at intervals of 0.25 seconds) to
*a
receive a response from the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is brought into an exterior detection area, it receives LF
*b
waves from the vehicle. Using RF waves, the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly responds to the vehicle.
Upon receiving the response from the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly, the certification ECU activates
*c the electrical key antennas (outside) one by one. Using LF waves, the certification ECU determines which
exterior detection area the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly is in.
The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly receives the LF waves from the vehicle and responds using RF
*d waves. (The certification ECU recognizes which exterior detection area the electrical key transmitter sub-
assembly is in.)
The certification ECU sends registered key ID information to the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly using
*e LF waves. (Up to 7 key IDs can be registered.)

*e LF waves. (Up to 7 key IDs can be registered.)
The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly sends the key ID information using RF waves. When the
*f
certification ECU receives it, verification completes.
*g Radio wave interference (channel switching)
(b) The multi-channel system changes channels when communication on the RF band (*b, *d and *f) is
interrupted by radio wave interference. Refer to the table below to confirm when the system changes
channels:
*B OR *D IS NG *F IS NG
RF waves cannot be RF waves cannot be RF waves cannot be RF waves cannot be
Condition
received received properly received received properly
Channel Channels will not be Channels will be

Channels will be switched. Channels will be switched.
switching switched. switched.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0Q
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: KEY;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
KEY
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The electrical key transmitter sub-assembly consists of a mechanical key, a transmitter for the wireless door
lock control and a transceiver for the smart key system.
(b) The transceiver for the smart key system receives the signals from the electrical key antennas and returns
the ID code to the door control receiver.
(c) The transmitter for the wireless door lock control has a lock button, unlock button, panic button and power
back door button*.
(d) When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly battery is low, the radio wave response received from the
engine switch is returned to the engine switch by the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly.
(e) This mechanical key works for the driver's door, but cannot be used to start the engine.

*1 Lock Button *2 Unlock Button
*3 Power Back Door Button *4 Panic Button
*5 Mechanical Key - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0R
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: ENGINE SWITCH;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
ENGINE SWITCH
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The engine switch consists of a momentary type switch, illumination, antenna coil and transponder key
amplifier.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0S
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The smart key system has the following main functions, making it a very user-friendly system:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
The start function is operated by simply pressing the engine switch while carrying the electrical
key transmitter sub-assembly. When the engine switch is pressed, the certification ECU turns
on/off the ACC relay, IG1 relay and IG2 relay to switch the power source pattern.
The power source mode changes depending on the depression of the brake pedal and
the shift lever position.
Start
Function
The immobiliser function compares the ID code registered in the certification ECU
Immobiliser with the ID code of the transponder chip embedded in the electrical key transmitter
sub-assembly.
Steering The steering lock function is operated to lock and unlock the steering wheel by using
Lock a lock/unlock motor in the steering column assembly.
Entry Unlock:
All doors are unlocked by grabbing the front outside door handle assembly.
Entry Lock:
Touching the lock sensor of the front outside door handle assembly or the lock switch
Entry
of the back door will cause all doors to lock.
Function
Entry Back The entry back door open can be operated manually by simply pressing the back
Door Open door opener switch.
Wireless The wireless door lock control function is a convenient system for locking and
Door Lock unlocking all the doors and the back door at a distance. The basic operation is the
Control same as that of the wireless door lock control system.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0T
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0U
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SMART KEY SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
Electrical Key Transmitter Sub-

*1 *2 Wireless Door Lock Buzzer
assembly
Front Outside Door Handle Assembly No. 2 Indoor Electrical Key Antenna
*3 *4
LH Assembly
*5 No. 3 Indoor Electrical Key Antenna *6 Outside Electrical Key Antenna

*5 No. 3 Indoor Electrical Key Antenna *6 Outside Electrical Key Antenna
Assembly
Back Door Opener Switch Assembly
*7 Back Door Opener Switch *8 Door Control Receiver

Lock Switch
Front Outside Door Handle Assembly No. 1 Indoor Electrical Key Antenna
*9 *10
RH Assembly
*1 ECM *2 Wireless Door Lock Buzzer
*3 *4
LH Assembly LH
*5 *6
LH Assembly LH
*7 Rear Door Courtesy Light Switch *8 Back Door Lock Assembly

Assembly RH
Power Back Door ECU (Multiplex Rear Door with Motor Lock Assembly
*9 *10
Network Door ECU) RH
Front Door Courtesy Light Switch Front Door with Motor Lock Assembly
*11 *12
Assembly RH RH
*13 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly - -
*1 Combination Meter Assembly *2 Stop Light Switch Assembly

*3 *4 Steering Lock ECU
Body ECU)
*5 *6 Engine Switch (Push Start Switch)
Assembly)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0V
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The immobiliser system compares the ID code registered in the transponder key ECU with the ID code of
the transponder chip embedded in the ignition key. The system is unset if these ID codes match. Thus,
the transponder key ECU and the ECM communicate with each other to authorize fuel injection and
ignition, enabling the engine to start.
(b) The content applies to models without the smart key system. For details of models with the smart key
system, see the Immobiliser Function in Smart Key System.
HINT:
When replacing the transponder key ECU or making a new ignition key, key recognition code(s) must be
registered. For details of the recognition code registration procedure, refer to the Service Bulletin.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD / WINDOW GLASS SYSTEM: REAR DEFOGGER CONTROL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
REAR DEFOGGER CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Inputs the defogger wire operation signal to the air conditioning amplifier
Rear Window Defogger assembly.*1
Switch Inputs a defogger wire operation signal to the timer circuit built into the
No. 2 heater control sub-assembly.*2
Air Conditioning
Amplifier Assembly*1 Operates and controls the rear window defogger system in accordance with the
No. 2 Heater Control signals from the rear window defogger switch.
Sub-assembly*2
Rear Window Defogger Applies electrical current to a defogger wire installed in the back door glass to
Wire remove fogging from the back door glass.

2. SYSTEM COTNROL
(a) When the ignition switch is turned to ON and the rear window defogger switch is pushed, this system is
activated to keep the defogger heater and mirror heaters on for approximately 15 minutes.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0Y
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD / WINDOW GLASS SYSTEM: WINDSHIELD DEICER CONTROL;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
WINDSHIELD DEICER CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Windshield
Operates the windshield deicer system.
Deicer Switch
Windshield Applies electrical current to a windshield deicer wire in the windshield glass to generate
Deicer Wire heat and remove ice from the windshield glass.
2. SYSTEM COTNROL
(a) The windshield deicer system is activated when the ignition switch is turned to ON and the windshield
deicer switch is pushed. The windshield deicer switch keeps the front wiper deicer on for approximately
15 minutes.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G0Z
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD / WINDOW GLASS SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Windshield Deicer System
(1) The windshield deicer system uses a heater element in the windshield glass to help reduce the formation
of ice where the front wipers rest.
(b) Rear Window Defogger System
(1) The rear window defogger system uses a heater wire on the back door glass.
2. SPECIFICATION
NO. GLASS PORTION COLOR GLASS TYPE VISIBLE LIGHT TRANSMISSION RATE
*1 Windshield Glass Green Laminated 70%
*2 Front Door Glass Green Tempered 70%
Green Tempered 70%

*3 Rear Door Glass
Dark Gray Tempered 20%
Green Tempered 70%

*4 Rear Quarter Glass
Green Tempered 70%

*5 Back Door Glass
*6 Sliding Roof Glass* Dark Gray Tempered 20%
*: Models with sliding roof glass
3. PRECAUTION


Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005G10
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD / WINDOW GLASS SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD / WINDOW GLASS SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION

*A *B Models with Manual Air Conditioning
System
*C Models with Windshield Deicer System - -
*1 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly *2 Rear Window Defogger Switch
*3 Windshield Deicer Switch - -

*A Models with Windshield Deicer System - -
*1 Windshield Deicer Wire *2 Rear Window Defogger Wire

Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: POWER WINDOW CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
POWER WINDOW CONTROL

1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The power window control system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
This function causes the window to open or close while the power window regulator master
Manual Up-and-
switch assembly or power window regulator switch assembly is being pulled halfway up or pushed
down
halfway down. The window stops as soon as the switch is released.
One-touch Auto
Up-and- The one-touch auto up-and-down function enables the window to be fully opened or closed by
down(Driver firmly operating the power window regulator master switch assembly.
Door)*1
One-touch Auto
The one-touch auto down function enables the window to be fully opened by firmly operating the
Down (Driver
power window regulator master switch assembly.
Door)*2
The jam protection function automatically stops the power window and moves it downward if a
Jam Protection
foreign object gets jammed in the window during one-touch auto-up operation or manual up
(Driver Door)*1
operation.
The up-and-down operations of the front passenger door window and the rear door windows can
Remote Control
be controlled by operating the power window regurator master switch assembly.
Window Lock Operation of the 3 passenger windows is disabled when the window lock switch is pressed.
This function makes it possible to operate the power windows for approx. 43 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to ACC or off, when the front doors are not opened.
Key Off When the window lock switch is off, the windows can be operated using any of the
Operation power window regulator switch assemblies. When the window lock switch is on, only
the power window regurator master switch assembly can be used to operate the
windows.
*1: Models with one-touch auto up-and-down function

*2: Models with one-touch auto down function
(1) The ECU built into driver power window motor stores the initial position of its door window. The initial
position is not cleared even if battery terminals, fuses or the power window motor connector is
disconnected. However, after removing or reinstalling window components, or replacing the power window
regulator sub-assembly or power window regulator motor, the stored initial position data must be cleared
and initialization must be performed. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
(b) Jam Protection Function (Driver Door)
(1) The jam protection function automatically stops the power window and moves it downward if a foreign
object gets jammed in the door window during one-touch auto up operation or manual up operation.
(2) The operation of the jam protection function is described below:
DOOR WINDOW POSITION OPERATION

FROM FULLY CLOSED
200 mm (7.87 in.) or more Down operation of 125 mm (4.92 in.) or 2.5 seconds
Down operation until door window downward movement of 200 mm (7.87 in.) is
200 mm (7.87 in.) or less
reached, or until 5 seconds have elapsed
(3) The magnet and Hall IC in the power window regulator motor assembly are used to enable power window
jam protection.
*1 Power Window ECU *2 Worm Gear
*3 Motor *4 Hall IC
(4) The Hall ICs convert the changes in the magnetic flux that occur through the rotation of the magnet into
pulse signals and output them to the power window ECU built into the power window regulator motor
assembly.
(5) To control the jam protection function, the power window ECU determines the amount of movement and
jamming of the window glass based on the pulse signals from the Hall IC1, and judges the direction of the
window glass movement based on the phase difference between the pulses from the Hall IC1 and Hall
IC2.
2. FAIL-SAFE
(a) If a Hall IC in the power window motor malfunctions, some power window functions will be prohibited in the
fail-safe mode:
(1) Each power window operates when the corresponding power window switch is fully pushed down or pulled
up and held in that position.
(2) When driver power window ECU detects an abnormality in a Hall IC, which detects the position, speed and
direction of the window, it switches to fail-safe mode.
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The power window control system controls power window operation using the power window regulator
motor assemblies.
(b) A jam protection function is used in the power window control system.
2. PRECAUTION


Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
Power Window Regulator Master Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network

*1 *2
Switch Assembly Body ECU)
Driver Side Power Window Regulator Rear Power Window Regulator Motor
*3 *4
Motor Assembly Assembly LH
Rear Power Window Regulator Switch Front Passenger Side Power Window
*5 *6
Assembly LH Regulator Switch Assembly
Rear Power Window Regulator Switch Rear Power Window Regulator Motor
*7 *8
Assembly RH Assembly RH
*9 Front Passenger Side Power Window - -

Regulator Motor Assembly
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Smoothly and smartly designed wiper arms and blades are used to highlight the body design.
(b) Spray type nozzles are used. These nozzles can spray windshield washer fluid in a wide range, thus
achieving excellent wiping performance.
2. PRECAUTION


Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
Windshield Washer Jar Assembly

Windshield Washer Jar Assembly
*1 *2 Front Wiper Motor and Link Assembly
Windshield Washer Motor
and Pump Assembly
*3 Rear Wiper Motor Assembly - -

*1 Windshield Wiper Switch Assembly *2
Body ECU)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005GED
Title: SEAT: SEAT ASSEMBLY: FRONT SEAT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
FRONT SEAT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Design
(1) The height of the seatback and the length of the seat cushion have been increased and the area which
touches the occupant has been enlarged to avoid concentration of the seating pressure, thus achieving a
seat with a pleasurable and comfortable ride.
*a 30 mm (1.18 in.) *b 20 mm (0.79 in.)
(2) The seatback has been made thinner to enlarge the leg space for the rear seat passengers.
*a Leg Space - -
(3) The surface shapes of the seatback and seat cushion have been optimized and the thickness of the pad
has been increased, thus enhancing the posture holding force in consideration for a comfortable ride of
the occupants.
(4) The seat surface angle of the seat cushion has been increased by 2 degrees upward to increase holding
performance in the front and rear directions. The shape of the sides has been made more upright to
increase holding performance in the right and left directions.
*a A - A Cross Section *b B - B Cross Section
*c Sporty Type Seat *d Basic Type Seat
(b) Function
(1) A passive headrest is used for the front seats. In the event of a rear collision, the occupant's back sinks
into the backseat. At the same time, the passive headrest holds the head and back to decrease the
impact.
(2) The amount of the seat slide has been increased by 20 mm (0.79 in.) rearward to accommodate taller
occupants.
(3) The adjustment amount of the up-and-down lifter has been increased. By moving the lever on the side of
the driver seat up and down, the entire seat moves up and down as well. The amount of the seat
movement has been increased by 30 mm (1.18 in.).
*1 Lifter Lever - -
*a Neutral Position *b Amount of Movement

*c Lever Action - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005GEE
Title: SEAT: SEAT ASSEMBLY: REAR SEAT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
REAR SEAT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Design
(1) Similar to the front seat, the seat surface angle of the seat cushion has been increased by 2 degrees to
increase holding performance in the front and rear directions. The shape of the sides has been made more
upright to increase holding performance in the right and left directions. The posture holding performance
of the seat is enhanced, thus taking into account a comfortable ride.
(b) Function
(1) The reclining lever is positioned on the side of the seat cushion, thus taking into account operability.
*1 Reclining Lever - -
(2) A folding headrest is used for the left rear seat. When the button on the side of the headrest is pressed,
the headrest is folded forward and rearward visibility from the drvier seat is ensured.
*1 Headrest - -
*a Push - -
(3) The cup holders in the rear center armrest are arranged horizontally, thus taking into account usability.
*1 Rear Center Arm Rest *2 Cup Holder
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005GEF
Title: SEAT: SEAT ASSEMBLY: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Seat Concept
(1) 2 types of seats are provided: a basic seat and sporty seat.
(2) Fabric upholstery is used for the basic seat.
(3) Fabric or leather is used for the sporty seat depending on the specification.
*1 Front Seat (Basic Type) *2 Front Seat (Sporty Type)

*3 Rear Seat (Basic Type) *4 Rear Seat (Sporty Type)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005H2Q
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: BLIND SPOT MONITOR SYSTEM: BLIND SPOT MONITOR CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
BLIND SPOT MONITOR CONTROL

(a) The blind spot monitor system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
Output millimeter waves from the blind spot monitor sensor to the blind spot sensor detection
area, uses the reflected millimeter waves for detecting the presence of a vehicle, the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance and the relative speed, and then transmits this information to the built-in signal
Blind Spot Monitor
processing circuit.
Sensors LH and RH
The signal processing circuit determines if a vehicle is present, and illuminates or blinks the outer
rear view mirror indicator accordingly.
Dim the outer rear view mirror indicator light on the outer rear view mirror assembly.
Blind Spot Monitor Main

Switch (Warning
Pressing the blind spot monitor main switch turns the blind spot monitor system on or off.
Canceling Switch
Assembly)
Outer Rear View Mirror

Assembly Illuminates when a vehicle is detected in the detection area (blind spot monitor function).
Blinks when the turn signal switch is operated while a vehicle is detected in the detection area
Outer Rear
(blind spot monitor function).
View Mirror
Blinks when another vehicle is detected in the alert area while the vehicle is backing up (rear
Indicator
cross traffic alert function).
Light
Headlight Dimmer
Switch Assembly
Transmits the turn signal switch signal to the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH.
Turn Signal
Switch
Combination Blind Spot

Illuminates the blind spot monitor indicator when the blind spot monitor system malfunctions and when the
Meter Monitor
system cannot be used temporarily to inform the driver.
Assembly Indicator
Steering Sensor Transmits the steering angle signal to the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH.
Skid Control ECU Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH.
Main Body ECU

Transmits the destination signal to the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH.
(Multiplex Network Body
Transmits the taillight signal to the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH.
ECU)
ECM Transmits the reverse signal to the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Sounds when a vehicle is detected in the alert area while backing up.
Buzzer (Blind Spot
Monitor Buzzer)
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) Operating Condition (Blind Spot Monitor Function)
(1) The blind spot monitor function operates when both of the following conditions are met:
The blind spot monitor main switch is on.

The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph).
The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph).
(2) The blind spot monitor function can detect vehicles in its detection areas.
The detection areas formed by the blind spot monitor sensors LH and RH are as shown below:
*a 3.0 m (9.84 ft.) *b 1.0 m (3.28 ft.)

*c 0.5 m (1.64 ft.) - -
Detection Area - -
When this vehicle is overtaken by another vehicle in the adjacent lane.
*a Other Vehicle *b This Vehicle
Vehicle Speed (Fast) Vehicle Speed (Slow)

Vehicle Speed (Fast) Vehicle Speed (Slow)
Detection Area - -
When another vehicle enters the detection area of this vehicle due to a lane change.
*a Other Vehicle *b This Vehicle
Other vehicle enters the detection area Other vehicle enters the detection area
*c during lane change (merge in) (Type *d during lane change (merge in) (Type
1). 2).
Motion Direction of Other Vehicle Motion Direction of This Vehicle
Detection Area - -
(b) Operating Condition (Rear Cross Traffic Alert Function)
(1) The rear cross traffic alert function can detect vehicles in its detection areas.
The system continuously measures the relative speed of an approaching vehicle and its distance. If it is determined
that the approaching vehicle will cross in the path of this vehicle, the Estimated Crossing Time (ECT) is calculated.
When the ECT is 2.5 seconds or less, the system alerts the driver by flashing the outer rear view mirror indicator
lights and sounding the rear cross traffic alert buzzer.
Target Vehicle (Approximately 8 km/h
*a This Vehicle *b
(5 mph))
Target Vehicle (Approximately 28 km/h
*c *d Approximately 5.5 m (18.0 ft.)
(18 mph))
*e Approximately 20 m (65.6 ft.) *f Target Detection Line
Alert Area - -
Normal Parking
*a This Vehicle *b Target Vehicle
Alert Area - -
Angle Parking

*c 55 to 140 degree - -
Alert Area - -
Alert Area - -
3. FUNCTION
(a) Blind Spot Monitor Function
(1) According to operation conditions, the blind spot monitor function promotes safety confirmation by using the outer rear view
mirror indicator light to inform the driver that another vehicle has entered the blind spot monitor sensor detection area of this
vehicle.
(2) The outer rear view mirror indicator light informs the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot detection area by
illuminating when the turn light switch is not operated, and by flashing when a vehicle is present and the turn light switch is
operated.
(b) Rear Cross Traffic Alert Function
(1) According to operation conditions, the rear cross traffic alert function promotes safety confirmation by using the outer rear
view mirror indicator lights and rear cross traffic alert buzzer to inform the driver that another vehicle has entered the blind
spot monitor sensor alert area of this vehicle.
(2) When this vehicle is reversing, if a vehicle enters the alert area of the blind sport monitor sensors and it is determined the
vehicle will cross in the path of this vehicle, the system alerts the driver by flashing the outer rear view mirror indicator lights
and sounding the rear cross traffic alert buzzer.
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) The blind spot monitor system is equipped with a diagnosis function that can illuminate the blind spot monitor indicator on the
combination meter assembly. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005H2R
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: BLIND SPOT MONITOR SYSTEM: BLIND SPOT MONITOR SENSOR;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
BLIND SPOT MONITOR SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The blind spot monitor sensor consists of a millimeter wave radar circuit and a signal processing circuit.
(b) The millimeter wave radar uses frequencies in the 24 GHz band.
*1 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor LH *2 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor RH
Distance: Approximately 50 m (164
*a *b Horizontal Angle: Approximately 150°
ft.)
*c Vertical Angle: Approximately 20° - -
(c) The distance to the object, azimuth and relative speed are calculated from the information that is provided by
the reflected millimeter wave radar as described below:
ITEM CALCULATION METHOD
Calculated from the length of time that has elapsed from the time the waves of the millimeter wave
Distance radar have been emitted, until the reflected waves are received by the millimeter wave radar circuit. The
distance is approximately 50 m (164 ft.).
Calculated from the reception angle of the millimeter wave radar reflections received. The detection
Azimuth
angle has a horizontal range of approximately 150° and a vertical range of approximately 20°.
Relative Calculated by utilizing the change (Doppler effect*) that occurs in the frequency of the reflected
Speed millimeter wave radar waves.

Speed millimeter wave radar waves.
HINT:
*: The Doppler effect causes the observer to perceive the radio waves emitted by a moving object to be a
higher frequency as it approaches, and to be a lower frequency as it recedes. This phenomenon is created
because when an object is located far away, the radio waves are perceived at higher frequencies than those of
the radio source. An SST is used if radar axis confirmation is needed. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005H2S
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: BLIND SPOT MONITOR SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The blind spot monitor system performs 2 functions using the same blind spot monitor sensors: blind spot
monitor function and rear cross traffic alert function.
(b) The blind spot monitor function and rear cross traffic alert function can be enabled or disabled simultaneously
using the blind spot monitor main switch (warning canceling switch assembly). It is not possible to enable or
disable either of them independently.
(c) The blind spot monitor system consists of 2 blind spot monitor sensors, steering angle sensor, outer rear view
mirror assemblies LH and RH, blind spot monitor main switch (warning canceling switch assembly), headlight
dimmer switch assembly, rear cross traffic alert buzzer and combination meter assembly.
(d) The blind spot monitor function uses sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in the vehicle's blind spot,
helping the driver to confirm safety when changing lanes.
*1 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor LH *2 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor RH
*5 Outer Rear View Mirror Indicator Light - -
Detection Area - -
(e) If the rear cross traffic alert function detects a vehicle in the rear side direction while the driver is reversing in
a parking lot, the function alerts the driver by sounding the rear cross traffic alert buzzer and flashing the
outer rear view mirror indicators light to provide information for the driver, supporting decision making.
Detection Area - -
2. PRECAUTION
(a) The blind spot monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:
(1) During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.
(2) When there is a significant difference in speed between this vehicle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area.
(3) When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as this vehicle
accelerates.
(4) When driving up or down steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.
(5) When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle.
(6) When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from this vehicle.
(7) When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as this vehicle.
(8) When there is a significant difference in height between this vehicle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area.
(9) When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water, etc.
(10) When ice, mud, etc. is attached to the rear bumper.
(11) When towing anything such as trailer, boat, etc.
(12) When a carrier such as a bicycle holder, etc. is installed on the back of the vehicle.
(13) When the blind spot monitor sensor has been moved from its installation location by a light collision or
an impact on the bumper.
(14) Directly after the blind spot monitor main switch assembly (warning canceling switch assembly) is turned
on.
HINT:
In this section, the expression "this vehicle" is used to refer to the vehicle equipped with this blind spot
monitor system.
(b) The blind spot monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles or objects:
(1) Vehicles traveling from the opposite direction.
(2) Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
(3) Following vehicles that are in the same lane.*
(4) Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects.*
(5) Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from this vehicle.
HINT:
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
(c) Instances of the blind spot monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the
following conditions:
(1) When there is only a short distance between this vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.
(2) When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from this vehicle enters the detection
area.
(3) When there is only a short distance between this vehicle and a following vehicle.
(d) One blind spot monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right sides of the vehicle rear bumper
respectively. Observe the following to ensure that the blind spot monitor can function correctly.
(1) Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.
(2) Do not subject the surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly
off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected.
If the surrounding area has been subjected to a strong impact, inspect the sensor and surrounding area.
(3) Do not disassemble the sensor.
(4) Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
(5) Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
(6) Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area.
(7) Do not apply strong impacts to the sensor or drop it, as it is a high-precision device.
(8) Do not reuse a sensor that has been dropped or subjected to a strong impact.
(e) The rear cross traffic alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:
(1) During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.
(2) When a vehicle is approaching at high speed.
(3) When multiple vehicles approach continuously.
(4) When a parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.
(5) Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles.
(6) Shallow angle parking.

(7) When ice, mud, etc. is attached to the rear bumper.
(8) When towing anything such as trailer, boat, etc.
(9) When the blind spot monitor sensor has been moved from its installation location by a light collision or an
impact on the bumper.
(10) Directly after the blind spot monitor main switch (warning canceling switch assembly) is turned on.
(f) The rear cross traffic alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles or objects:
(1) Vehicles approaching from directly behind
(2) Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
(3) Vehicles moving away from this vehicle*
(4) Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
(5) Vehicles that enter the detection range from a parking space next to this vehicle*
HINT:
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
In this section, the expression "this vehicle" is used to refer to the vehicle equipped with this blind spot
monitor system.
(g) Ignition Switch Expressions


Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005H2T
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: BLIND SPOT MONITOR SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005H2U
Title: PARK ASSIST / MONITORING: BLIND SPOT MONITOR SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 ECM *2 Outer Rear View Mirror Assembly LH
*3 Skid Control ECU *4 Front Speed Sensor LH

*5 Front Speed Sensor RH *6 Rear Speed Sensor LH
*7 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor LH *8 Rear Speed Sensor RH

Rear Cross Traffic Alert Buzzer (Blind
*9 Blind Spot Monitor Sensor RH *10
Spot Monitor Buzzer)
*11 Outer Rear View Mirror Assembly RH - -

*1 Blind Spot Monitor Indicator *2 Combination Meter Assembly
Blind Spot Monitor Main Switch Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network
*3 *4
(Warning Canceling Switch Assembly) Body ECU)
Headlight Dimmer Switch Assembly

*5 *6 Steering Sensor
Turn Signal Switch
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005H32
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: SAFETY FEATURES;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SAFETY FEATURES
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Impact Absorbing Structure for Frontal Collision
(1) A structure that ensures collision energy absorption efficiency, dissipates impact and minimizes cabin deformation during a frontal
collision has been achieved.
The front impact energy is transferred to the front side member sub-assembly inner and spread to the rocker through the
torque box front.
The front impact energy is transferred to the front apron to cowl side member sub-assembly and spread to the front door
reinforcement sub-assembly through the MICS* bulkhead.
*: Minimum Intrusion Cabin System
The front impact energy is transferred to the front apron to cowl side member sub-assembly and spread to the roof side rails
through the reinforcement in the front body pillar such as front body pillar reinforcement UPR.
The front impact energy is transferred to the front side member sub-assembly inner and spread to the underbody
framework.
*1 Front Body Pillar Reinforcement UPR *2 MICS Bulkhead
Front Apron to Cowl Side Member Sub- Front Side Member Sub-assembly
*3 *4
assembly Inner
*5 Torque Box Front *6 Rocker
Front Door Reinforcement Sub-

*7 *8 Roof Side Rail
assembly
Front Impact Energy Dissipate

Front Side Member Sub-assembly
*1 *2 Underbody Framework
Inner
Front Impact Energy Dissipate
(b) Impact Absorbing Structure for Side Collision
(1) A structure that ensures collision energy absorption efficiency, dissipates impact and minimizes cabin deformation during a side
collision has been achieved.
Ultra high-tensile strength sheet steel (980 MPa class) and high-tensile strength sheet steel (590 MPa class) are used for
each body frame part, thus ensuring strength against side collisions and achieving weight reduction and structure simplicity.
Ultra high-tensile strength sheet steel (980 MPa class) is used for the rocker reinforcement outer and center pillar
upper hinge reinforcement No. 1.
High-tensile strength sheet steel (590 MPa class) is used for the roof panel reinforcement No. 1 (models with
normal roof) and roof side rail outer, etc.
Tailored blank steel (material in which 980 Mpa, 590 MPa or 440 MPa class steel sheet was laser-welded in
advance) is used for the center body pillar reinforcement outer.
Bulkheads (rocker panel reinforcement No. 3, main floor side member reinforcement, front floor reinforcement No. 2 and
front floor cross member plate No. 3) are used inside the rocker and in the underbody below the center body pillar, thus
achieving a structure which effectively transfers the impact energy during a side collision.
The front door side-impact protect beam sub-assembly is optimally positioned and 2 rear door impact protection beams (rear
door protect beam sub-assembly No. 2 and rear door protection beam sub-assembly) are provided, thus achieving a
structure which effectively transfers the impact load.

*1 Roof Panel Reinforcement No. 1 *2 Roof Side Rail Outer
Front Door Side-impact Protect Beam

*3 *4 Rocker Reinforcement Outer
Sub-assembly
Rear Door Protection Beam Sub- Rear Door Protect Beam Sub-assembly
*5 *6
assembly No. 2
Center Pillar Upper Hinge
*7 *8 Center Body Pillar Inner UPR
Reinforcement No. 1
Belt Anchor to Center Pillar
*9 *10 Belt Anchor to Center Pillar Patch
Reinforcement LWR
*11 Center Body Pillar Reinforcement Outer *12 Side Panel Outer
*13 Rocker Panel Reinforcement No. 3 *14 Front Floor Cross Member Plate No. 3
*15 Main Floor Side Member Reinforcement *16 Front Floor Reinforcement No. 2
*c C - C Cross Section - -
Side Impact Energy Dissipate
A head impact protection structure is used. With this type of construction, if the occupant's head hits against the roof side
rail, pillar and back door opening portion in reaction to a collision, the inner panel of the roof side rail and pillar collapses to
help reduce the impact.
*A Models with Normal Roof *B Models with Sliding Roof
*1 Roof Headlining Support *2 Roof Headlining Support No. 3

*3 EA Pad *4 Front Pillar Garnish Assembly
*5 Center Pillar Garnish - -
*c C - C Cross Section *d D - D Cross Section

Energy Absorber - -
A front door trim pad CTR and door trim pad LWR are provided in the door trims to help dampen the impact applied from the
side of the vehicle to the occupants.
*1 Front Door Trim Pad CTR *2 Front Door Trim Board Sub-assembly
*3 Door Trim Pad LWR *4 Rear Door Trim Board Sub-assembly

(c) Impact Absorbing Structure for Rear Collision
A large-size rear bumper reinforcement (rear bumper reinforcement sub-assembly) is used to spread the impact energy during a
rear offset collision. This distributes an impact load to the left and right rear floor side member sub-assembly front, thus
suppressing cabin deformation.
Rear Bumper Reinforcement Sub- Rear Floor Side Member Sub-assembly
*1 *2
assembly Front
Rear Impact Energy Dissipate
(d) Roof Crush Resistance
Loads are supported by the front body pillar, center body pillar, roof and header during a roof crush.
Front body pillar reinforcement UPR is provided to suppress deformation of the first corner.
Belt anchor to center pillar patch is provided to suppress cross sectional deformation of the center body pillar.
An integrated construction between the upper and lower parts of the center body pillar inner UPR and large belt
anchor to center pillar reinforcement LWR are used. For both of them, high-tensile strength sheet steel (590 MPa
class) is used, thus ensuring the rigidity of the center body pillar during a roof crush.
Roof panel reinforcement No. 1 which has a large cross section is used on models with a normal roof. In addition,
high-tensile strength sheet steel (590 MPa class) is used as the material to suppress the deformation of the center
body pillar during a roof crush.
High-tensile strength sheet steel (440 MPa class) is used for the windshield header panel inner and front body pillar
reinforcement UPR OUT No. 2 to suppress the deformation of the T-shaped part of the front header during a roof
crush.
*1 Roof Panel Reinforcement No. 1 *2 Windshield Header Panel Inner
Front Body Pillar Reinforcement UPR
*3 *4 Front Body Pillar Reinforcement UPR
OUT No. 2
*5 Center Body Pillar Inner UPR *6 Side Panel Outer

*7 Roof Side Rail Outer *8 Front Body Pillar UPR Inner
*9 Center Body Pillar Reinforcement Outer *10 Roof Side Rail Inner
Roof Panel Reinforcement Bracket No.
*11 *12 Roof Panel
1
Belt Anchor to Center Pillar
*13 *14 Belt Anchor to Center Pillar Patch
Reinforcement LWR
*c C - C Cross Section - -
(e) Reduction Pedestrian Head Injury
The following shape is used for the cowl panel sub-assembly and cowl top ventilator louver sub-assembly, thus maintaining
necessary rigidity and aiming for a reduction of impact against a pedestrian in a collision with a pedestrian.
By reducing the rigidity of the cowl top ventilator louver sub-assembly, the counteracting force on pedestrians during
a collision has been reduced. As a result, the impact on pedestrians has been reduced.
The rear wall of the cowl panel sub-assembly collapses like a pantograph to reduce the counteracting force on
pedestrians during a collision. As a result, the impact on pedestrians has been reduced.
The dropout zone for the wiper pivot is ensured to allow the pivot to drop easily, thus reducing the counteracting
force on pedestrians. As a result, the impact on pedestrians has been reduced.
Cowl Top Ventilator Louver Sub-

Cowl Top Ventilator Louver Sub-
*1 Cowl Panel Sub-assembly *2
assembly
*3 Wiper Pivot *4 Headform Impactor

*c Before Collision *d After Collision
*e Pantograph Structure - -
For the front portion of the hood sub-assembly, a structure with sufficient clearance between the hood panel, hood
panel reinforcement and hood lock hook is ensured. As a result, a space is made to absorb the collision impact during
an accidental contact with pedestrians, thus reducing the impact on pedestrians.
*1 Hood Sub-assembly *2 Hood Panel

*3 Hood Panel Reinforcement *4 Hood Lock Hook
*5 Headform Impactor - -
*a A - A Cross Section *b Before Collision
*c After Collision - -
Fender brackets (fender apron retainer sub-assembly and front fender apron extension rear) are used in the joint
portion of the front fender. The height of the fender bracket and the gap between the fender bracket and the fender
have been optimized. Also, fold points are provided on the fender brackets. Therefore, during a collision with a
pedestrian, the fender brackets absorb impact energy, with the aim of reducing the potential impact to the
pedestrian's head.
*1 Fender Apron Retainer Sub-assembly *2 Front Fender Apron Extension Rear
*3 Fender Side Apron Sub-assembly *4 Headform Impactor
*a A - A Cross Section *b Before Collision
*c After Collision - -
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: AERODYNAMICS;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AERODYNAMICS
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Aerodynamic parts are provided on various parts of the vehicle and the Cd level* is reduced to achieve
improved fuel efficiency.
HINT:
*: The Cd level refers to the air resistance coefficient. Cd stands for Constant drag. The lower the level is, the
lesser the air resistance is. This improves fuel efficiency.
(b) An aero fin which adjusts airflow is located on the fuel tank protector No. 1 and front floor cover RH to
smooth the flow of air which enters at the front of the vehicle and flows under the floor. Smooth airflow in
the lower surface of the vehicle enhances the speed of airflow and a low pressure region is created between
the vehicle and the road surface (Venturi effect). This low pressure region attracts the vehicle to the road
surface, thus causing down force. Thus, superior straight-line stability has been achieved.
*1 Front Fender Splash Shield Front LH *2 Engine Under Cover No. 1
*3 Front Fender Splash Shield Front RH *4 Front Floor Cover
*5 Fuel Tank Protector No. 1 *6 Front Floor Cover RH
*7 Floor Under Cover No. 1 *8 Rear Wheel House Plate Front LH
Luggage Compartment Service Cover
*9 Rear Wheel House Plate Front RH *10
Protector No. 2
Luggage Compartment Service Cover
*11 *12 Rear Spoiler
Protector No. 1
(c) An aero stabilizing fin is provided on the outer rear view mirror assembly and a type of aerodynamic
technology known as a vortex generator is used for the fin. Small vortexes are purposely generated in airflow
to push the vehicle from the left and right sides, thus achieving excellent operation stability.
*1 Outer Rear View Mirror Assembly - -
*a Aero Stabilizing Fin *b Generated Vortices
(d) An air-kick shape is provided on the lens surface of the rear combination light assembly. The air-kick shape
cuts and sends airflow rearward to suppress vortices, and air resistance is reduced by airflow adjustment
which smooth the airflow.
(e) An aero stabilizing fin is provided on the lens surface of the rear combination light assembly and a type of
aerodynamic technology known as a vortex generator is used for the fin. Small vortexes are purposely
generated in airflow to push the vehicle from the left and right sides, thus achieving excellent operation
stability.
*1 Rear Combination Light - -
*a Aero Stabilizing Fin *b Generated Vortices
*c Generated Vortices *d Air-kick Shape
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: LIGHTWEIGHT AND HIGHLY RIGID BODY;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
LIGHTWEIGHT AND HIGHLY RIGID BODY

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) High-tensile strength steel and ultra high-tensile strength steel are used in order to achieve excellent body
rigidity and a lightweight body.
Ultra High-tensile Strength Steel High-tensile Strength Steel
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: RUST-RESISTANT BODY;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
RUST-RESISTANT BODY
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Anti-corrosion Sheet Steel
(1) Anti-corrosion sheet steel is used as in the following illustration:
Anti-corrosion Sheet Steel - -
(b) Anti-chipping Application and Rust-resistant Performance
(1) Chip resistant coating (soft anti-chipping primer) is applied to the leading edge of the hood to help prevent
rust.
(2) Wax is applied to the edge of the door lower portion, door hinge, fuel filler lid hinge, and the hemmed
portions of the hood panel and luggage compartment door panel sub-assembly to improve rust-resistant
performance.
*1 Hood Panel *2 Front Door Panel Outer

*3 Rear Door Panel Outer *4 Back Door Panel Outside
*5 Side Panel Outer *6 Door Hinge
*7 Fuel Filler Opening Lid Assembly - -
*a A - A Cross Section *b View from B
*c View from C *d Body Wax
*e Hinge Wax *f Stone Guard Coat

*g Soft Anti-chipping Primer - -
(3) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) coating is applied to the wheel housings, and other parts that are located where
they are susceptible to stone chipping damage, improving the rust-resistance of these areas.
*a Edge Seal *b Right Hand Side

*c Left Hand Side - -
Under Coating Area - -
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: SOUND ABSORBING AND VIBRATION DAMPING MATERIAL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
SOUND ABSORBING AND VIBRATION DAMPING MATERIAL

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A hood insulator is provided on the rear of the hood sub-assembly. This achieves excellent sound insulation performance.
(b) An cowl top panel insulator No. 1 is provided for the cowl top panel outer FR, thus aiming forreduction of noise intrusion from the
engine compartment into the cabin.
*1 Hood Insulator *2 Cowl Top Panel Insulator No. 1

*3 Hood Sub-assembly *4 Cowl Top Panel Outer FR
(c) Noise absorbing material is provided for the front fender liner, thus reducing sound created by flying sand, flying water and road
noise.
*1 Front Fender Liner - -
Noise Absorbing Material - -
(d) A dash panel insulator outer is provided. This reduces the amount of engine noise leaking into and out of the cabin.
*1 Dash Panel Insulator Outer *2 Dash Panel Sub-assembly
(e) A dash panel insulator assembly is provided. This insulates and absorbs the engine noise to reduce the amount of engine noise
leaking into the cabin:
(1) The following features have been given to achieve a superior sound absorption and insulation performance.
The side of the cowl has been enlarged (improved sound absorption and insulation performance).
The holes in the dash panel insulator assembly have been filled (improved sound absorption and insulation
performance).
Insulation material has been added to the lower portion of the dash panel insulator assembly (improved sound
absorption and insulation performance).
*1 Dash Panel Insulator Assembly - -
Lower Portion of Dash Panel Insulator
*a Side of Cowl *b
Assembly
(f) An acoustic insulating material is provided in the periphery of the rear portion of the vehicle, thus reducing the sound created by
sand, water and road noise.
Quarter Wheel House Inner Silencer

*1 Quarter Wheel House Insulator RH *2
Sheet
Rear Wheel House Silencer Sheet No. Luggage Compartment Service Cover
*3 *4
2 Protector No. 1
Noise Absorbing Material - -
(g) A front door weatherstrip No.2 is provided on the lower portion of the rocker. This prevents road noise from entering the cabin,
and achieves superior quietness.
*1 Front Door Weatherstrip No. 2 *2 Side Panel Outer

Front Door Molding Sub-assembly
*3 *4 Front Door Panel Outer
Outside Lower
(h) To reduce the amount of road noise, engine noise and droning sound that enters the cabin, the floor panel is coated with a floor
silencer.
Floor Silencer - -
(i) Sound insulation materials are used in the body frame profile, thus dampening various noises which intrude from the outside of
the vehicle to the inside of the cabin.
Foaming Sealer Polyurethane Form
Silencer Pad Dump Sheet
(j) All the locations of acoustic insulating materials (sound insulation and absorption materials) in the cabin and luggage space have
been optimized, thus creating a quiet drive.
been optimized, thus creating a quiet drive.
*A Models with Sliding Roof *B Models with Normal Roof
*C Models with Compact Spare Tire *D Models with Full Size Spare Tire
*1 Roof Headlining Assembly *2 Roof Silencer Pad No. 3

*3 Roof Silencer Pad No. 1 *4 Roof Headlining Pad
*5 Roof Headlining Pad No. 2 *6 Front Pillar Garnish
*7 Front Door Trim Board Sub-assembly *8 Front Door Silencer Pad
*9 Center Pillar Garnish RH *10 Rear Door Trim Board Sub-assembly
*11 Rear Door Silencer Pad *12 Roof Side Garnish Assembly Inner RH
*13 Cowl Side Trim Board RH *14 Front Door Scuff Plate Inside RH
*15 Center Pillar Garnish Lower RH *16 Rear Door Scuff Plate RH
*17 Deck Trim Side Panel Assembly RH *18 Dash Panel Insulator Assembly
*19 Front Floor Carpet Assembly Front *20 Front Floor Silencer No. 3
*21 Front Floor Silencer No. 1 *22 Rear Floor Board No. 1
*23 Deck Board Assembly *24 Rear Floor Board No. 2
*25 Rear Floor Finish Plate *26 Back Door Trim Board Assembly
*27 Floor Mat Front Center - -
*a Acoustic Insulating Material - -
(k) An acoustic layer laminated windshield glass is provided to reduce the engine noise and road noise intrusion into the cabin.
*1 Windshield Glass - -
*a A - A Cross Section *b Glass
*c Acoustic Layer - -
(l) A fin shape has been added to both sides of the roof wind deflector panel sub-assembly in the sliding roof housing sub-assembly.
This prevents the airflow surrounding the roof wind deflector panel subassembly to enter the cabin, thus suppressing wind noise.
Roof Wind Deflector Panel Sub-

*1 Sliding Roof Housing Sub-assembly *2
assembly
*a A - A Cross Section *b Fin Shape
*a A - A Cross Section *b Fin Shape
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: BODY SHELL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
BODY SHELL
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Many spot welding points are provided in the periphery of the door opening, thus ensuring stability while maneuvering (yaw response,
steering response and rear grip feeling) by enhancing the strength of the connection between the panels.
*a Spot Welding Point - -
(b) The edge line of the cowl is straightened and the cowl top panel sub-assembly outer has been made into a closed cross section which
passes through the left and right sides, thus achieving a strong connection between the left and right front suspension towers. As a
result, superior stability while maneuvering has been achieved.
*1 Cowl Top Panel sub-assembly Outer *2 Cowl Top Rail Outer

*3 Cowl Top Panel Outer FR - -
*a A - A Cross Section *b Image of Straightened Edge Line
*c Closed Cross Section - -
Stress Transmission - -
(c) The rigidity of the following components on the under surface of the vehicle has been enhanced, thus achieving superior stability while
maneuvering:
Structure for Steering Response
The radiator support to cross member brace sub-assembly has been made into a closed cross section.
The front suspension member reinforcement has been made into a closed cross section.
A unified front suspension member brace is used.
Structure for Rear Grip Feeling
The wall thickness of the rear suspension member brace is optimized and high-tensile sheet steel is used.
size of the body mounting cushion sub-assembly rear upper is optimized and high-tensile sheet steel is used.
The connection between the arm and plate portions in the rear bumper arm sub-assembly has been arc welded on
the entire circumference.
Front Suspension Member Radiator Support to Cross Member

*1 *2
Reinforcement LH Brace Sub-assembly
Reinforcement LH Brace Sub-assembly
Front Suspension Member
*3 *4 Front Suspension Member Brace
Reinforcement RH
*5 Rear Suspension Member Brace LH *6 Rear Suspension Member Brace RH
Body Mounting Cushion Sub-assembly
*7 *8 Rear Bumper Arm Sub-assembly LH
Rear Upper
*9 Rear Bumper Arm Sub-assembly RH *10 Radiator Support Lower
*11 Radiator Support LWR RR *12 Side Rail Reinforcement LWR No. 4
*13 Side Rail Reinforcement No. 2 *14 Side Rail Reinforcement No. 1
*c Closed Cross Section *d Arc Weld

Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: BODY STRUCTURE: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Lightweight and Highly Rigid Body
(1) High-strength steel and ultra high-strength steel are used in order to achieve excellent body rigidity and a lightweight body.
(b) Safety Features
(1) The impact absorbing structure minimizes cabin deformation by effectively helping to absorb the impact energy in the event of
a front, side or rear collision. This provides high performance occupant protection.
(c) Rust-resistant Body
(1) Rust-resistant performance is enhanced by the extensive use of anti-corrosion sheet steel, as well as by an anti-corrosion
treatment that includes the application of anti-rust wax, sealer and anti-chipping paint to the easily corroded parts such as the
hood and fender.
(d) Low Vibration and Low Noise Body

(1) Effective application of vibration damping and noise suppressant materials reduces engine, wind and road noise.
(e) Aerodynamics
(1) Various types of airflow routing parts that control airflow are provided under the floor, and an undercover is provided to make
the under-floor area flat in order to ensure excellent aerodynamic performance.
2. MAIN FEATURES
(a) Exterior Design
(1) Front View
1. An integrated design from the hood to the front bumper, which emphasizes a protruding center, is used to express a
sophisticated dynamism.
2. The design surrounding the radiator grille garnish sub-assembly, which emphasizes the center indicated by the
TOYOTA logo, and the design, which emphasizes the eyebrowshaped plate molding passing through the headlight
assembly from the radiator grille garnish sub-assembly and the projector lights positioned on the outermost sides,
are given to add sharpness to the keen look (which is Toyota's original look giving an intelligent and clear impression
created by the combination of the dynamic under priority and the emphasis of the engine hood directed toward the
TOYOTA logo). (A, C and D in the illustration)
3. The front bumper is a 2-piece structure consisting of 2 parts of different colors. One color is the same as the outer
panel and the other color is the same color as the substrate. This emphasizes the trapezoidal shape surrounding the
front bumper opening. In addition to an appealing dynamism which is appropriate for an SUV, the under priority
design (a front design which further emphasizes the undergrille and which takes into account aerodynamic
performance, cooling and increased protection for pedestrians) has been expressed in a clear manner. (C in the
illustration)
4. The sharp and edgy contrast created using machined concaved areas in the convex surfaces pursues a high contrast
and dynamic texture and achieves a satisfying and dynamistic design. (D in the illustration)
5. By raising the lower end of the front bumper and using a design which creates a larger approach angle, a light and
mobile design is achieved. (B in the illustration)
*1 Radiator Grille Garnish Sub-assembly *2 Front Bumper
*3 Headlight Assembly - -
*a Plate Molding *b Thinner
*c Higher *d Large Approach Angle
(2) Rear View

1. When viewed directly from behind, the vehicle expresses a stable stance and a wide look by the contrast of the
tighter cabin, which gets narrower approaching the rear for improved aerodynamic performance, with the
underbody, which protrudes outward. (A in the illustration)
2. The rear view has been given a dynamic, light feeling through the use of a design utilizing a lively character line
which fits with the side design, and through a rolling effect which smoothly alternates between concave and convex
portions. (B in the illustration)
3. By using a spare tire which can be stored in the cabin, the back door has been made to open vertically. As a result, a
stylish rear view has been achieved. (A and B in the illustration)
4. A horizontal light shape which stands out and matches the character line of the side and rear body panels
emphasizes a design which sweeps sharply along the sides and also emphasizes the wide look of the rear view.
(3) Side View

1. A black front fender molding sub-assembly, front door molding sub-assembly outside lower, rear door outside lower
molding sub-assembly and quarter outside molding sub-assembly are used while also ensuring a sufficient interior
space. As a result, it makes the side silhouette less apparent and achieves a sleek proportional look while also
making the tires look relatively larger. In addition, the front and rear overhangs have been made to stand out to
express a light dynamism. (A in the illustration)
2. SUS* molding (front door belt molding assembly and rear door belt molding assembly) is used for the door belt line,
thus achieving a luxurious look. (A in the illustration)
* S(Steel) U(Use) S(Stainless)
3. While incorporating an optimized roof line and inclination angle of the back window, which were created based on
aerodynamic know-how, a strong and active feeling of unity is expressed by the flowing, sleek spindle shaped
silhouette created by the character line which seems to extend outwards and the easily visible side windows which
appear seamless. (B in the illustration)
4. The sharp and edgy contrast created by machined concaved areas in the convex surfaces and the large surface
which alternates between convex and concave pursue a high contrast and dynamic texture and achieve a satisfying
and dynamistic design. (C in the illustration)
Front Door Molding Sub-assembly

*1 Front Fender Molding Sub-assembly *2
Outside Lower
Rear Door Outside Lower Molding Sub-

*3 *4 Quarter Outside Molding Sub-assembly
assembly
*5 Rear Door Belt Molding Assembly *6 Front Door Belt Molding Assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHN
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: ILLUMINATED ENTRY CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ILLUMINATED ENTRY CONTROL

1. FUNCTION
(a) The illuminated entry system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE LIGHTS THAT OPERATE
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Map Light
Assembly
When the electrical key transmitter sub-assembly enters
Actuation Area- (Front Room
any actuation area around the doors, the lights that
linked*1 Light)
operate turn on.
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Electrical Key Map Light
When any door is unlocked using the electrical key
Transmitter Sub- Assembly
transmitter sub-assembly, the lights that operate turn on.
assembly-linked (Front Room
Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Map Light
Door Open-linked When any door is opened, the lights that operate turn on. Assembly
(Front Room
Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Map Light
When all doors are closed, the lights that operate turn
Door Close-linked Assembly
off.*3
(Front Room
Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Map Light
When all doors are locked, the lights that operate turn
Door Lock-linked Assembly
off.*4
(Front Room
Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
When the ignition switch is changed from off to ACC or
Engine Switch
ON, the lights that operate turn off.*3
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Map Light
Power Source-linked Assembly
When the ignition switch is changed from ACC or ON to (Front Room
off, the lights turn on. Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Map Light
When no changes occur in the condition of the doors for Assembly
Battery Saving
20 minutes, these lights turn off. (Front Room
Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
No. 2 Room
Light Assembly
Engine Switch
Illumination*1
Ignition Key
Ring
Illumination*2
Map Light
Assembly
Interior Light Auto When no changes occur in the condition of the lights
(Front Room
Cut switches on for 20 minutes, these lights turn off.
Light)
No. 1 Room
Light Assembly
(Rear Room
Light)
No. 2 Room
Light Assembly
HINT:
*3: Illuminates for approximately 15 seconds, fades out over approximately 0.9 seconds and goes off.
Illumination time can be selected from 15, 30 and 7.5 seconds using the customization function.
*4: Stops the illumination, starts to fade out immediately (fades out over approximately 0.9 seconds)
and goes off.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHO
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Interior Light
(1) Each kind of light is used to enhance convenience and comfort.
(b) Illuminated Entry System
(1) An illuminated entry system is used, which turns on in response to the opening and closing of each
door, to enhance usability at night and produce a pleasing cabin space.
(2) The illuminated entry system is controlled by the main body ECU (multiplex network body ECU).
2. SPECIFICATION
(a) Interior Light
LIGHT SPECIFICATION
Map Light Assembly (Front Room Light) 12 V, 5 W
No. 1 Room Light Assembly (Rear Room Light) 12 V, 8 W
No. 2 Room Light Assembly 12 V, 5 W
Vanity Light Assembly 12 V, 8 W
Ignition Switch Illumination*1 LED
Engine Switch Illumination*2 LED
Cup Holder Illumination*3 LED

*3: Models with cup holder illumination
3. PRECAUTION

ON On (IG)
Ignition Switch ON

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHP
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHQ
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
Map Light Assembly (Front Room

*1 *2 Vanity Light Assembly
Light)
*3 Front Door Lock Assembly LH *4
Assembly LH
Rear Door Courtesy Light Switch

*5 Rear Door Lock Assembly LH *6 Assembly LH
*7 No. 2 Room Light Assembly *8
Assembly RH
Back Door Lock Assembly
Rear Door Courtesy Light Switch
*9 Back Door Courtesy Light *10
Assembly RH
Switch
*11 Door Control Receiver *12 Rear Door Lock Assembly RH
No. 1 Room Light Assembly (Rear
*13 Front Door Lock Assembly RH *14
Room Light)
*A Models with Smart Key System *B Models without Smart Key System
*C Models with Cup Holder Illumination - -
Transponder Key Coil
*1 Engine Switch (Push Start Switch) *2 Ignition Key Ring

Illumination

*3 *4 Cup Holder Illumination
Body ECU)
*5 - -
Assembly)
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHR
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network The main body ECU receives various signals and illuminates the high
Body ECU) beam headlight via daytime running light module.
Light
Headlight Dimmer The light control switch outputs a light control signal and transmits it to
Control
Switch Assembly the main body ECU.
Switch
The ECM outputs an engine speed signal and transmits it to the main
ECM
body ECU.
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The daytime running light system is enabled when the conditions given below are met:
Light control switch is in off*1 or DRL*2 or AUTO*3 position (when taillight is not being controlled
Condition by the automatic light control system).
Engine is running.
Parking brake is off.
*1: Except models for U.S.A.

*2: Models for U.S.A.
*3: Models with automatic light control system
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHS
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: LIGHT AUTO TURN-OFF CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
LIGHT AUTO TURN-OFF CONTROL

1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The light auto turn-off system operates as follows:
CONDITION DETAILS
When approx. 30 seconds elapse after all of the following conditions are met, the exterior lights
turn off:
Delay The ignition switch is turned off.

The light control switch (headlight dimmer switch assembly) is in the AUTO position.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHU
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Main Body ECU (Multiplex The main body ECU receives various signals and illuminates the headlights,
Network Body ECU) taillights, clearance lights, license plate lights and side marker lights.
Light
Headlight Dimmer The light control switch transmits an AUTO position signal to the main body
Control
Switch Assembly ECU.
Switch
Automatic Light Control The automatic light control sensor detects the ambient light level and
Sensor transmits the light level signals to the main body ECU.
2. FUNCTION
(a) When the light control switch is in the AUTO position, the automatic light control sensor detects the
ambient light level and automatically turns the headlights, taillights, clearance lights, license plate lights
and side marker lights on or off accordingly.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Automatic High Beam The AHB sensor determines when to turn the high beams on and off after identifying
(AHB) Sensor (Lane the lights of oncoming vehicles, preceding vehicles and other lights from the picture
Departure Warning information of its camera sensor. Then, it sends high beam request signals to the main
Camera) body ECU.
Yawrate Sensor Detects the yaw rate of the vehicle and transmits the signal to the AHB sensor.
Skid Control ECU Transmits the speed sensor signal to the AHB sensor.
ECM Transmits the shift position signal to the AHB sensor.
Automatic The automatic high beam indicator light illuminates (green) to inform the
High Beam driver when the Automatic High Beam (AHB) system is activated.
Indicator The automatic high beam indicator light illuminates (amber) to inform the
Combination Light driver when a malfunction is detected in this system.
Meter
Assembly Headlight
High Beam The headlight high beam indicator light illuminates (blue) to inform the driver when the
Indicator high beam headlights are on.
Light
The main body ECU receives the signals from the headlight dimmer switch
assembly and the automatic light control sensor.
Main Body ECU (Multiplex The main body ECU operates the high beams based on request signals that
Network Body ECU) are received from the AHB sensor.
The main body ECU transmits the signals to the combination meter
assembly.
Headlight
Light
Dimmer The light control switch transmits the auto position signal and the high beam position
Control
Switch signal to the main body ECU.
Switch
Assembly
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The Automatic High Beam (AHB) system operates as follows:
CONDITION DETAILS
When all of the following conditions are met, the AHB system is activated and the automatic
high beam indicator light turns on:
System The ignition switch is ON.

System The ignition switch is ON.
Activation The headlight dimmer switch assembly (light control switch) is in the AUTO position
and high beam position.
The automatic light control sensor outputs the night mode signal (to turn the
headlights on).
When all of the following conditions are met, the AHB system turns on the high beam
headlights after a short delay:
Vehicle speed is more than approximately 34 km/h (21 mph).
High Beam
The area in front of the vehicle is dark.
Headlight On
No oncoming vehicles are present with the headlights on.
No preceding vehicles are present with the taillights on.
Few street lights are present along the street ahead.
When any of the following conditions are met, the automatic system turns off the high beam
headlights after a short delay:
Vehicle speed is less than approximately 27 km/h (17 mph).
High Beam
The area in front of the vehicle is not dark.
Headlight Off
An oncoming vehicle with headlights on is detected.
A preceding vehicle with taillights on is detected.
Several street lights are present along the street ahead.
3. FUNCTION
(a) When passing an oncoming vehicle
(1) The Automatic High Beam (AHB) system turns the high beam headlights off when there is an oncoming
vehicle before its distance reaches approximately 800 m (2625 ft.).
(2) When an oncoming vehicle passes the automatic high beam sensor range, the AHB system turns the high
beam headlights on after a short delay.
*a Approx. 800 m (2625 ft.) *b Delay
*c Camera Angle - -
(b) When passing a preceding vehicle
(1) The AHB system turns the high beam headlights off when there is a preceding vehicle before its distance
reaches approximately 600 m (1969 ft.).
(2) When a preceding vehicle passes the automatic high beam sensor range, the AHB system turns the high
beam headlights on after a short delay.
*a Approx. 600 m (1969 ft.) *b Delay
*c Camera Angle - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IHZ
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: LANE DEPARTURE WARNING CAMERA;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING CAMERA

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The lane departure warning camera is mounted near the map light assembly and is used for the lane
departure alert system and automatic high beam system.
(b) The lane departure warning camera consists of a Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) that
receives images and the top of the windshield glass that identifies light sources, and judges whether to turn
high beam headlights on or off.
*1 Lens Portion *2 Lane Departure Warning Camera

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005II0
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Exterior Light
(1) The front lights consist of the following lights:
*1 Side Turn Signal Light Assembly RH *2 Headlight Assembly RH

*3 Front Fog Light Assembly RH *4 Front Fog Light Assembly LH
*5 Headlight Assembly LH *6 Side Turn Signal Light Assembly LH

Clearance Light/Front Turn Signal High Beam Headlight/Daytime Running
*7 *8
Light Light
*9 Side Marker Light *10 Low Beam Headlight
(2) The rear lights consist of the following lights:

*1 Taillight/Stop Light *2 Side Marker Light
*3 Rear Turn Signal Light *4 Back-up Light
*5 Taillight *6 Rear Light Assembly LH
*7 Rear Combination Light Assembly LH *8 Rear Reflex Reflector LH

*9 License Plate Light Assembly *10 Rear Reflex Reflector RH
*11 Rear Combination Light Assembly RH *12 Rear Light Assembly RH
*13 Center Stop Light Assembly - -
(b) Automatic Light Control System (Models with Automatic Light Control System)
(1) When the light control switch is in the AUTO position, the automatic light control sensor detects the
ambient light level and automatically turns the headlights, taillights, clearance lights and license plate
lights on or off accordingly.
(c) Light Automatic Turn-off System (Models with Light Auto Turn-off System)
(1) This system automatically turns off the headlights, taillights, and so on when the ignition switch is turned
off.
(d) Daytime Running Light
(1) The daytime running light system is designed to automatically illuminate the daytime running light (high
beam headlight) during the daytime to keep the vehicle highly visible to other vehicles.
(e) Automatic High Beam (AHB) System (Models with AHB System)
(1) The AHB system detects lights in front of the vehicle and automatically changes between high beams and
low beams to assist the driver during night driving.
2. SPECIFICATION
(a) Exterior Light
LIGHT SPECIFICATION
Low Beam Headlight 12 V, 60 W (HB3L+ Type*1)
High Beam Headlight/Daytime Running

12 V, 60 W (HB3L+ Type*1)
Light
Headlight Assembly
12 V, 8/28 W (T20WB Type: Amber
Clearance Light/Front Turn Signal Light
Bulb)
Side Marker Light 12 V, 5 W (W5W Type)
Front Fog Light Assembly 12 V, 19 W (H16 Type)
Side Turn Signal Light Assembly 12 V, 0.5 W (LED x 2)
Taillight/Stop Light 12 V, 5/21 W (W21W type)
Rear Combination Light Side Marker Light -*2

Assembly
12 V, 21W (WY21W Type: Amber
Rear Turn Signal Light
Bulb)
Taillight 12 V, 5 W (W5W Type)

Rear Light Assembly
Back-up Light 12 V, 16 W (W16W Type)
Center Stop Light Assembly 12 V, 0.6 W (LED x 9)
License Plate Light 12 V, 5 W (W5W Type)
HINT:
*1: HB3 type is replaceable.
*2: The light source has been used with taillight/stop light.
3. PRECAUTION
(a) Automatic High Beam (AHB) System (Models with Automatic High Beam (AHB) System)
(1) The automatic high beam system is a system that helps ensure visibility by automatically turning the high
beams on and off.
(2) However, due to control limitations of the automatic high beam system, it may be necessary to manually
turn the high beams on and off. When driving, for safety reasons, make sure to change the high beams
and low beams manually according to the driving conditions.
(3) Under the following conditions, the automatic high beam system might not detect other vehicles or lights
correctly, or the high beams might cause glare or flash pedestrians or the occupants of other vehicles.
Manual operation should be used.
FACTOR CONDITION
Weather/Climate When driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.).
When the windshield glass is not clear (ice, snow or frost on the
glass).
When the windshield glass is dirty (sand, mud, water stains or
bugs on the glass).
When the windshield glass is cracked.
Windshield Glass When the windshield glass is fogged-up.
When the windshield glass has a film attached.
When an object on the instrument panel reflects off of the
windshield glass.
When any other abnormal conditions exist with the windshield
glass.
When a parking tag, magnifying lens or other accessory is

mounted on the AHB sensor.
Automatic High Beam (AHB)
When the AHB sensor or its built-in camera is deformed.
Sensor (Lane Departure Warning
When the automatic high beam sensor in the AHB sensor is dirty.
Camera)
When any other abnormal conditions exist with the AHB sensor or
its built-in automatic high beam sensor.
When lights similar to headlights or taillights are in the vicinity of
the vehicle.
When a nearby vehicle has no lights or its lights are off.
Nearby Vehicles or Lights
When a vehicle in front has misaligned lights, or its lights are
changing color.
When a vehicle in front has extremely dirty headlights or taillights.
When driving in an area where the conditions often change
between bright and dark.
When driving on a road with many uphill and downhill slopes.
When driving on a winding road or around a sharp curve.
Road Conditions
When driving on a bumpy road (cobblestone pavement, gravel
road, rough unpaved road, etc.).
When highly reflective objects are in front of the vehicle (mirrors,
road signs, etc.).
When the headlights are damaged, deformed or dirty.

When the vehicle posture is abnormal due to flat tire (or posture
has changed due to the vehicle being fully loaded, a trailer being
Vehicle Conditions
towed, etc.).
When the vehicle has other malfunctions or if the vehicle has been
modified.
Malfunction:
When the automatic high beam indicator light on the combination
meter assembly is blinking.
Others:
Automatic High Beam (AHB)
When the Automatic High Beam (AHB) system does not seem to
System
be changing between the high beams and low beams properly.
When the Automatic High Beam (AHB) system is frequently
changing between the high beams and low beams.
When the glare from the high beams would disturb pedestrians or
the drivers of other vehicles.


Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
Models with Automatic High Beam

*A - -
(AHB) System
*1 Front Speed Sensor RH *2 Headlight Assembly RH
Engine Room Relay Block
Daytime Running Light

*3 Headlight Assembly LH *4
Module
Brake Actuator Assembly

*5 Front Speed Sensor LH *6
Skid Control ECU
*7 Front Door Courtesy Light Switch LH *8 Rear Speed Sensor LH
Automatic High Beam (AHB) Sensor
*9 Rear Speed Sensor RH *10
(Lane Departure Warning Camera)
*11 ECM - -

*1 Automatic Light Control Sensor *2
Body ECU)
*3 Stop Light Switch Assembly *4 Headlight Dimmer Switch Assembly

*5 Yawrate Sensor *6 Combination Meter Assembly
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL

1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The air conditioning system uses the following controls:
CONTROL OUTLINE
Neural This control is capable of effecting complex control by artificially simulating the information processing method of the
Network nervous system of living organisms in order to establish a complex input/output relationship that is similar to that of a
Control* human brain.
Micro Dust and Activated by the micro dust and pollen filter mode switch operation. Switches the air outlet to the FACE mode. Sends
Pollen Filter air which has passed through the clean air filter to the area around the upper part of the bodies of the driver and
Mode Control* front passenger. This air is filtered by the clean air filter in order to remove pollen.
Based on the temperature set at the temperature control switch, the neural network control calculates the outlet air
Outlet Air temperature based on the input signals from various sensors.
Temperature The temperature settings for the driver and front passenger are controlled independently in order to provide a
Control* separate vehicle interior temperature for the right and left sides of the vehicle. As a result, air conditioning control
that accommodates occupant preferences has been achieved.
Blower Controls the blower motor in accordance with the airflow volume that has been calculated by the neural network
Control* control based on the input signals from various sensors.
Air Outlet Automatically switches the air outlets in accordance with the outlet mode that has been calculated by the neural
Control* network control based on the input signals from various sensors.
Cooler
Controls the blower motor in accordance with the airflow volume that has been calculated by the neural network
Compressor
control based on the input signals from various sensors.
Control
Rear Window Switches the rear window defogger on for 15 minutes when the rear window defogger switch is pressed.
Defogger
Control Switches the rear window defogger off if the switch is pressed while it is operating.
*: Models with automatic air conditioning system
(b) Neural Network Control
(1) In the previous automatic air conditioning system, the air conditioning amplifier assembly determined the required outlet air
temperature and blower air volume in accordance with a calculation formula that had been obtained based on information
received from the sensors. However, because the sensors of a person are rather complex, a given temperature is sensed
differently, depending on the environment in which the person is situated. For example, a given amount of solar radiation can
feel comfortably warm in a cold climate, but extremely uncomfortable in a hot climate. Therefore, as a technique for effecting
a high level of control, a neural network is used in the automatic air conditioning system. With this technique, the data that
has been collected under varying environmental conditions is stored in the air conditioning amplifier assembly, which effects
control to provide enhanced air conditioning comfort.
(2) The neural network control consists of neurons in an input layer an intermediate layer, and an output layer. The input layer
neurons process the input data of the ambient temperature, the amount of sunlight and the room temperature based on the
outputs of the switches and sensors, and output them to the intermediate layer neurons. Based on this data, the
intermediate layer neurons adjust the strength of the links among the neurons. The sum of this data is then calculated by the
output layer neurons in the form of the required outlet temperature, solar correction, target airflow volume and outlet mode
control volume. Accordingly, the air conditioning amplifier assembly controls the servo motors and blower with fan motor sub-
assembly in accordance with the control volumes that have been calculated by the neural network control.
(c) Quick Heater Control
(1) The on/off function of the quick heater assembly is controlled by the air conditioning amplifier assembly in accordance with the
engine coolant temperature, engine speed, air mix setting and electrical load (alternator power ratio).
(2) For example, the heating value of the operating quick heater assembly varies depending on the engine coolant temperature,
as in the graph below:
Heating Value of Operating Quick Heater Assembly
(d) Micro Dust and Pollen Filter Mode Control
(1) When the micro dust and pollen filter mode switch is pressed, the micro dust and pollen filter mode control is activated. Then,
the air outlet is switched to the FACE mode and recirculated pollen-free air flows in the area around the upper part of the
bodies of the driver and front passenger.
When the micro dust and pollen filter mode switch signal is input to the air conditioning amplifier assembly, the air
When the micro dust and pollen filter mode switch signal is input to the air conditioning amplifier assembly, the air
conditioning amplifier assembly controls the compressor with pulley assembly, No. 1 damper servo sub-assembly,
No. 3 air conditioning radiator damper servo sub-assembly and blower with fan motor sub-assembly as shown in the
timing chart below.
This control usually operates for approximately 3 minutes. However, when the ambient temperature is low [5 °C (41
°F) maximum], it will operate for approximately 1 minute.
After this control stops operating, the air conditioning amplifier assembly automatically returns to the mode it was in
just before the pollen removal mode switch was pressed.
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Manual Air Conditioning Control Panel (Models with Manual Air Conditioning System)
(1) A rotary switch type manual air conditioning control panel is used.
(2) 5 air outlet modes are provided on the control panel on models with manual air conditioning system. To
enable finer mode settings, a positive feel is provided between the positions of these modes, thus
achieving a high comfort level.
(b) Automatic Air Conditioning Control Assembly (Models with Automatic Air Conditioning System)
(1) An automatic air conditioning control assembly with Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is used to ensure
excellent visibility.
(2) Temperature control can be set independently for the driver and front passenger sides. For this reason,
temperature control switches for the driver and front passenger are provided on the air conditioning
control assembly.
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The air conditioning unit consists of a No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly, heater radiator unit sub-
assembly, servomotors, No. 1 cooler thermistor, quick heater assembly and blower assembly.
(b) A semi-center location air conditioning unit, in which the No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly and heater
radiator unit sub-assembly are placed in the vehicle's longitudinal direction, is used.
*1 Heater Radiator Unit Sub-assembly *2 No. 1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly

*a Front - -
(c) A partial recirculation system is used. This system has an air inlet control door (sub) in the cabin side of the
air inlet duct. Thus, it is able to cycle a small volume of recirculated air even in the FRESH mode, thus
enhancing heating performance. When the blower switch is on, the suction force of the blower fan opens this
air inlet control door (sub).
*1 Air Inlet Control Door *2 Air Inlet Control Door (Sub)
*3 Air Inlet Duct - -
*a Fresh Air *b Recirculated Air
*c To Blower Fan - -
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: NO. 1 COOLER EVAPORATOR;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
NO. 1 COOLER EVAPORATOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A Revolutionary super-slim Structure (RS) evaporator is used. By placing the tanks at the top and the bottom
of the No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly and by using a micropore tube construction, the following effects
have been achieved:
(1) The temperature distribution has been made uniform.
(2) The No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly has been made thinner.
*1 Tank *2 Micropore Tube
*3 Cooling Fin - -
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR);; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (NO. 1 COOLER

THERMISTOR)
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The front No. 1 cooler thermistor detects the temperature of the cool air immediately past the No. 1
cooler evaporator sub-assembly in the form of resistance changes, and outputs it to the air conditioning
amplifier assembly.
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: HEATER RADIATOR UNIT;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
HEATER RADIATOR UNIT

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) This heater radiator unit sub-assembly has been made compact and performance has been improved by
making the core section finer and improving the shapes of the tank section and flow section. Also,
environmental concerns have been taken into consideration. By using aluminum as the material, the amount
of the environmental burden disposal (lead) has been reduced.
*a Out *b In
*c Engine Coolant Flow - -
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: COOLING UNIT MOTOR;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
COOLING UNIT MOTOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) On models with automatic air conditioning system, the blower assembly has a built-in blower controller,
and is controlled using duty control performed by the air conditioning amplifier assembly.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIA
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: BUS CONNECTOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
BUS CONNECTOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) On models with automatic air conditioning system, the bus connector has a built-in communication/driver IC,
which communicates with each servomotor connector, actuates the servomotor, and has a position detection
function. This enables bus communication for the servomotor wire harness to achieve a more lightweight
construction and a reduced number of wires.
*A With Bus Connector *B Without Bus Connector

*1 Bus Connector *2 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly
*3 Communication IC *4 CPU
*5 Drive IC *6 Communication/Drive IC

*5 Drive IC *6 Communication/Drive IC
*7 Servomotor - -
*a To Air Inlet Servomotor *b To Mode Control Servomotor
To Air Mix Servomotor (Passenger
*c *d To Air Mix Servomotor (Driver Side)
Side)
*e To Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly *f To No. 1 Cooler Thermistor
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIB
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SERVO MOTOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SERVO MOTOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) On models with automatic air conditioning system, a pulse pattern type servomoter is used.
(b) In contrast to the previous type that detects the position by way of a potentiometer voltage, the pulse
pattern type servomotor detects the relative position by way of 2-bit on/off signals.
(c) The forward and reverse revolutions of this motor are detected by way of 2 phases, A and B, which output 4
types of patterns. The air conditioning amplifier assembly counts the number of pulse patterns in order to
determine the stopped position.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIC
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: QUICK HEATER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
QUICK HEATER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The PTC heater (quick heater assembly) consists of a PTC element and an aluminum fin. When current is
applied to the PTC element, it generates heat to warm the air that passes through the unit.
*1 PTC Heater (Quick Heater Assembly) *2 PTC Element

*3 Aluminum Fin - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IID
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: CLEAN AIR FILTER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
CLEAN AIR FILTER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A pollen removal type clean air filter is used to remove dust, pollen and other micron particles from air
entering from outside the vehicle to provide a comfortable cabin of clean air. The clean air filter is installed in
the upper section of the blower fan.
*1 Clean Air Filter *2 Case

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIE
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: COOLER CONDENSER;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
COOLER CONDENSER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) On models with air conditioning system, sub-cool condenser is used. This is a multi-flow condenser consisting
of 3 portions: a condensing portion, a super-cooling portion and a gas-liquid separator (modulator) all
integrated together. This cooler condenser assembly uses a sub-cool cycle for its cooling cycle system to
improve heat-exchanging efficiency.
(b) In the sub-cool cycle, after the refrigerant passes through the condensing portion of the cooler condenser
assembly, both the liquid refrigerant and the gaseous refrigerant that could not be liquefied are cooled again
in the super-cooling portion. Thus, the refrigerant is sent to the No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly in an
almost completely liquefied state.
*1 Condensing Portion *2 Modulator

*3 Desiccant *4 Filter
*5 Super-cooling Portion - -
*a Gaseous Refrigerant *b Liquid Refrigerant
HINT:
The point at which the air bubbles disappear in the refrigerant of the sub-cool cycle is lower than the proper
amount of refrigerant with which the system must be filled. Therefore, if the system is recharged with
refrigerant based on the point at which the air bubbles disappear, the amount of refrigerant would be
insufficient. As a result, the cooling performance of the system will be affected. If the system is overcharged
with refrigerant, this will also lead to reduced performance. For the proper method of verifying the amount of
the refrigerant and to recharge the system with refrigerant, refer to the Repair Manual.
the refrigerant and to recharge the system with refrigerant, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIF
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: COMPRESSOR WITH PULLEY;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
COMPRESSOR WITH PULLEY

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The compressor with pulley assembly is a continuously variable capacity type in which its capacity can be
varied in accordance with the cooling load of the air conditioning.
(1) This compressor with pulley assembly consists of a Damper Limiter (DL) type pulley*1, magnet clutch
assembly*2, shaft, lug plate, swash plate, piston, shoe, crank chamber, cylinder and solenoid valve.
(2) A solenoid valve that adjusts the flow of the refrigerant so that the compressor with pulley assembly
capacity can be controlled as desired is provided.
*1: AWD models

*2: 2WD models
*A AWD Models *B 2WD Models
*1 Shoe *2 Crank Chamber
*3 Shaft *4 Lug Plate
*5 Piston *6 Cylinder
*7 Solenoid Control Valve *8 Magnet Clutch Assembly
(b) Shaft Oil Separator
(1) Compressor oil, which has been mixed with the refrigerant and circulated in the air conditioning cycle, is
separated by the shaft oil separator built into the shaft and accumulated in the compressor.
separated by the shaft oil separator built into the shaft and accumulated in the compressor.
(2) For the shaft oil separator, an oil return passage is located between the swash plate with less oil and the
lug plate and refrigerant gas in which small amount of oil is mixed is sent to the intake chamber. As a
result, the oil circulation amount in the air conditioning cycle is reduced.
*1 Swash Plate *2 Shaft

*3 Lug Plate *4 Shaft Oil Separator
*a Refrigerant Gas - -
(c) Damper Limiter (DL) Type Pulley (AWD Models)
(1) This pulley contains a damper to absorb the torque fluctuations of the engine and a limiter mechanism to
protect the drive belt in case the compressor locks. In the event that the compressor locks, the limiter
mechanism causes the spoke portion of the pulley to break, thus separating the pulley from the
compressor with pulley assembly.
*1 Damper Limiter (DL) Type Pulley *2 Damper
2. OPERATION
(a) Variable Capacity Operation
(1) The crank chamber is connected to the suction passage. A solenoid control valve is provided between the
suction passage (low pressure) and the discharge passage (high pressure).
(2) The solenoid control valve operates under duty cycle control in accordance with the signals from the air
conditioning amplifier assembly.
*1 Suction Passage *2 Crank Chamber

*3 Piston *4 Discharge Passage
*5 Solenoid Control Valve *6 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly
(3) When the solenoid control valve closes (the solenoid coil is energized), a difference in pressure is created
and the pressure in the crank chamber decreases. Then, the pressure applied to the right side of the
and the pressure in the crank chamber decreases. Then, the pressure applied to the right side of the
piston becomes greater than the pressure applied to the left side of the piston. This compresses the spring
and tilts the lug plate. As a result, the piston stroke increases and the discharge capacity increases.

Crank Chamber Pressure + Spring
*a *b Piston Stroke: Large
Force
(4) When the solenoid control valve opens (the solenoid coil is not energized), the difference in pressure
disappears. Then, the pressure applied to the left side of the piston becomes the same as the pressure
applied to the right side of the piston. Thus, the spring elongates and eliminates the tilt of the lag plate. As
a result, there is a small piston stroke and the discharge capacity decreases.
Crank Chamber Pressure + Spring
*a *b Piston Stroke: Small
Force
(b) Variable Crank Suction (CS) Valve
(1) The refrigerant in the crank chamber, which varies the capacity of the compressor, returns to the intake
chamber through a valve and is compressed by the compressor. The variable CS valve is located between
the crank chamber and the intake chamber. The opening amount of the variable CS valve is reduced
when the capacity is being varied to set the amount of refrigerant in the crank chamber to only the very
minimum amount necessary for control, thus reducing the power required to drive the compressor.
*1 Variable CS Valve - -
*a From Crank Chamber *b To Intake Chamber
Refrigerant Flow - -
(c) Variable Suction Side Throttle Operation
(1) Refrigerant inlet pressure is applied to the top of the variable suction side throttle, and crank chamber
pressure is applied to the bottom of the variable suction side throttle.
(2) The pressure difference moves the variable suction side throttle up and down, expanding and contracting
the refrigerant inlet passage.
(3) When the refrigerant flow is at its maximum, the refrigerant inlet pressure is greater than the crank
chamber pressure. This causes the variable suction side throttle to move down, fully opening the
refrigerant inlet passage and lowering the refrigerant inlet resistance.
(4) When the amount of refrigerant flow is controlled, the crank chamber pressure is greater than the
refrigerant inlet pressure, raising the variable inlet throttle to contract the flow passage.
(5) These controls suppress noise by reducing pulsation from the refrigerant inlet.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIG
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR (COOLER
THERMISTOR);; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR (COOLER THERMISTOR)

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) On models with automatic air conditioning system, a cooler (room temperature sensor) thermistor is
provided.
(b) The cooler (room temperature sensor) thermistor detects the front room temperature based on changes
in the resistance of its built-in thermistor. This signal is used by the air conditioning amplifier assembly.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIH
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(THERMISTOR);; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (THERMISTOR)

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The cooler (ambient temperature sensor) thermistor detects the ambient temperature based on changes
in the resistance of its built-in thermistor. This signal is used by the air conditioning amplifier assembly.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005III
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL

1. OPERATION
(a) Mode Position and Damper Operation
*1 Front Defroster *2 Side Defroster

*3 Fresh Air *4 Recirculated Air
*5 Blower with Fan Motor Sub-assembly *6 No. 1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly
*7 Heater Radiator Unit Sub-assembly *8 PTC Heater (Quick Heater Assembly)

*9 Side Register *10 Center Register
*11 Upper Register *12 Rear Footwell Register Duct

*13 Footwell Register - -
*a Driver Side *b Passenger Side

*c - -
System
CONTROL OPERATION POSITION DAMPER OPERATION

CONTROL OPERATION POSITION DAMPER OPERATION
DAMPER POSITION
Air Inlet FRESH A Brings in fresh air.

Control
Damper RECIRC B Recirculates internal air.
Air Mix MAX COLD to MAX HOT*1 C - D - E Varies the mixture ratio of the fresh air and the recirculation
Control Temp. Setting*2: 16 °C (61 (C' - D' - air in order to regulate the temperature continuously from
Damper °F) to 32 °C (90 °F) E') HOT to COLD.
Defrosts the windshield through the front defroster and side

DEF H, K
register.
Defrosts the windshield through the front defroster and side

FOOT / DEF H, J register, while air is also blown out from the footwell register
duct and rear footwell register duct.
Mode Air blows out of the footwell register duct, rear footwell
Control FOOT H, I register duct and side register. In addition, air blows out
Damper slightly from the front defroster.
Air blows out of the center register, side register, footwell
BI-LEVEL F, I
register duct and rear footwell register duct.
FACE F, K Air blows out of the center register and side register.

(b) Air Outlets and Airflow Volume

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIL
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SOLAR SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SOLAR SENSOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) On models with automatic air conditioning system, a solar sensor (automatic light control sensor) is provided.
(b) The solar sensor (automatic light control sensor) consists of a photo diode, 2 amplifier circuits for the solar
sensor (automatic light control sensor) and a frequency converter circuit for the light control sensor.
(c) The solar sensor (automatic light control sensor) detects (in the form of changes in the current that flows
through the built-in photo diode) the changes in the amount of sunlight from its LH and RH sides (2
directions) and outputs these sunlight strength signals to the air conditioning amplifier assembly.
Solar Sensor (Automatic Light Control

*1 *2 Photo Diode
Sensor)
*3 Frequency Conversion Circuit *4 Amplifier Circuit LH
*5 Amplifier Circuit RH - -

*a Left Side *b Right Side
To Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network

*c Sensor Portion *d
Body ECU)
*e To Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIM
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Air Conditioning System
(1) An automatic air conditioning system or a manual air conditioning system is provided.
(2) The automatic air conditioning system uses left and right independent temperature control to
enhance comfort.
2. SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Ventilation and Heater Core
MODEL SPECIFICATIONS
Type Straight Flow Aluminum-II (SFA-II)
201.5 mm x 150 mm x 27 mm

Heater Radiator Unit Sub-assembly Size (W x H x L)
(7.93 in. x 5.90 in. x 1.06 in.)
Fin Pitch 1.8 mm (0.07 in.)
K70-10.5T*1
Motor Type
K70-10T*2
Blower with Fan Motor Assembly
Fan Type Semi Sirocco
Fan Size (Dia. x H) 155 mm x 70 mm (6.10 in. x 2.76 in.)

(b) Air Conditioning
MODEL SPECIFICATIONS
Type Multi-Flow-IV (MF-IV) Sub-cool
680 mm x 415 mm x 16 mm

Cooler Condenser Assembly Size (W x H x L)
(26.8 in. x 16.3 in. x 0.63 in.)
7SES17*1
Cooler Compressor Assembly
7SAS17*2
Motor Type Revolutionary Super-slim Structure (RS)
226 mm x 241 mm x 38 mm

No. 1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly Size (W x H x L)
(8.90 in. x 9.49 in. x 1.50 in.)

Type HFC-134a
Refrigerant
Charge Volume 470 g to 530 g (16.6 oz. to 18.7 oz.)
*1: AWD models

*2: 2WD models
3. MAIN FEATURES
(a) The air conditioning system has the following features:
The neural network control is used so passengers can finely control the air
conditioning for maximum comfort.*1
A pollen-removal type clean air filter, which has a pollen-removal effect, is used.*1
The manual blower control has 7 steps and automatic blower control has 31 steps
High
to allow precise control.*1
Performance
The blower control has 4 steps.*2
The system contains a PTC heater (quick heater assembly) that heats the air that
has passed through the heater radiator unit sub-assembly to ensure proper heater
performance.
A bus connector with a built-in IC is used in a lightweight wire harness design to
allow a reduced number of wires.
Lightweight*1
The use of this connector means that pulse pattern type servo motors can be
used.
A blower motor with a built-in blower motor controller is used to achieve a compact
Compact
construction.*1
The following parts are used to ensure high cooling performance while achieving a compact
and lightweight construction:
Semi-center Location Air Conditioning Unit

Others
Revolutionary Super-slim Structure (RS) Evaporator
Straight Flow Aluminum-II (SFA-II) Heater Radiator
Multi-Flow-IV (MF-IV) Sub-cool Condenser

4. PRECAUTION



Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIN
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIO
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
PARTS LOCATION
Relay Block RH

*1 Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor *2
PTC Heater Relay
*3 Cooler Condenser Assembly *4 Compressor with Pullery Assembly
Cooler (Ambient Temp. Sensor) Relay Block LH

Cooler (Ambient Temp. Sensor) Relay Block LH
*5 *6
Thermistor Heater Relay
*7 ECM - -
Models with Manual Air Conditioning Models with Automatic Air Conditioning
*A *B
System System
*1 No. 2 Heater Control Sub-assembly *2 No. 1 Heater Control Sub-assembly
Solar Sensor (Automatic Light Control
*3 No. 3 Heater Control Sub-assembly *4
Sensor)
Sensor)
*5 Combination Meter Assembly *6 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly
Cooler (Room Temp. Sensor)
*7 *8 Eco Mode Switch
Thermistor
*9 Air Conditioning Control Assembly - -
Models with Automatic Air Conditioning System
No. 1 Air Conditioning Radiator Damper

*1 PTC Heater (Quick Heater Assembly) *2
Servo Sub-assembly
*3 Heater Radiator Unit Sub-assembly *4 No. 1 Cooler Thermistor
*5 No. 1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly *6
Servo Sub-assembly
Blower Motor with Fan Sub-assembly
*7 Cooler Expansion Valve *8
Blower Motor Controller

*9 Clean Air Filter *10
Servo Sub-assembly
*11 No. 1 Damper Servo Sub-assembly - -
Models with Manual Air Conditioning System

*1 PTC Heater (Quick Heater Assembly) *2 Heater Radiator Unit Sub-assembly
*3 No. 1 Cooler Thermistor *4 No. 1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly
*5 Cooler Expansion Valve *6 Blower Register
*7 Blower Motor with Fan Sub-assembly *8 Clean Air Filter
*9 No. 1 Damper Servo Sub-assembly - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIP
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: COMBINATION METER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
COMBINATION METER
1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(1) Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator starts to operate when all of the following conditions are met:
Engine is running.

Condition
Shift lever is in D.
Drive mode is Normal or ECO mode.
Eco Driving Indicator stops operation when any of the following conditions is met:
Ignition switch is off.
Engine is stopped.

Condition
Shift lever is in any position other than D.
Drive mode is any other mode except Normal or ECO mode.
2. FUNCTION
(a) Buzzer Function
(1) The table below shows the warning and reminder functions of the buzzer in the combination meter
assembly:
ITEM
Front Seat Belt Warning

EPS Warning
Smart Key System Warning
Immobiliser System
Parking Brake Unreleased Warning
Door Open Driving Warning
Downshift Reject Warning
Light Reminder
Sliding Roof Open Warning
Key Reminder
Brake Buzzer
HINT:
The buzzer function differs by vehicle specification.
(b) Multi-information Display
(1) The multi-information display can be switched by operating the DISP switch located on the steering pad
switch assembly.
(2) The multi-information display indicates as follows:
DISPLAY OUTLINE*1
In the cruise information display, 6 types of information can be displayed:
Current Fuel Consumption

Average Fuel Consumption
Cruise
Average Vehicle Speed
Information
Cruising Range
Outside Temperature
ECO Driving Indicator Zone Display*2
Water
Temperature The engine coolant temperature date are displayed with bar graph.
Gauge
The Eco Driving Indicator Light can be set up from this screen. The customization display is
Customization*2 available only while the vehicle is stopped. If vehicle movement is detected during setup, the
setup will be canceled automatically.
HINT:
*1: The items displayed differ by vehicle specification.
*2: When the ECO driving indicator zone display is selected by customization function.
(3) Cruise Information Display
The cruise information display can be switched by operating the DISP switch. The counter can be reset
by pressing and holding the DISP switch for 0.8 seconds or more.
NO. CONDITION
a Standard display mode
b Eco display mode
1 The DISP switch is operated for less than 0.8 seconds.
2 The DISP switch is operated for 0.8 seconds or more to reset.
DISPLAY OUTLINE
Displays the value that has been

calculated by the meter ECU, which is
based on the driven distance and the fuel
Current Fuel
consumption volume (fuel injection
Consumption
amount signal from the ECM via CAN),
provided that the ignition switch is turned
ON.
Displays the value that has

been calculated by the meter
ECU, which is based on the
driven distance and the fuel
Total
consumption volume (fuel
Average Fuel
injection amount signal from
Consumption
the ECM via CAN) since the
counter was reset.
The display updates every 10
seconds.
Water
The engine coolant temperature date are
Temperature
displayed with bar graph.
Gauge
Displays the value that has

been calculated by the meter
ECU, which is based on the
Average elapsed time and driven
Vehicle distance since the ignition
Speed switch was turned ON or since
the counter was reset.
The display updates every 10
seconds.
Displays the value that has been
calculated by the meter ECU, which is
based on the fuel consumption data that
Cruising the meter ECU continuously monitors and
Range stores in its memory, and the residual fuel
volume data, provided that the ignition
switch is turned ON.
Displays the outside

Outside temperature.
Temperature The display updates every 3.84
second.
ECO Driving
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration is
Indicator
shown with a bar graph.
Zone Display
(c) Eco Driving Indicator
(1) The operating diagram of Eco Driving Indicator is as follows:
(2) When the ECM, using information (such as vehicle speed, accelerator pedal depressed volume, engine
speed signal (engine RPM data), and so on), calculates that the vehicle is driven in an Eco-friendly
manner, it turns on Eco Driving Indicator Light and shows the bar graph of ECO Driving Indicator Zone
Display within Zone of Eco driving.
(3) When the ECM calculates that the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, it turns off Eco Driving
Indicator Light and blinks the right side of ECO Driving Indicator Zone Display.
(4) The operation of Eco Driving Indicator is as follows:
VEHICLE CONDITION ECO DRIVING INDICATOR ZONE DISPLAY ECO DRIVING INDICATOR LIGHT
Stopped Turns off
ECO Driving Turns on
Non-ECO Driving Turns off
(5) Eco Driving Indicator can be deactivated in the following ways: Eco Driving Indicator Light can be
deactivated from Eco Driving Indicator Light customization display of the multi-information display.
(d) Front Seat Belt Warning Function

(1) When the ignition switch is ON, this system detects the condition of the seat belts based on the signals
from the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches and the occupant detection sensor. And if
the driver seat belt is unbuckled, the buzzer sounds 5 times.
(2) When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 mph), the buzzer sounds only 1 time to remind the fact
that the seat belt is unbuckled. After 30 seconds, the buzzer sounds intermittently to emphasize the fact
that the seat belt is unbuckled. After 9.6 seconds, the sound changes for emphasis. The sound continues
for 20 seconds. Once a buzzer begins to sound, it will continue until the seat belt is buckled or the ignition
switch is turned off.
HINT:
Upon receiving a request from a user who cannot wear a seat belt for a special reason, the buzzer warning
can be canceled using the Techstraem. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
(3) Occupant Detection Sensor
The occupant detection sensors are installed on brackets connecting the seat rail and the seat
frame. The resistance values of these sensors, which vary in accordance with the distortion that
acts on the brackets, are output to the occupant detection ECU.
The occupant detection ECU constantly monitors the weight on the front passenger seat, and
makes a judgment in accordance with the signals from the occupant detection sensor and the
state of the front passenger seat belt buckle switch.
The occupant detection ECU transmits the signals to the center airbag sensor assemby.
3. FAIL-SAFE
(a) ECO Driving Indicator
(1) When any of the following conditions are met, Eco Driving Indicator Light is turned off and ECO Driving
Indicator Zone Display is stopped:
Engine Signal Malfunction

CAN Signal Malfunction
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIQ
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) An analog display type combination meter assembly is used.
(b) A meter ECU and a buzzer are enclosed in the combination meter assembly. This ECU maintains
communication with other ECUs through the Controller Area Network (CAN).
(c) A front seat belt warning function is provided. If the front seat belt is not buckled, this system blinks the seat
belt warning light and sounds the buzzer as a reminder.
(d) Eco Driving Indicator lets the driver know whether the vehicle is being driven in an eco-friendly manner using
Eco Driving Indicator Light and ECO Driving Indicator Zone Display* in multi-information display.
HINT:
*: When the ECO Driving Indicator Zone Display is selected by customization function. For details, refer to the
Repair Manual.
*A Hi-grade (Models with LDA) *B High-grade (Models without LDA)
*C Standard-grade - -
HINT:
The diagrams shown above are for describing the new car features. They may differ from the actual design. If
the LEDs malfunction, the entire combination meter assembly must be replaced. For details, refer to the
Repair Manual.
2. MAIN FEATURES
(a) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
(1) An LCD is positioned on the combination meter assembly, and various displays are shown in each area to
provide information to the driver.
Segment Display Type Multi-

*1 - -
information Display
3. PRECAUTION
(a) The type of ignition switch used on this model differs depending on the specifications of the vehicle. This


Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIR
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ECU INPUT SIGNAL
Engine speed signal

Shift position signal
Current range position signal
Drive mode signal
Fuel injection volume signal
ECM
Engine coolant temperature signal
Buzzer sounding request signal
Warning light control signal
Indicator light illumination request signal
Diagnosis
Warning light illumination request signal
Center Airbag Sensor Assembly Front Passenger Seat Occupant Detection Signal
Diagnosis
Lighting status signal

Door courtesy light switch signal
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network Body ECU) Warning light illumination request signal
Driver seat belt buckle switch signal

Indicator light illumination request signal
Skid Control ECU
Vehicle speed signal
Diagnosis

Certification ECU (Smart Key ECU Assembly) Immobiliser certification signal
Emergency request signal
4WD ECU Assembly Warning light illumination request signal

Power Steering ECU Assembly Buzzer sounding request signal
Diagnosis

Lane Departure Warning Camera
Diagnosis
HINT:
The input signals differ by vehicle specifications.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIS
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Telltale Light Assembly *2 Combination Meter Assembly
*3 Light Control Rheostat *4 Steering Pad Switch Assembly

*5 DISP Switch - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIT
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: CRUISE CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CRUISE CONTROL
COMPONENT FUNCTION
ON/OFF
Turns on/off the power to the cruise control system.
Button
A cancel signal can be output to the ECM through the operation of this
Cancel
switch.
Cruise Control
Main Switch The acceleration function and resume control function can be performed by
Assembly +RES operating this switch. A signal is output to the ECM when this switch is
operated.
The deceleration function and set control function can be performed by
-SET operating this switch. A signal is output to the ECM when this switch is
operated.
Detects the vehicle speed and transmits a signal via the skid control ECU to
Speed Sensor
the ECM.
Throttle
Adjusts the throttle valve to the limiter position in accordance with signals
Control
from the ECM.
Throttle Body Motor
Assembly Throttle
Position Transmits the throttle valve position information to the ECM.
Sensor
Stop Light Switch Assembly Detects the depressing of the brake pedal and transmits a signal to the ECM.
Park/Neutral Position Switch

Detects the shift lever position and transmits a signal to the ECM.
Assembly
Illuminates when the ON/OFF button has been pressed to turn
Cruise Main the cruise control system on.
Indicator If the ECM detects a malfunction, this light illuminates in yellow
Combination Light to warn the driver.
Meter Assembly
Cruise SET
Illuminates when the -SET switch on the cruise control main switch
Indicator
assembly has been pressed to set the cruise control system.
Light
Controls the cruise control system in accordance with signals from
the switches and sensors.
ECM
If the ECM detects a malfunction in the cruise control system, it
will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Transmission Control Switch Detects the shift lever upward or downward position switch operation and
transmits a signal to the ECM.
2. FUNCTION
(a) The cruise control system has the following functions:
FUNCTION OUTLINE
When the ON/OFF button is turned on and the cruise control main switch assembly is pressed
to the -SET direction and released, the ECM stores the vehicle speed in the memory and
Set Control continues to control the vehicle at that speed. The set speed is between 40 km/h (25 mph) and
200 km/h (125 mph). Furthermore, when the cruise control system is running, the cruise SET
indicator light on the combination meter assembly illuminates.
When the cruise control main switch assembly is kept pushed to the -SET direction while the
cruise control system is running, the throttle control motor is energized in the throttle closing
Coast
direction, and the vehicle keeps decelerating. The ECM stores the vehicle speed when the cruise
Control
control main switch assembly is released. From then on, the ECM controls the vehicle speed at
that speed constantly.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3
Tap-down
mph), the set speed can be lowered approx. 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by operating the
Control
cruise control main switch assembly in the -SET direction quickly within approx. 0.6 seconds.
When the cruise control main switch assembly is kept pushed to the +RES direction while the
cruise control system is running, the throttle control motor is energized in the throttle opening
Accelerator
direction. The vehicle keeps accelerating and the ECM stores the vehicle speed when the cruise
Control
control main switch assembly is released. From then on, the ECM controls the vehicle speed at
that speed constantly.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3
Tap-up
mph), the set speed can be increased approx. 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by operating the
Control
cruise control switch in the +RES direction quickly within approx. 0.6 seconds.
The low speed limit is the lowest speed that the cruise control system can be set to and is set at
Low Speed
approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). The cruise control system cannot be set below that speed. If the
Limit
vehicle speed drops below that speed while the cruise control system is running, the cruise
Control
control system is canceled automatically.
After the cruise control system is canceled for any reason other than a malfunction or operating
Resume the ON/OFF button, the mode can be resumed and controlled at the set speed by operating the
Control cruise control switch in the +RES direction when the vehicle speed returns above the low speed
limit (approx. 40 km/h [25 mph]).
When the vehicle is traveling uphill using cruise control, automatic transmission control may
cause the transmission to shift down. During shift down control, when the end of uphill travel is
Shift Down
determined, the transmission will shift up after a certain period of time. When the transmission
Control
shifts down during the accelerator control or the resume control, the transmission will shift up
after the accelerator control or the resume control ends.
If any of the following signals is sent to the ECM while the cruise control system is running, the
cruise control system is canceled accordingly:
Stop light switch assembly on signal (depress the brake pedal)
Manual
D position circuit in the parl/neutral position switch assembly off signal (the shift
Cancel
Control lever is moved from D to N).
The 1st, 2nd or 3rd range is selected in the S mode position.
CANCEL switch on signal
ON/OFF button off signal
When any of the following conditions occurs while the cruise control system is running, the set
speed in the memory is cleared to cancel the cruise control system. Furthermore, the cruise
main indicator light turns on in yellow until the ON/OFF button is turned off, and the operation
of the cruise control system is disabled until the ON/OFF button is turned on again.
The stop light switch assembly has an open or short circuit.
The vehicle speed signal is abnormal.
speed in the memory is cleared to cancel the cruise control system. Furthermore, the operation
of the cruise control system is disabled until the ON/OFF button is turned on again.
The ETCS-i has a malfunction.
speed in the memory is cleared to cancel the cruise control system. Furthermore, the cruise
main indicator light turns on in yellow until the ON/OFF button is turned off, and the operation
Automatic of the cruise control system is disabled until the ignition switch is turned off.
Cancel
The stop light switch input signal is abnormal.
Control
The cancel circuit has a malfunction.
When the following condition occurs while the cruise control system is running, the cruise
control system is canceled. The cruise control system can be resumed at the set speed by
operating the cruise control main switch assembly in the -SET or +RES direction providing that
the vehicle speed is above the lower speed limit (approx. 40 km/h [25 mph]).
The vehicle speed falls below the low speed limit (approx. 40 km/h [25 mph]). The
set speed in the memory is maintained.
When the following condition occurs while the cruise control system is running, the cruise
control system is canceled. The cruise control system can be resumed at the set speed by
operating the cruise control main switch assembly in the -SET direction providing that the
vehicle speed is above the lower speed limit (approx. 40 km/h [25 mph]).
The vehicle speed drops more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set speed. The set
speed in the memory is cleared.
Other
While the vehicle is being driven under cruise control system, cruise control will be canceled if
Cancellation
the VSC is activated. The set speed in the memory is maintained.
Items
3. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If a malfunction occurs in the cruise control system, the ECM cancels the cruise control system. The ECM
turns the cruise main indicator light in yellow to inform the driver of a malfunction. At this time, the ECM
memorizes the malfunction in the form of a 5-digit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). For details of the DTC,
refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIU
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: COMBINATION METER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
COMBINATION METER
1. CONSTRUCTION
*1 Combination Meter Assembly *2 Cruise Main Indicator Light

*3 Cruise SET Indicator Light - -
(a) The combination meter assembly illuminates the indicator lights in accordance with each respective condition.
CONDITION CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT CRUISE SET INDICATOR LIGHT
ON/OFF Button On Illuminates (Green) -
Set Control Illuminates (Green) Illuminates
Illuminates (Yellow) -
Malfunction Occurred
Turns Off -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIV
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The cruise control main switch assembly consists of the ON/OFF button, +RES, -SET and CANCEL switches.
The +RES, -SET and CANCEL switches are operated using a lever that operates in 3 directions.
(b) The cruise control main switch assembly is an automatic reset (normally open) type that turns on only when
the switch is being operated and turns off as soon as the driver releases the switch. Furthermore, the
functions of the control switch are active only when the cruise control system has been turned on.
*1 +RES Switch *2 ON/OFF Button
*3 -SET Switch *4 CANCEL Switch

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIW
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The cruise control system is available depending on the model.
(b) The cruise control system is controlled by the ECM.
(c) The cruise control system effects control through the Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent
(ETCS-i). Once the cruise control system is set to the desired vehicle speed, the throttle valve position is
adjusted automatically to maintain the vehicle speed without depressing the accelerator pedal. The ECM
compares the actual vehicle speed and the set speed. If the vehicle speed is higher than the set speed,
the ECM activates the throttle control motor in the throttle closing direction. If the vehicle speed is lower
than the set speed, the ECM activates the throttle motor in the throttle opening direction.
2. PRECAUTION

(b) Cruise Control System
(1) Observe the following precautions when using the cruise control system:
1. Turn the ON/OFF button off when the cruise control system is not being used.
2. Beware of a possible increase in vehicle speed when driving downhill (if the vehicle speed
increases excessively, cancel the cruise control system and shift down to decelerate with
the engine brake).
3. If the cruise main indicator light illuminates in yellow while the cruise control system is on,
first turn the cruise control system off. Then, turn the cruise control system back on. If the
cruise main indicator light continues to illuminate in yellow after performing the above,
there may be a malfunction in the system.
(2) Do not use the cruise control system under the following road and vehicle conditions:
Road with heavy traffic

Steep downhill
Road with sharp bends
Winding road
Frozen or snowy road
Slippery road surface
Towing trailer
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIY
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION

*1 Rear Speed Sensor RH *2
Skid Control ECU
*3 ECM *4 Front Speed Sensor RH
Throttle Body Assembly

*5 Throttle Control Motor *6 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly
Throttle Position Sensor
*7 Front Speed Sensor LH *8 Rear Speed Sensor LH
*1 Combination Meter Assembly *2 Stop Light Switch Assembly
*3 Cruise Control Main Switch Assembly - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IIZ
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT CONTROL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
LANE DEPARTURE ALERT CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Combination LDA Main

Illuminates or blinks to warn the driver in accordance with signals from the lane
Meter Indicator
departure warning camera assembly.
Assembly Light
Captures the road view ahead of the vehicle, detects lane markers on the
driving lane and calculates the radius to the center of the lane, lane
width, lateral deviation and heading angle deviation.
Lane Departure
Receives signals from the ECU and from each sensor and controls the
Warning Camera
lane departure alert system.
Transmits the LDA main indicator light illumination request signal to the
combination meter assembly.
ECM Sends a shift position signal to the lane departure warning camera.
Sends a vehicle speed signal from the speed sensor to the lane departure warning
Skid Control ECU
camera.
Detects on/off status of the system and transmits a signal to the lane departure
LDA Main Switch
warning camera.
Headlight Dimmer
Transmits a turn signal command to the lane departure warning camera.
Switch Assembly
Yawrate Sensor Detects yaw rate and transmits a signal to the lane departure warning camera.
Speed Sensors Transmits a vehicle speed signal to the skid control ECU.
Skid Control Buzzer Sounds to warn the driver in accordance with signals from the lane departure
Assembly warning camera.
(a) Operating Conditions of Lane Departure Alert System
OPERATION CONDITION
The lane departure warning function is activated when all of the following conditions are met:
The LDA main switch is on.

The vehicle speed is between approx. 50 km/h (32 mph) and 220 km/h (138 mph).
Start
Lane markers are detected.
No turn signal command is detected.
The lane departure alert system is normal.
The lane departure alert system is suspended when any one of the following conditions is met:
The vehicle speed is not between approx. 50 km/h (32 mph) and 220 km/h (138
mph).
Stand-by
A turn signal command is detected.
No lane markers are detected.
This function resumes when the conditions above are removed.
The lane departure alert system is stopped when any one of the following conditions is met:
The LDA main switch is off.

The lane departure alert system is malfunctioning.
The lane departure alert system resumes when the following conditions are met:
Stop
The conditions of the start operation above are satisfied.
The lane departure alert system condition is normal.
The ignition switch is turned off and ON again to ensure normal operation, after the
lane departure alert system has been stopped by a system malfunction.
3. FUNCTION
(a) The lane departure warning camera calculates the estimated position which the front wheel will reach
after a few seconds based on the information collected by the lane departure warning camera, vehicle
speeds and front wheel positions. When the lane departure warning camera determines that the front
wheel is about to cross the lane marker, the lane departure warning camera activates the lane departure
alert system, blinks the LDA main indicator light and sounds the skid control buzzer assembly.
(b) The lane departure alert system does not operate if the vehicle approaches the lane marker (but does
not cross it), as long as the vehicle remains parallel with the lane marker.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005IJ0
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: COMBINATION METER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
COMBINATION METER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The combination meter assembly illuminates or blinks the LDA indicator lights, and sounds a skid control
buzzer assembly in accordance with the respective condition.
*1 LDA Main Indicator Light *2 Lane Marker Indicator (LH)

*3 Lane Marker Indicator (RH) *4 LDA Indicator
CONDITION LDA MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT SKID CONTROL

BUZZER ASSEMBLY
LANE MARKER LDA LANE MARKER
INDICATOR (LH) INDICATOR INDICATOR (RH)
Function in Operation -
Illuminates Illuminates Illuminates

(Green) (Green) (Green)
Function in Operation (RH Side) -
Illuminates Illuminates
Off
(Green) (Green)
Function in Operation (LH Side) -
Illuminates Illuminates
Off
(Green) (Green)
Warning Operation (RH Side) Sounds
Illuminates
Off Blinks (Yellow)
(Green)
Warning Operation (LH Side) Sounds
Illuminates
Blinks (Yellow) Off
(Green)
No Lane Markers are Detected -
Illuminates
Off Off
(Green)
Temperature of lane departure warning

-
camera assembly is abnormal
Illuminates
Off Off
(Yellow)
Malfunction Occurred -
Illuminates Illuminates Illuminates

(Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: LANE DEPARTURE WARNING CAMERA;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING CAMERA

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The lane departure warning camera is mounted near the map light assembly and is used for the lane
departure alert system and automatic high beam system.
(b) The lane departure warning camera detects lane markers and calculates the radius to the center of the lane,
heading angle deviation, lateral deviation from the center of the lane and the lane width.
*1 Lens Portion *2 Lane Departure Warning Camera
HINT:
When one of the following operations is conducted, the lane departure warning camera angle must be
adjusted:
The lane departure warning camera is removed and reinstalled or replaced.
Parts relating to the tire or suspension are replaced or adjusted.
Strong force is applied onto the lane departure warning camera.
(c) By processing the road image data, the lane departure warning camera detects lane markers and calculates
the radius to the center of the lane, heading angle deviation, lateral deviation from the center of the lane and
the lane width.
Lane Departure Warning Camera Calculation
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: LDA MAIN SWITCH;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
LDA MAIN SWITCH

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Pressing the LDA main switch operates the lane departure alert system.
*1 Telltale Light Assembly *2 LDA Main Switch

Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The lane departure alert system uses a lane departure warning camera to detect lane markers on the
road surface and activates the lane departure warning when needed.
(b) The lane departure alert system also operates on roads with onlyone lane marker.
(c) The lane departure alert system is controlled by the lane departure warning camera.
2. PRECAUTION

(b) General Handling Precautions
(1) Use the lane departure alert system with clear lane markers.
(2) The lane departure alert system alerts the driver of unintentional deviation from the lane.
(3) Keep the windshield glass clean around the area where the lane departure warning camera is
mounted. The performance of lane departure warning camera assembly may be affected if dirt,
raindrops, condensation or snow is on the windshield glass.
(4) Do not attach stickers or labels, nor affix any ornaments to the windshield glass.
(5) Do not touch lens of the lane departure warning camera. Fingerprints left on the lens may cause
inaccurate detection or non-detection and lane markers may not be detected accurately.
(6) Do not remove the lane departure warning camera. Since the angle of the lane departure warning
camera assembly is precisely adjusted, angle adjustment must be performed after the lane departure
warning camera is reinstalled, otherwise the lane departure warning camera assembly may not
recognize lane markers properly.
(7) Do not subject the lane departure warning camera to strong forces.
(8) When the system detects a malfunction during lane departure alert system operation, the buzzer
sounds, the LDA main indicator light turns green to yellow, and the lane departure alert system
stops operating.
Since this does not interrupt normal driving, keep driving carefully.
When the engine is stopped and started again and the LDA main switch is turned on, the
lane departure alert system can be resumed as soon as the system returns to normal.
If the LDA main indicator light turns from green to yellow, even though these operations
are completed, the system is malfunctioning. Contact a dealer.
(9) Trailer towing may lead to performance decline.
(10) Changing tires (including changing to studless tires) or changing suspension parts may lead to a
decline in performance.
(c) Precautions Concerning Road Conditions
(1) If the system cannot recognize lane markers under the following conditions, the system will not
operate:
There are no lane markers on the road, for example, before tollgates
Unclear lane markers
The road surface reflects the bright sunlight
The road surface is a bright color, for example, concrete roads
Brightness changes suddenly, for example, tunnel entrances or exits
In backlight
Roads where gradient changes, on winding roads or on uneven road surfaces
In bad weather
Ice, snow or water puddles is on the road
(2) If the distance between vehicles is extremely short, lane markers may not be recognized correctly.
Maintain an appropriate distance between vehicles.
(3) When the vehicle is parked during hot weather, the system will not operate for a while after the
vehicle starts running. When the temperature in the cabin reaches the appropriate level at which the
lane departure warning camera can operate, the system can be resumed.
(d) Precautions for Lane Departure Alert System
(1) Keep the vehicle in the lane by turning the steering wheel appropriately and drive carefully.
The lane departure alert system does not prevent lane deviation. The system only alerts
the driver of lane deviation by displaying a warning message and sounding a buzzer.
When the alarm is activated, operate the steering wheel appropriately to guide the vehicle
back into the lane.
The alarm can be activated while the vehicle is running between approximately 50 km/h
(32 mph) and 220 km/h (138 mph).
(2) The alarm may be activated early or may not be activated depending on conditions around the
vehicle. The driver is required to operate the steering wheel to correct the vehicle path while paying
attention to road conditions and traffic.
When there are any strip-shaped patterns, such as shades, ruts or blurred lane markers
that are no longer used on the road, the system may mistakenly recognize them as lane
markers. Turn the LDA main switch off under such road surface conditions.
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: LANE DEPARTURE ALERT SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Rear Speed Sensor RH *2 Lane Departure Warning Camera
*3 Front Speed Sensor RH *4 ECM

*5 *6 Front Speed Sensor LH
Skid Control ECU
*7 Rear Speed Sensor LH - -

Telltale Light Assembly
*1 *2 Combination Meter Assembly
LDA Main Switch

*3 *4 Headlight Dimmer Switch Assembly
Body ECU)
*5 Yawrate Sensor *6 Skid Control Buzzer Assembly

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTH
Title: GF1A TRANSFER / 4WD / AWD: DYNAMIC TORQUE CONTROL AWD SYSTEM: FOUR WHEEL DRIVE CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Drive force input into the differential is redirected 90 degrees and output to the propeller
Transfer
shaft by the transfer.
Electromagnetic Control
Electromagnetic Distributes drive torque in accordance with the amperage applied by the 4WD ECU
Coupling (Transmission
Solenoid assembly.
Coupling Assembly)
Throttle Position Sensor Detects the throttle valve position and outputs it to the ECM.
Crankshaft Position Sensor Detects the engine speed and outputs it to the ECM.
Speed Sensor Detects the wheel speed of each wheel.
Steering Sensor Detects the direction and angle of the steering wheel.
Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Detects the shift position of the transaxle and outputs it to the ECM.
Stop Light Switch Assembly Detects when the brake pedal is depressed.
Parking Brake Switch Detects when the parking brake is applied.
Differential Lock Switch Switches between Auto (Sport) and Lock modes.
Sport Mode Switch Turns the Sport mode on and off.
Controls the amperage applied to the electromagnetic control coupling

solenoid based on signals provided by the ECUs, sensors and switches in order
to optimally distribute drive torque in accordance with driving conditions.
Turns AWD mode off when a parking brake on signal is received from the main
4WD ECU Assembly body ECU.
Turns AWD mode off when a shift position signal (P or N) is received from the
ECM.
Operates in cooperation with the skid control ECU to control the torque
distribution between the front and rear wheels.
Outputs signals such as the shift position signal, Sport mode signal, throttle position
ECM
signal and engine speed signal to the 4WD ECU assembly via CAN communication.
Outputs signals such as the vehicle speed signal and deceleration signal to the
4WD ECU assembly via CAN communication.
Skid Control ECU
Requests torque distribution between the front and rear wheels during
cooperative control with AWD.
Center Airbag Sensor Assembly

Detects the vehicle's yaw rate, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and sends the
Yawrate and Deceleration Sensor detection signals.
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network Body Outputs signals such as the parking brake signal to the 4WD ECU assembly via CAN
ECU) communication.
Differential Lock
Illuminates to inform the driver that AWD lock mode is engaged.
Indicator Light
Combination Meter
Sport Mode
Assembly Indicator Light Illuminates to inform the driver that Sport mode is engaged.
AWD Warning
Illuminates to warn the driver if a malfunction occurs in the AWD system.
Light
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) Auto Mode
(1) Starting Off
The system ensures start-off performance by optimally distributing engine drive torque to the front and rear wheels.
To prevent the tight corner braking phenomenon from occurring during low-speed cornering, the system reduces the
amount of torque distributed to the rear wheels.
*a Straightline Driving *b Low-speed Cornering
Torque Distribution to Rear Wheels - -
(2) Normal Driving
During normal driving, when the system judges that the vehicle is traveling steadily, it reduces the amount of
torque distribution to the rear wheels. This allows the vehicle to operate in conditions similar to front-wheel-drive,
improving fuel economy.
The system optimizes torque distribution to the rear wheels to ensure both excellent straightline acceleration
performance and excellent driving stability while cornering.
*a Steady Driving *b Straightline Acceleration
Torque Distribution to Rear Wheels - -

(b) Sport Mode
Torque distribution to the rear wheels is optimized to ensure operability and stability during turning by judging the
driver's driving operation and the vehicle's driving conditions in accordance with signals from each sensor.
(c) Lock Mode
When the vehicle is being driven in gravel or sand and more traction is required, the driver can select Lock mode by
operating the differential lock switch. Thus, this mode achieves optimal control in accordance with the driving conditions
and transmits as much drive torque as possible to the rear wheels, in a mode that is similar to the locked AWD mode.
(d) Engine Output Control
If there is a possibility that overdriving could damage the powertrain system, engine output may be restricted.
3. FAIL-SAFE
(a) When there is a possibility of causing damage to the drivetrain due to a malfunction in the AWD system or rough driving, the
system illuminates or blinks the AWD warning light to inform the driver and stops AWD control.
CONDITION AWD WARNING LIGHT
AWD system malfunction Illuminates
Pre-warning for stopping AWD control Slowly Blinkis

Rough driving in AWD mode
Stopping AWD control Quickly Blinkis
(1) When the 4WD ECU assembly judges that the vehicle has stabilized, it resumes AWD mode. If the AWD warning light blinks,
take the following actions without turning the engine off:
Decelerate the vehicle until the light goes out.

Stop the vehicle and wait until the light goes out.
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) Furthermore, the AWD warning light in the combination meter assembly illuminates to inform the driver.
(b) For details of the DTCs that are stored in 4WD ECU assembly memory, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTI
Title: GF1A TRANSFER / 4WD / AWD: DYNAMIC TORQUE CONTROL AWD SYSTEM: TRANSFER;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
TRANSFER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A side-to-side split transfer case made of aluminum is used to achieve a compact and lightweight
construction.
(b) A unit ball bearing is used for supporting the driven pinion gear to achieve a compact and lightweight
construction.
(c) The ring gear and the transfer ring gear mounting case are joined with splines to achieve a compact
construction.
(d) Drive force input into the differential is redirected 90 degrees and output to the propeller shaft by the
transfer.
(e) The offset between the transfer ring gear and the transfer driven pinion gear is increased, the distance
between the driven pinion bearings is reduced and a small-diameter ring gear mount bearing is used. As a
result, the transfer is easier to install.
*1 Transfer Case *2 Transfer Ring Gear Mounting Case

*3 Oil Seal *4 Unit Ball Bearing
*5 Transfer Driven Pinion Shaft *6 Transfer Driven Pinion Gear

*7 Drive Shaft *8 Transfer Cover
*9 Transfer Ring Gear - -
2. OPERATION
(a) Transfer Power Flow
(1) The illustration below shows the flow of power from the transaxle:
*1 Transaxle Differential Case *2 Transfer Ring Gear Mounting Case

*3 Transfer Ring Gear *4 Transfer Driven Pinion Gear
*5 Transfer Driven Pinion Shaft *6 Propeller Shaft
Power Flow - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTJ
Title: GF1A TRANSFER / 4WD / AWD: DYNAMIC TORQUE CONTROL AWD SYSTEM: ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTROL
COUPLING;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTROL COUPLING

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The electromagnetic control coupling consists of a front housing, main clutch, electromagnetic solenoid,
armature, control clutch, cam, piston and shaft.
(b) The outer sides of the main clutch and control clutch are coupled with the front housing. The inner side of the
main clutch is coupled with the shaft, and the inner side of the control clutch is coupled with the cam.
(c) The control clutch is a multiple metal plate type, and the main clutch is a multiple wet plate type.
HINT:
The electromagnetic control coupling cannot be disassembled. Replace the electromagnetic control coupling
assembly as a unit when performing replacement. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
*1 Front Housing *2 Shaft
*3 Piston *4 Armature
*5 Cam *6 Electromagnetic Solenoid
*7 Control Clutch *8 Main Clutch
Propeller Shaft Side - -
2. OPERATION
(a) Not Operating
(1) The drive force is transmitted from the propeller shaft to the front housing. When the electromagnetic
solenoid is not operating, the drive force of the front housing is not transmitted to the shaft because the
solenoid is not operating, the drive force of the front housing is not transmitted to the shaft because the
control clutch is not engaged. Accordingly, the drive force of the propeller shaft is not transmitted to the
rear wheels.

*3 Piston *4 Cam
*5 4WD ECU Assembly *6 Electromagnetic Solenoid
*7 Control Clutch *8 Armature
*9 Main Clutch - -
(b) Operating
(1) When the 4WD ECU Assembly energizes the electromagnetic solenoid, it attracts the armature to the
control clutch side. This causes the control clutch to engage and the cam to rotate.
(2) The rotational movement of the cam causes the piston to push on the main clutch, causing the main
clutch to engage. Accordingly, the drive force of the propeller shaft is transmitted to the rear wheels.
*3 Piston *4 Cam
*5 4WD ECU Assembly *6 Electromagnetic Solenoid
*7 Control Clutch *8 Armature
*9 Main Clutch - -
(3) The amount of drive force that is transmitted to the rear wheels is controlled steplessly by controlling the
amperage that is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid.
*1 4WD ECU Assembly - -
*a Low Amperage *b Piston Travel Distance
Control Clutch Engagement Force:
*c *d High Amperage
Small
Control Clutch Engagement Force:
*e Main Clutch Engagement Force: Large *f
Large
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTK
Title: GF1A TRANSFER / 4WD / AWD: DYNAMIC TORQUE CONTROL AWD SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A GF1A type transfer that is compact and lightweight is used on AWD models.
(b) A dynamic torque control AWD is used on AWD models.
(c) The dynamic torque control AWD is a compact, lightweight and high performance AWD system that
optimally controls the torque distribution to the front and rear wheels using an electromagnetic control
coupling in the rear differential.
(d) The AWD system performs control in cooperation with the brake control system. The 4WD ECU assembly
controls the drive torque distribution to the front and rear wheels in accordance with information
received from the skid control ECU. These controls ensure a smooth acceleration and driving stability. For
details, see the Brake Control/Dynamic Control Systems section.
2. SPECIFICATION
Transfer Type GF1A
Gear Type Hypoid Gear
Gear Ratio 0.439
Transfer Ring Gear The No. of Teeth 41
Transfer Driven Pinion Gear The No. of Teeth 18
Oil Viscosity SAE 75W-85
Oil Grade API GL-5
Oil Capacity 0.45 Liters (0.48 US qts, 0.41 Imp. qts)
Weight (Reference)* 11 kg (24.9 lb)
HINT:
*: The weight shown is the weight of the part fully filled without fluid.
3. MAIN FEATURES
(a) Based on information provided by various sensors, the 4WD ECU assembly controls the amperage applied
to the electromagnetic control coupling in order to transmit an appropriate amount of drive torque to the
rear wheels when needed. The following describes the features and benefits of the dynamic torque
control AWD:
FEATURE OUTLINE
Traction Performance Achieves stable start-off and acceleration performance.
Driving Stability
Achieves stable cornering performance.
Performance
Achieves better fuel economy by transmitting drive torque to the rear wheels when
Fuel Economy
needed, in the amount needed.
(b) A differential lock switch has been provided. This enables the driver to select between the Auto and Lock
modes by operating the switch. The system optimally controls the torque distribution to the front and
rear wheels in the respective modes.
MODE DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL OUTLINE

LOCK SWITCH LOCK
INDICATOR
LIGHT
Optimally distributes drive torque to the front and rear

wheels.
Ensures optimal start-off performance during a start-off
based on information provided by various sensors.
Suppresses the tight corner braking phenomenon*
Auto Off Off
during low-speed cornering.
Reduces the amount of torque distribution to the rear
wheels and improves fuel economy when the system
judges that the vehicle is traveling steadily.
Disengages the AWD during braking deceleration.
Distributes the maximum torque limit to the rear wheels.

Distributes the maximum torque limit to the rear wheels
during start-off.
Lock On On Distributes optimal torque during low-speed cornering.
Disengages the AWD during braking deceleration.
Disengages Lock mode and transfers to Auto mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph).
HINT:
*: Tight corner braking phenomenon: a phenomenon in which a AWD vehicle may lurch and decelerate
due to a rotational speed difference between the front and rear wheels, such as during low-speed
cornering in AWD mode.
(c) A Sport mode switch has been provided. This enables the driver to select Sport mode by operating the
switch. The 4WD ECU assembly performs cooperative control with the skid control ECU, ECM and power
steering ECU assembly in addition to AWD control when in Auto mode, thus regulating torque
distribution to the front and rear wheels in order to ensure operability and stability during sporty driving.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTL
Title: GF1A TRANSFER / 4WD / AWD: DYNAMIC TORQUE CONTROL AWD SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTM
Title: GF1A TRANSFER / 4WD / AWD: DYNAMIC TORQUE CONTROL AWD SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Speed Sensor *2 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly

Electromagnetic Control Coupling
(Transmission Coupling Assembly)
*3 *4
Skid Control ECU
Electromagnetic Solenoid
*5 ECM *6 Transfer
*1 Differential Lock Indicator Light *2 Sport Mode Indicator Light
*3 AWD Warning Light *4 Combination Meter Assembly

*5 *6 DLC3
Body ECU)
*7 Stop Light Switch Assembly *8 Differential Lock Switch
*9 Steering Sensor *10 Parking Brake Switch
*11 Center Airbag Sensor Assembly *12 Sport Mode Switch

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTR
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Front Drive Shaft
(1) A tripod type Constant-Velocity Joint (CVJ) is used on the front differential side, and a Rzeppa type CVJ is
used on the front axle side.
(2) A dynamic damper is provided to reduce vibration and noise.
TMC Made with U760E Automatic Transaxle
*1 Rzeppa Type CVJ *2 Tripod Type CVJ
*3 Dynamic Damper - -
*a LH Side *b RH Side
Front Axle Side Front Differential Side
TMC Made with U760F Automatic Transaxle

TMMC Made with U760E Automatic Transaxle

TMMC Made with U760F Automatic Transaxle

(b) Rear Drive Shaft (AWD Models)
(1) A tripod type Constant-Velocity Joint (CVJ) is used on the rear differential side, and a Rzeppa type CVJ is
used on the rear axle side. Both the right and left have the same length to ensure straightline stability.
*1 Tripod Type CVJ *2 Rzeppa Type CVJ
Rear Differential Side Rear Axle Side

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTS
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: PROPELLER SHAFT SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Rear Propeller Shaft (AWD Models)
(1) A 3-joint, 2-shaft type propeller shaft is used.
(2) A tripod type Constant-Velocity Joint (CVJ), which is more compact and lightweight than the conventional
cross-groove type CVJ, is used for the center CVJ. Furthermore, a compact and lightweight shell-cap type
joint is used at each end.
*1 Shell-cap Type Joint *2 Tripod Type CVJ
*3 Center Bearing - -
Transfer Side Rear Differential Side

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTT
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: AXLE SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) Front Axle
(1) Compact and highly rigid double-row angular ball bearings are used. The double-row angular ball bearings
and the axle hub are integrated to ensure high rigidity, thus achieving excellent driving stability and
braking stability.
(2) The speed sensor rotor is integrated in the bearing inner race.
(3) A 12-point lock nut is used and staked in order to ensure that the axle hub is properly tightened. Once
removed, this nut cannot be reused.
*1 Double-row Angular Ball Bearing *2 Speed Sensor Rotor
*3 Lock Nut (12-point) *4 Front Axle Hub
NOTICE:
Do not place magnetized objects close to the surface of the sensor rotor.
Do not allow any iron particles, iron sand, dust, debris or oil to come in contact with the surface of the sensor
rotor.
(b) Rear Axle
(1) Compact and highly rigid double-row angular ball bearings are used. The double-row angular ball bearings
and the axle hub are integrated to ensure high rigidity, thus achieving excellent driving stability and
braking stability.
(3) A 12-point lock nut is used on the AWD models and staked in order to ensure that the axle hub is properly
tightened. Once removed, this nut cannot be reused.
*A 2WD Models *B AWD Models
*1 Speed Sensor *2 Speed Sensor Rotor

*3 Rear Axle Hub *4 Double-row Angular Ball Bearing
*5 Lock Nut (12-point) - -
NOTICE:
Do not place magnetized objects close to the surface of the sensor rotor.
Do not allow any iron particles, iron sand, dust, debris or oil to come in contact with the surface of the sensor
rotor.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTU
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM: REAR DIFFERENTIAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The electromagnetic control coupling is placed in front of the differential.
(b) A differential carrier and a differential retainer made of aluminum are used for weight reduction.
*1 Rear Differential Retainer *2 Rear Differential Case

*3 Rear Drive Shaft *4 Ring Gear
*5 Pinion Gear *6 Side Gear

*7 Rear Differential Carrier *8 Rear Drive Pinion
Electromagnetic Control Coupling
*9 - -
Portion
2. OPERATION
(a) Rear Differential Power Flow
(1) The illustration below shows the flow of power transmitted from the propeller shaft assembly:
*1 Propeller Shaft *2 Front Housing
*3 Main Clutch *4 Shaft
*5 Drive Pinion *6 Ring Gear

*7 Differential Case *8 Pinion Shaft
*9 Pinion Gear *10 Side Gear
*11 Rear Drive Shaft - -
Power Flow - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTV
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM: DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) 3-point support is given by the differential support through the cushion mount, thus reducing vibration and
noise.
(b) A differential support made of aluminum is used for weight reduction.
*1 Differential Support FR *2 Differential Support FL

*3 Differential Support RR - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTW
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A compact and lightweight FD13A differential with an integrated electromagnetic control coupling is used
on AWD models.
(b) The electromagnetic control coupling is controlled by the 4WD ECU assembly. The electromagnetic
control coupling controls the amount of drive torque transferred to the rear wheels.
2. SPECIFICATION
Rear Differential
Differential Type FD13A
Gear Type Hypoid Gear
Differential Gear Ratio 2.277
Drive Pinion No. of Teeth 18
Ring Gear No. of Teeth 41
No. of Differential Pinion 2
Oil Viscosity SAE 75W-85
Oil Grade API GL-5
Oil Capacity 0.5 Liters (0.5 US qts, 0.4 Imp. qts)
Weight (Reference) 17 kg (37.7 lb)

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SHOCK ABSORBER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SHOCK ABSORBER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A low-pressure (N 2 ) gas sealed front shock absorber assembly is used to achieve both driving stability and
riding comfort.
(b) Internal friction has been reduced, thus allowing the absorber rod to move smoothly.
(c) The initial characteristic of the rebound stopper is set soft in order to ensure comfort when driving over a
bump.
HINT:
To prevent hazardous conditions, make sure to empty the gas from the front shock absorber assembly before
discarding the low-pressure (N 2 ) gas sealed in the front shock absorber assembly. For details, refer to the
Repair Manual.
*1 Oil Seal *2 Absorber Rod

*3 Rebound Stopper *4 Piston Valve
*5 Base Valve - -
Oil Low-pressure (N 2 ) Gas
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTY
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SUSPENSION ARM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SUSPENSION ARM
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A lightweight and highly rigid closed cross-section type front lower suspension arm sub-assembly is used.
(b) The installation points and the characteristics of the No. 1 and the No. 2 bushes have been optimized to
achieve excellent ride comfort and steering characteristics.
No. 2 Bush (Outer Tube Adhesion

*1 No. 1 Bush (without Outer Tube Type) *2
Type)
Front Lower Suspension Arm Sub-

*3 *4 Front Lower Ball Joint Assembly
assembly
Front - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PTZ
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: STABILIZER BAR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STABILIZER BAR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The front stabilizer bar is hollow, reducing the weight.
(b) A ball joint is used at both ends of the front stabilizer link assembly. As a result, the ball joint performs
effectively even for slight rolling and maintains a stable roll feeling.
(c) The surface of the front stabilizer bar bush installed in the front suspension cross member sub-assembly has a
saddle shape. This construction, which is embedded into the cross section of the front suspension cross
member sub-assembly, ensures excellent support rigidity.
(d) The front stabilizer bar bush is provided with a dust lip to prevent sand from entering.
(e) The front stabilizer bar bush has a dual construction using the following materials: an outer layer made of
high rigidity ordinary rubber and an inner layer made of low rigidity self-lubricating rubber. Thus, high rolling
rigidity and easy installation are achieved. To reduce friction, a fluorine coating is provided in the bore
diameter of the front stabilizer bar bush.
*1 Ball Joint *2 Front Stabilizer Link Assembly
*3 Front Stabilizer Bar Bush *4 Front Stabilizer Bar

*5 Front Suspension Cross Member Sub- *6 Inner Layer (Low Rigidity Self-
assembly lubricating Rubber)
Outer Layer (High Rigidity Ordinary
*7 *8 Fluorine Coating
Rubber)
*9 Dust Lip - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PU0
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SUSPENSION SUPPORT;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
SUSPENSION SUPPORT
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Separate Input Construction Type
(1) A separate input construction type suspension upper support is used. This construction transmits only the
inputs from the shock absorber assembly and the front spring bumper to the body via the suspension
support sub-assembly. Thus, the suspension upper support achieves superior quietness and ride comfort
performance.
The input is transmitted from the front coil spring to the body via the strut mounting bearing.
Because the front suspension support sub-assembly receives no input from the front coil spring,
the rubber can be softened, thus achieving superior quietness and ride comfort.
Through the use of urethane, the front spring bumper has been given a nonlinear stiffness
characteristic (the bumper becomes progressively stiffer during operation), thus both ensuring
rolling rigidity during steering and achieving ride comfort.
*1 Front Coil Spring *2 Front Shock Absorber Assembly

*3 Front Spring Bumper *4 Strut Mounting Bearing
Front Suspension Support Sub-
*5 - -
assembly
Front Shock Absorber Assembly Input Front Spring Bumper Input

Front Shock Absorber Assembly Input Front Spring Bumper Input
Front Coil Spring Input - -

Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: COIL SPRING;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
COIL SPRING
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) By optimizing the spring constant of the coil spring, an excellent operational stability is ensured.
(b) A pigtail type front coil spring with differing top and bottom diameters is used, creating a compact and
lightweight construction.
(c) The center axis of the front coil spring is slanted toward the outside of the vehicle compared to the center axis
of the front shock absorber assembly. As a result, friction and lateral force applied to the front shock absorber
assembly are reduced.
*a Pigtail Shape *b Shock Absorber Axis
*c Coil Spring Axis - -

Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A rigid and compact MacPherson strut type independent suspension is used.
(b) Through the optimal allocation and characteristics of components, the front suspension ensures
excellent riding comfort and controllability.
(c) The suspension geometry has been optimized to achieve excellent driving stability and riding comfort.
(d) The rolling rigidity has been optimized to achieve excellent vehicle stability.
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
Front Suspension Support Sub-

*1 *2 Front Coil Spring
assembly
*3 Front Shock Absorber Assembly *4 Steering Knuckle

Front Lower Suspension Arm Sub-
*5 *6 Front Stabilizer Bar Bush
assembly
*7 Front Stabilizer Bar *8 Front Stabilizer Link Assembly

Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SHOCK ABSORBER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SHOCK ABSORBER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A low-pressure (N 2 ) gas sealed rear shock absorber assembly is used to achieve both driving stability and ride
comfort.
(b) Internal friction has been reduced, thus allowing the absorber rod to move smoothly.
(c) The spring characteristics of the absorber bush have been optimized, thus achieving a high-quality ride
comfort.
HINT:
To prevent hazardous conditions, make sure to empty the gas from the rear shock absorber assembly before
discarding the low-pressure (N 2 ) gas sealed in the rear shock absorber assembly. For details, refer to the
Repair Manual.
*1 Oil Seal *2 Piston Valve

*3 Base Valve *4 Absorber Rod
Oil Low-pressure (N 2 ) Gas
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SUSPENSION ARM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SUSPENSION ARM
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The rear trailing arm assembly, upper control arm assembly and No. 2 rear suspension arm assembly use
stamped high-strength sheet steel to achieve weight reduction and high rigidity.
(b) The rear trailing arm assembly uses a bush with an outer tube in order to counter the longitudinal force
effectively and achieve excellent ride comfort.
(c) The upper control arm assembly, No. 1 rear suspension arm assembly and No. 2 rear suspension arm
assembly use bushes with outer tubes on their suspension member sides and ball bushes on their axle sides,
to ensure a high level of support rigidity.
Cross Section of Rear Trailing Arm

*a *b Suspension Member Side
Assembly Installation Area
*c Axle Side *d Cross Section of No. 1 Rear Suspension
Arm Assembly Installation Area
Cross Section of No. 2 Rear Suspension Cross Section of Rear Upper Control
*e *f
Arm Assembly Installation Area Arm Assembly Installation Area
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: STABILIZER BAR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STABILIZER BAR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A highly rigid, solid type rear stabilizer bar is used. The spring constant of the stabilizer bar is set to optimize
the distribution of rolling rigidity between the front and rear of the vehicle, thus achieving a stable vehicle
posture during turning and ensuring a smooth steering feeling.
(b) A ball joint is used between the rear stabilizer link assembly and the rear stabilizer bar. As a result, the ball
joint performs effectively even for slight rolling and maintains a stable roll feeling.
(c) The space between the rear stabilizer link assembly and No. 2 rear suspension arm assembly is cushion-
structured.
(d) A self-lubricating rubber type rear stabilizer bar bush is used. To reduce friction, a fluorine coating is provided
in the bore diameter of the rear stabilizer bar bush.
*1 Rear Stabilizer Link Assembly *2 Rear Stabilizer Bar Bush
*3 Self-lubricating Rubber *4 Fluorine Coating
*5 Rear Stabilizer Bar - -
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: COIL SPRING;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
COIL SPRING
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) By optimizing the spring constant of the coil spring, an excellent operational stability is ensured.
(b) Both ends of the coil spring are pigtail-shaped, and made compact and lightweight.
(c) An insulator is provided at both the upper and lower ends to achieve a high level of vibration isolation
performance and ride comfort.
*1 Rear Coil Spring Upper Insulator *2 Rear Coil Spring Lower Insulator
*a Pigtail Shape - -
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A rigid and compact double-wishbone type independent suspension is used.
(b) The shock absorbers have been placed under the floor and the coil springs have been placed low to
achieve a more spacious cargo area and a lower floor.
(c) The suspension geometry has been optimized to achieve excellent driving stability and ride comfort.
(d) The rolling rigidity has been optimized to achieve excellent vehicle stability.
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Rear Upper Control Arm Assembly *2 No. 1 Rear Suspension Arm Assembly
*3 No. 2 Rear Suspension Arm Assembly *4 Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
*5 Rear Trailing Arm Assembly *6 Rear Axle Carrier Sub-assembly

*7 Rear Spring Bumper *8 Rear Stabilizer Bar
*9 Rear Coil Spring - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUB
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND
TRANSMITTER;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are integrated in the tire valves. Each tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter consists of a lithium battery, sensor and transmitter.
(b) Make sure not to damage the urethane-covered backside of the transmitter (the surface opposite to the side
with the ID code) with anything sharp.*
*: Models with transmitter supplied by Pacific Industrial Co., Ltd
(c) The transmitter directly measures tire inflation pressure and temperature to see if the vehicle can continue to
run.
(d) The transmitter transmits the measured tire inflation pressure and temperature values to the tire pressure
warning antenna at a frequency of 314.98 MHz.
(e) Depending on the timing of the data transmission, it may take several minutes to receive the data from the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
(f) The ID code is written on the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
Models with Transmitter Supplied by Models with Transmitter Supplied by
*A *B
Pacific Industrial Co., Ltd TRW Automotive
Tire Pressure Warning Valve and

*1 *2 Grommet
Transmitter
*3 Washer *4 Nut
*5 Tire Valve Core *6 Cap
*7 Lithium Battery *8 Sensor and Transmitter
*9 ID Code (7 Digit Hexadecimal) - -
HINT:
The lithium batteries of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter are non-replaceable. If the lithium
battery is depleted, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter must be replaced (battery life:
approximately 10 years).
When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, the ID codes of each tire pressure warning
valve and transmitters must be registered. If even one of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters is
replaced, the ID codes of all tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be registered again. Record all
existing ID codes before beginning the process to enter new ID codes.
To register an ID codes, use the Techstream to enter the ID codes that are indicated on the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter.
Be careful not to damage the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters when removing and reinstalling
them.
Replace the grommet, valve core, washer and nut with new ones when replacing or removing and reinstalling
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. This is necessary to ensure sealing performance.
When replacing a valve cap, use only the specified cap. If an unspecified cap is used, it may seize to the tire
pressure warning valve and transmitter.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUC
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A direct-sensing type tire pressure warning system is used for some models.
(b) Since tire pressure decreases over time, regular adjustments are necessary. When the tire pressure
warning system detects that the pressure of a tire has dropped lower than the warning threshold, it will
illuminate the tire pressure warning light to warn the driver.
(c) The 5 tire pressure warning valve and transmitters each send the tire inflation pressure, temperature
and ID code information to the tire pressure warning ECU and receiver.*
*: Models with full size spare tire (models with compact size spare tire or puncture repair kit have 4
tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.)
(d) The tire pressure warning ECU and receiver, which consists of a receiver and an ECU, monitors the tire
pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire pressure in each of the 5 tires including the
spare tire*.
HINT:
*: The spare tire is not included on models without full size spare tire.
(e) The operation of the tire pressure warning system includes a warning function, initial check function,
initialization function and diagnosis function.
(f) The transmission cycle with which the information is sent from the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter to the tire pressure warning ECU and receiver is determined as follows based on the travel
mode and the acceleration sensor built into each tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Since the
acceleration sensor is used only to determine if the vehicle is being driven, the value of rotational
acceleration is not sent to the tire pressure warning ECU and receiver.
SUPPLIER TRAVEL MODE TRANSMISSION CYCLE
While stopping*1 1 time / 1.5 min

Pacific Industrial Co., Ltd
While traveling*2 4 times / 1 min
TRW Automotive - 4 times / 3 min
HINT:
*1: When G that is applied to the acceleration sensor is less than 8 G.
*2: When G that is applied to the acceleration sensor is 8 G or greater.
2. PRECAUTION
The expressions listed in the table below are used in this section:
Ignition Switch Off LOCK Off (Lock)
(b) The system is disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal, the system will
work properly):
(1) When all of the tires and wheels that have tire pressure warning valve and transmitters registered
with the tire pressure warning ECU and receiver have not been installed.
(2) When all of the transmitter ID codes are not registered with the tire pressure warning ECU and
receiver.
(3) When the tire pressure is extremely high [380 kPa (55 psi, 3.9 bar) or more].
(4) When the transmitter battery is depleted (battery life: approximately 10 years).
(c) The system may become disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly):
(1) When electric devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
(2) When a wireless device or other equipment operating at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle.
(3) When a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
(4) When there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.
(5) When non-genuine wheels are used.
(6) When tire chains are used.
(7) When a tire repair sealant is used.
(8) The spare tire is not within the receivable range of the tire pressure warning ECU and receiver.*
(9) A large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception has been put in the luggage
compartment.*
*: Models with full size spare tire
(d) The tire pressure warning system may not function properly if a tire repair sealant has been used to
repair a flat tire. If this type of sealant has been used, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
should be replaced with a new one after repairing or replacing the tire.
(e) The tire pressure warning light may illuminate due to natural pressure loss caused by air passing
through the tires or by changes in tire pressure caused by temperature fluctuations. When adjusting tire
pressure, please be aware of the driving conditions and temperature conditions. The tire pressure
warning light is prone to illuminate especially in late fall and during winter.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUD
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUE
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*A Models with Full Size Spare Tire - -

Tire Pressure Warning Valve and Tire Pressure Warning ECU and
*1 *2
Transmitter Receiver
*1 Tire Pressure Warning Light *2
Body ECU)
*3 DLC3 *4 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUF
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) 2 sizes of tire are available.
(b) 1 type of steel disc wheel and 2 types of aluminum disc wheels are available.
(c) A compact spare tire and full size spare tire spare tire are available.
2. SPECIFICATION
Tire and Wheel
Tire Size 225/65R17
Disc Wheel Size 17 x 6 1/2 J
Disc Wheel Material Steel
Pitch Circle Diameter 114.3 mm (4.50 in.)
Inset 39 mm (1.54 in.)
Wheel Cap Full Wheel Cap
Wheel Cap Design
Tire Size 225/65R17
Disc Wheel Size 17 x 7 J
Disc Wheel Material Aluminum
Wheel Cap Center Ornament

Wheel Design
Tire Size 235/55R18
Disc Wheel Size 18 x 7 1/2 J
Disc Wheel Material Aluminum
Wheel Cap Center Ornament
Wheel Design
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUG
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: BRAKE CONTROL;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
BRAKE CONTROL
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Solenoid Relay
(Built into Skid Supplies power to the solenoid valves.
Control ECU)
Motor Relay (Built

into Skid Control Supplies power to the pump motor.
ECU)
Brake Motor Cut Relay

Actuator (Built into Skid Cuts the power to the pump motor when the motor relay malfunctions.
Assembly Control ECU)
Change the fluid path based on the signals from the skid control ECU during the
Solenoid Valves operation of the brake control system functions in order to control the fluid
pressure applied to the wheel cylinders.
Pump Motor Drives the pumps inside the brake actuator.
Master Cylinder
Detects the master cylinder pressure.
Pressure Sensor
Speed Sensors Detect the wheel speed of each of the 4 wheels.
Steering Sensor Detects the steering direction and angle of the steering wheel.
Stop Light Switch Assembly Detects the brake pedal depressing signal.
Parking Brake Switch Assembly Detects the parking brake lever status.
Brake Fluid Level Warning

Detects the brake fluid level.
Switch
VSC OFF Switch (Traction

Enables the driver to select normal mode, TRAC OFF mode or VSC OFF mode.
Control Switch)
Judges the vehicle driving condition based on the signals from each
ECU, sensor and switch, and sends the brake control signals to the
Skid Control ECU (Built into brake actuator.
Brake Actuator Assembly) Requests steering torque assist during cooperative control with EPS.
Requests torque distribution between the front and rear wheels during
cooperative control with AWD.*1
Outputs signals such as the shift position signal, Sport mode signal,
Outputs signals such as the shift position signal, Sport mode signal,
throttle position signal and engine speed signal to the skid control ECU
ECM
via CAN communication.
Controls the engine output based on the signals from the skid control
ECU.
Operates in cooperation with the skid control ECU to control the steering assist
Power Steering ECU Assembly
torque.
Operates in cooperation with the skid control ECU to control the torque
4WD ECU Assembly*1
distribution between the front and rear wheels.

Detects the vehicle's yaw rate, longitudinal and lateral acceleration, and sends
Yawrate and
the detection signals.
Deceleration Sensor
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Outputs signals such as the parking brake signal to the skid control ECU via CAN
Network Body ECU) communication.
Illuminates to alert the driver when the skid control ECU detects a
malfunction in the EBD or brake system.
Brake Warning
Illuminates to alert the driver when the brake fluid level is low.
Light
Illuminates to inform the driver when the parking brake lever is pulled
up.
ABS Warning Illuminates to alert the driver when the skid control ECU detects a malfunction
Light in the ABS.
Blinks to inform the driver when the Auto LSD*2, TRAC or VSC is
Slip Indicator operational.
Combination Light Illuminates to alert the driver when the skid control ECU detects a
Meter malfunction in the brake control function.
Assembly
Auto LSD
Illuminates to inform the driver when Auto LSD is available.
Indicator Light*2
TRAC OFF Illuminates to inform the driver when TRAC OFF Mode or VSC OFF Mode is
Indicator Light*1 selected.
VSC OFF Indicator

Illuminates to inform the driver when VSC OFF Mode is selected.
Light
Sport Mode
Illuminates to inform the driver that Sport mode engaged.
Indicator Light
Emits a warning sound to alert the driver when driving while the parking brake is
Buzzer
applied.
*1: AWD models

*2: 2WD models
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
Electronic Control of Brake Control System
CONTROL OUTLINE
Anti-lock Brake The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied firmly or when
System (ABS) braking on a slippery surface.
Electronic Brake The EBD control utilizes ABS, achieving proper brake force distribution between the front and
Force rear wheels in accordance with the driving conditions. In addition, during braking while
Distribution cornering, the EBD also controls the brake forces of the right and left wheels, helping maintain
(EBD) vehicle behavior.
The primary purpose of brake assist is to provide an auxiliary brake force to assist a driver who
cannot generate a large brake force during emergency braking, thus helping ensure the
vehicle's braking performance.
Brake Assist
If the brake booster malfunctions and the skid control ECU judges that the brake pedal force
applied by the driver is not sufficient to ensure adequate braking force, brake assist is used to
enhance the braking force.
The Auto LSD uses a TRAC to achieve Limited Slip Differential (LSD) capability. The Auto LSD
Auto LSD allows for greater traction control than the TRAC, ensuring startability and traction on sand or
other road surfaces that present high degrees of drive resistance.
Traction Control The TRAC helps restrain the slippage of the drive wheels if the driver depresses the accelerator
(TRAC) pedal excessively when starting off or accelerating on a slippery surface.
Vehicle Stability The VSC helps restrain sideways slippage of the vehicle during a strong front wheel skid or a
Control (VSC) strong rear wheel skid, such as may occur while cornering.
Cooperative
Control with This performs cooperative control with the power steering ECU assembly in order to provide
Electric Power steering assist in accordance with the operating conditions of the vehicle.
Steering (EPS)
Cooperative
This performs cooperative control with the 4WD ECU assembly in order to control the drive
Control with
torque of the front and rear wheels in accordance with the operating conditions of the vehicle.
AWD System
(a) Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(1) The ABS prevents the wheels from locking during sudden braking or braking on a slippery surface. The
ABS provides the proper braking force when the vehicle slips, thus ensuring vehicle stability and excellent
braking performance.
*A With ABS *B Without ABS
*a Brake Operation - -
(b) Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

(1) The EBD controls the brake force that acts on the rear wheels in accordance with the changes in the
vehicle conditions such as load factors or deceleration in order to ensure excellent braking performance.
(2) During braking while cornering, this function controls the brake force that acts on the left and right
wheels in accordance with the vehicle conditions at that time. This ensures vehicle stability and excellent
braking performance.
Brake Force Control Moment
(c) Brake Assist

(1) In the brake assist, the skid control ECU calculates the speed and the amount of the brake pedal
application based on the signals from the master cylinder pressure sensor and then determines the
intention of the driver to make an emergency brake application. If the skid control ECU determines that
the driver intends to make an emergency brake application, this function activates the brake actuator to
increase the brake fluid pressure, which increases the brake force.
(d) Auto LSD
(1) The Auto LSD achieves the equivalent functions of a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) through the use of a
traction control function. For this reason, the contents of the brake control are the same in both the Auto
LSD and TRAC. When the driver presses the Auto LSD switch, this function achieves the LSD effect by
regulating the hydraulic pressure that acts on the drive wheels and controlling the engine output in
accordance with the amount of pedal effort applied on the accelerator.
(2) The TRAC enhances the start-off performance of the vehicle during low-resistance surface conditions, such
as snow or mud, by restricting the acceleration effort during a start-off in order to prevent the wheels
from spinning.
(3) On the other hand, the Auto LSD tends to enhance the acceleration effort somewhat in order to apply
greater drive torque to the wheel when it is in contact with the ground. Thus, this function helps the
vehicle to become unstuck if a wheel loses its grip, and enhances the vehicle's start-off performance on
high-resistance surface such as gravel roads.
*A With Auto LSD *B Without Auto LSD
*1 Brake Actuator *2 Skid Control ECU
*3 ECM *4 VSC OFF Switch

*a Traction *b No Traction
*c Braking *d Slipping
(e) Traction Control (TRAC)
(1) The TRAC helps prevent the drive wheels from slipping if the driver depresses the accelerator pedal
excessively when starting off or accelerating on a slippery surface. Simultaneously with the hydraulic
brake control of the drive wheels, the skid control ECU makes a request to the ECM to effect engine
output control. This produces the drive force that suits the driving conditions in order to ensure the proper
start-off acceleration.
*A Without TRAC *B With TRAC
*C AWD Models - -
*1 Engine *2 ECM
*3 Skid Control ECU *4 Brake Actuator
*a Slippery Surface *b Engine Output Control
*c Brake Slipping Drive Wheel - -
(f) Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
(1) The following are 2 examples that can be considered circumstances in which the tires exceed their lateral
grip limit. The VSC is designed to help control the vehicle behavior by controlling the engine output and
the brakes at each wheel when the vehicle is under one of the conditions indicated below:
*a Front Wheel Skid Tendency *b Rear Wheel Skid Tendency
(2) To determine the condition of the vehicle, sensors detect the steering angle, vehicle speed, vehicle's yaw
rate and vehicle's lateral acceleration, which are then calculated by the skid control ECU.
(3) Whether or not the vehicle is experiencing a front wheel skid is determined by the difference between the
target yaw rate and the vehicle's actual yaw rate. When the vehicle's actual yaw rate is smaller than the
target yaw rate (a target yaw rate is determined based on the vehicle speed and steering angle) that
should be generated when the driver operates the steering wheel, it means the vehicle is making a turn
at a greater angle than the target locus of travel. Thus, the skid control ECU determines that there is a
large front wheel skid tendency.
Actual Locus of Travel (Actual Yaw Locus of Travel Based on Target Yaw
*a *b
Rate) Rate
(4) Whether or not the vehicle is experiencing a rear wheel skid is determined by the values of the vehicle's
slip angle and the vehicle's slip angular velocity (time-dependent changes in the vehicle's slip angle).
When the vehicle's slip angle is large and the slip angular velocity is also large, the skid control ECU
determines that the vehicle has a large rear wheel skid tendency.
Direction of Travel of Vehicle's Center
*a *b Movement of Vehicle
of Gravity
Slip Angle - -
(5) When the skid control ECU determines that the vehicle exhibits a tendency to experience a front wheel
skid or a rear wheel skid, it decreases the engine output and applies the brakes of the front or rear wheels
to control the vehicle's yaw moment. The basic operation of the VSC is described below. However, the
control method differs depending on the vehicle's characteristics and driving conditions.
(6) When the skid control ECU determines that there is a large front wheel skid tendency, it takes
countermeasures in accordance with the extent of that tendency. The skid control ECU controls the
engine output and applies the brakes of the front wheels and the rear wheel on the inner circle of the
turn in order to help restrain the front wheel skid tendency.
Front Wheel Skid Tendency
*a Making a Right Turn - -
(7) When the skid control ECU determines that there is a large rear wheel skid tendency, it takes
countermeasures in accordance with the extent of that tendency. The skid control ECU applies the brakes
of the wheels on the outer circle of the turn and generates an outward moment of inertia in the vehicle in
of the wheels on the outer circle of the turn and generates an outward moment of inertia in the vehicle in
order to restrain the rear wheel skid tendency. Along with the reduction in the vehicle speed caused by
the braking force, excellent vehicle stability is ensured.
Rear Wheel Skid Tendency
(g) Cooperative Control with EPS
(1) Braking when Surface Resistance Differs between Both Sides of Wheels
If the driver suddenly applies the brakes on a road surface with a considerable difference in
friction coefficient between the right and left wheels, the difference in the brake force between
the right and left wheels will cause the vehicle posture to become unstable and create a yaw
moment. In this state, the skid control ECU controls the VSC to stabilize the vehicle posture. At
the same time, the skid control ECU performs cooperative control with the EPS to provide
steering torque assist, which facilitates the driver's steering maneuvers to stabilize the vehicle
posture.
*a Assist Direction *b Yaw Moment during Brake Control
*c Low μ Road *d High μ Road
Brake Force - -
(2) Accelerating when Surface Resistance Differs between Both Sides of Wheels
If the driver suddenly starts off or accelerates on a road surface with a considerable difference in
friction coefficient between the right and left wheels, the slippage of a drive wheel will cause the
vehicle posture to become unstable and negatively affect its acceleration performance. In this
state, the skid control ECU causes the TRAC to control the hydraulic brake of the slipping drive
wheel, and requests the ECM to effect engine output control. At the same time, the skid control
ECU performs cooperative control with the EPS to provide steering torque assist, which facilitates
the driver's steering maneuvers to stabilize the vehicle posture.
*a Assist Direction *b Yaw Moment during Acceleration
*c Low μ Road *d High μ Road
Drive Force - -
(3) Front Wheel Skid Tendency
When the skid control ECU determines a front wheel skid tendency, it controls the VSC to
dampen the front wheel skid. At the same time, the skid control ECU performs the cooperative
control with the EPS to provide steering torque assists, which controls the driver's steering
maneuvers to stabilize the vehicle posture. Steering torque assists are provided to inform the
maneuvers to stabilize the vehicle posture. Steering torque assists are provided to inform the
driver of the front wheel skid (a), and to prevent the driver's excessive turning of the steering
wheel (b). In the assist for preventing excessive turning (b), the skid control ECU increases the
resistance to counter the driver's steering effort, if the driver turns the steering wheel
excessively.
(a) Assist Direction for Informing (b) Assist Direction for Preventing
*a *b
Driver of Front Wheel Skid Excessive Turning
*c Making a Right Turn - -
(4) Rear Wheel Skid Tendency
When the skid control ECU determines a rear wheel skid tendency, it controls the VSC to
dampen the rear wheel skid. At the same time, the skid control ECU performs cooperative
control with the EPS to provide steering torque assist, which facilitates the driver's steering
maneuvers in the direction to correct the rear wheel skid.
*a Assist Direction *b Making a Right Turn
(h) Cooperative Control with AWD System
(1) Acceleration During Cornering
A sudden acceleration of the vehicle during cornering may cause a drive wheel to freewheel,
which could cause the front wheels or rear wheels to skid. If the skid control ECU determines
the freewheeling of a drive wheel, a front wheel skid tendency or a rear wheel skid tendency, it
performs cooperative control with the AWD system to optimally control the drive torque
distribution to the front and rear wheels. Furthermore, the skid control ECU controls the TRAC
and the VSC as needed to ensure driving stability and acceleration performance.
Front Wheel Skid Tendency
Drive Torque Distribution to Rear

Drive Force
Wheel
Rear Wheel Skid Tendency

Drive Torque Distribution to Rear

Drive Force
Wheel
3. FAIL-SAFE
(a) If a failure occurs in the skid control ECU, sensors or brake actuator assembly, the system continues effecting
brake control by excluding the failed area and using only the areas that are operating normally.
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If the skid control ECU detects a malfunction in the brake control system, the warning lights or indicator light
illuminate. At the same time, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is stored in the memory of the skid control
ECU.
(b) This system has a sensor signal check (test mode) function.
(c) For details of DTCs and check function, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUH
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The steering angle sensor detects the steering direction and angle, and sends this signal to the skid control
ECU.
(b) The steering angle sensor contains 2 sets of magnetic reluctance elements that detect the rotational
movement of a magnet that is built into the detection gear. Thus, the sensor detects the changes that occur
in the magnetic reluctance elements along with the rotational movement of the detection gear, in order to
detect the rotational movement of the steering wheel.
*1 Steering Sensor *2 Detection Gear
NOTICE:
Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the spiral cable. If there is a malfunction in the steering angle
sensor, replace the spiral cable with steering angle sensor.
HINT:
When removing and reinstalling the spiral cable with steering angle sensor sub-assembly, it is necessary to
use a special procedure to prevent the center position of the steering sensor from becoming misaligned. For
details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUI
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: SPEED SENSOR;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SPEED SENSOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) An active type speed sensor is used. This sensor contains a sensor IC.
(b) The magnet type sensor rotor, which consists of N and S poles that are arranged in a circle, is integrated with
the hub bearing inner race.

*1 Front Speed Sensor *2 Rear Speed Sensor
2. OPERATION
(a) The active type speed sensor uses a sensor IC to detect magnetic field changes caused when the sensor rotor
rotates, and the sensor outputs the detected information to the skid control ECU as digital pulses (vehicle
speed signal).
(b) To detect the vehicle speed, the frequency of the output pulses is used. Because the active type sensor
outputs digital pulses, it can detect vehicle speeds even when the vehicle is nearly stationary.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUJ
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: BRAKE ACTUATOR;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
BRAKE ACTUATOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The brake actuator assembly consists of an actuator portion, a skid control ECU, a solenoid relay, a pump
motor and a master cylinder pressure sensor.
*1 Skid Control ECU *2 Actuator Portion
(b) The actuator portion consists of 2 master cylinder cut solenoid valves, 4 pressure holding solenoid valves, 4
pressure reduction solenoid valves, 2 pumps, 2 reservoirs and a master cylinder pressure sensor.
*1 Master Cylinder Pressure Sensor *2 Master Cylinder Cut Solenoid Valve
*3 Pressure Holding Solenoid Valve *4 Pressure Reduction Solenoid Valve
*5 Pump *6 Reservoir
*7 Front Left Wheel Cylinder *8 Rear Right Wheel Cylinder
*9 Rear Left Wheel Cylinder *10 Front Right Wheel Cylinder
*a From Master Cylinder - -
2. OPERATION
(a) ABS and EBD
(1) Based on the signals received from the 4 speed sensors, the skid control ECU calculates the speed of each
wheel and checks the wheel slipping conditions. In accordance with the slipping condition, the skid control
ECU controls each solenoid valve in the brake actuator assembly in order to adjust the fluid pressure of
each wheel cylinder in the following 3 modes: pressure increase, pressure holding and pressure reduction
each wheel cylinder in the following 3 modes: pressure increase, pressure holding and pressure reduction
modes.

*3 Port A *4 Port B
*a Pressure Increase Mode *b Pressure Holding Mode
*c Pressure Reduction Mode *d To Wheel Cylinder
*e From Wheel Cylinder - -
Brake Actuator Operation in ABS and EBD
PRESSURE MODE INCREASE MODE HOLDING MODE REDUCTION MODE
Pressure Holding Solenoid Valve (Port A) Off (Open) On (Closed) ←
Pressure Reduction Solenoid Valve (Port B) Off (Closed) ← On (Open)
Wheel Cylinder Pressure Increases Holds Reduces
(b) Brake Assist
(1) In the event of emergency braking, the skid control ECU determines the driver's intention based on the
speed of the pressure increase in the master cylinder determined by the master cylinder pressure sensor
signal. If the skid control ECU judges the need for additional brake assist, pressure is generated by the
pump in the brake actuator assembly and directed to the wheel cylinder to apply a large amount of fluid
pressure.
Brake Actuator Operation in Brake Assist
ITEM BRAKE ASSIST NOT ACTIVATED BRAKE ASSIST ACTIVATED
Pump Off On
Port (A) Off (Open) On*

Master Cylinder Cut Solenoid Valve
Port (B) Off (Open) On*
Port (C) Off (Open) ←

Port (D) Off (Open) ←
Pressure Holding Solenoid Valve
Port (E) Off (Open) ←
Port (F) Off (Open) ←
Port (G) Off (Closed) ←
Port (H) Off (Closed) ←

Pressure Reduction Solenoid Valve
Port (I) Off (Closed) ←
Port (J) Off (Closed) ←
HINT:
*: The solenoid valve switches the hydraulic pressure between "open" and "closed" in accordance with the
operating conditions by adjusting continually.
(c) Auto LSD
(1) The skid control ECU determines that the vehicle is in a state in which the Auto LSD can operate by using
various sensors and switches to detect the operating conditions of the VSC OFF switch, shift position,
accelerator pedal and brake pedal.
(2) When the vehicle is in a state in which the Auto LSD can operate, the skid control ECU performs hydraulic
pressure control of the wheel cylinder in the wheel with the faster wheel speed, so that the wheel speeds
of the right and left drive wheels will become equal.
(3) The Auto LSD indicator light illuminates when the vehicle is in a state in which the Auto LSD can operate,
and the slip indicator light flashes during Auto LSD control.
(4) If the Auto LSD function operates due to the slippage of the left drive wheel, see the next page for the
operation of the solenoid valves.
NOTICE:
Use the Auto LSD only if a wheel comes off or while driving on a road surface with high driving resistance such
as sand or mud. Do not use the Auto LSD for normal driving. After using the Auto LSD, make sure the Auto
LSD indicator light is off before resuming driving. To operate the VSC OFF switch, make sure the wheels are
not spinning.
Brake Actuator Operation in Auto LSD (Front Left Drive Wheel Slipping)
ITEM AUTO LSD OPERATION
NOT PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE

ACTIVATED INCREASE MODE HOLDING MODE REDUCTION MODE
Pump Off On ← ←
Port
Off (Open) On* ← ←
Master Cylinder Cut Solenoid (A)
Valve Port
Off (Open) ← ← ←
(B)
Port
Port
Off (Open) ← On (Closed) ←
Pressure Holding (C)
Solenoid Valve Port
Off (Open) On (Closed) ← ←
(F)
Front Port Off

← ← On (Open)
Brake Pressure Reduction (G) (Closed)
Solenoid Valve Port Off
← ← ←
(J) (Closed)
Wheel Cylinder Right - - - -

Pressure Left - Increases Holds Reduces
Port
Pressure Holding (D)
Solenoid Valve Port
(E)
Rear Port Off

← ← ←
Brake Pressure Reduction (H) (Closed)
← ← ←
(I) (Closed)

Pressure Left - - - -
HINT:
(d) TRAC
(1) The fluid pressure generated by the pump is regulated by the master cylinder cut solenoid valve to the
required pressure. Thus, the wheel cylinders of the drive wheels are controlled in the following 3 modes:
pressure increase, pressure holding and pressure reduction modes to control the slippage of the drive
wheels. The pressure holding solenoid valve and the pressure reduction solenoid valve are turned on or off
in accordance with the ABS and EBD operation patterns.
Brake Actuator Operation in TRAC (2WD Models)
ITEM TRAC OPERATION

Pump Off On ← ←
Port
Valve Port
(B)
Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(F)
Front Port Off

← ← On (Open)
← ← On (Open)
(J) (Closed)
Wheel Cylinder Right - Increases Holds Reduces

Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(E)
Rear Port Off

← ← ←
← ← ←
(I) (Closed)

Pressure Left - - - -
HINT:
Brake Actuator Operation in TRAC (AWD Models)
ITEM TRAC OPERATION

Pump Off On ← ←
Port
Valve Port
(B)
Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(F)
Port Off
Front Port Off
← ← On (Open)
← ← On (Open)
(J) (Closed)

Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(E)
Rear Port Off

← ← On (Open)
← ← On (Open)
(I) (Closed)

HINT:
(e) VSC
(1) The VSC, by way of the solenoid valves, controls the fluid pressure generated by the pump and applies it
to the brake wheel cylinder of each wheel in the following 3 modes: pressure increase, pressure holding
and pressure reduction modes. As a result, the tendency for front wheel skid or rear wheel skid is
controlled.
(2) In the front wheel skid restraining control, the brakes of the front wheels and the brake of the rear wheel
on the inner circle of the turn are applied. Also, depending on whether the brake is on or off and also
depending on the vehicle conditions, there are circumstances in which the brake might not be applied to
the wheels even if the wheel is targeted for braking. The following diagram shows the hydraulic circuit in
the pressure increase mode, as it controls the front wheel skid condition while the vehicle makes a right
turn. In other operating modes, the pressure holding valve and the pressure reduction valve are turned
on or off in accordance with the ABS and EBD operation patterns.
Brake Actuator Operation in VSC (Front Wheel Skid Restraining)
ITEM VSC OPERATION

Pump Off On ← ←
Port
Valve Port
(B)
Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(F)
Front Port Off

← ← On (Open)
← ← On (Open)
Port Off
← ← On (Open)
(J) (Closed)

Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(E)
Rear Port Off

← ← On (Open)
← ← ←
(I) (Closed)

HINT:
(3) In the rear wheel skid restraining control, the brake of the wheels on the outer circle of the turn is
applied. Also, depending on whether the brake is on or off and also depending on the vehicle conditions,
there are circumstances in which the brake might not be applied to the wheels even if the wheel is
targeted for braking. The following diagram shows the hydraulic circuit in pressure increase mode, as it
controls the rear wheel skid condition while the vehicle makes a right turn. In other operating modes, the
pressure holding valve and the pressure reduction valve are turned on or off in accordance with the ABS
and EBD operation patterns.
Brake Actuator Operation in VSC (Rear Wheel Skid Restraining)
ITEM VSC OPERATION

Pump Off On ← ←
Port
Valve Port
Off (Open) ← ← ←
(B)
Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(F)
Front Port Off

← ← On (Open)
← ← ←
(J) (Closed)
Port
Solenoid Valve Port
(E)
Rear Port Off

← ← ←
← ← ←
(I) (Closed)

HINT:
(f) Cooperative Control
(1) The operation of the solenoid valves under the cooperative control is the same as the TRAC or VSC
operation.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUK
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: VSC OFF SWITCH;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
VSC OFF SWITCH

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The operation of the TRAC and VSC functions can be stopped by the VSC OFF switch. While the vehicle is
running off the shoulder of the road or running on a dirt road, the engine output control is stopped to
maintain drive torque.
(b) On 2WD models, the driver can select the TRAC OFF mode by operating the VSC OFF switch. At the same
time, the Auto LSD turns on, thus enabling the operation of the Auto LSD function.

*1 Slip Indicator Light *2 Auto LSD Indicator Light
*3 TRAC OFF Indicator Light *4 VSC OFF Indicator Light
VSC OFF Switch (Traction Control
*5 - -
Switch)
2. OPERATION
(a) The VSC OFF switch can select 3 modes [Normal mode, TRAC OFF mode (Auto LSD on*) and VSC OFF mode].
(b) Briefly pressing the VSC OFF switch in Normal mode selects the mode (Auto LSD on*).
(c) Pressing and holding the VSC OFF switch for 3 seconds or more with the vehicle stopped selects the VSC OFF
mode, disabling the Auto LSD*, TRAC and VSC functions.
(d) Briefly pressing the VSC OFF switch in the TRAC OFF mode (Auto LSD on*) or VSC OFF mode or turning the
ignition switch off returns to the Normal mode.
*: 2WD models
*a Normal Mode *b TRAC OFF Mode (Auto LSD On*)
*c VSC OFF Mode - -
VSC OFF Switch Operation (Briefly VSC OFF Switch Operation (Press and
Press) Hold for 3 Seconds or More)
(e) The operations of the brake control functions in each mode are as follows:
MODE BRAKE CONTROL COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

FUNCTION
TRAC AUTO VSC AUTO LSD TRAC OFF VSC OFF

LSD*1 INDICATOR*1 INDICATOR*2 INDICATOR
Normal Mode ○ X ○ - - -
TRAC OFF Mode (Auto LSD X*1

X ○ Illuminates Illuminates Illuminates*3
On*1) ○*2
VSC OFF Mode X X X*4 - Illuminates Illuminates
HINT:
○: Controllable
X: Not controllable
-: Not applicable
*1: 2WD models
*2: AWD models
*3: Models with Auto LSD driving at 50 km/h (31 mph) or below
*4: The control is performed during braking or while the yaw rate is large.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUM
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: YAWRATE SENSOR;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
YAWRATE SENSOR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The center airbag sensor assembly incorporates the yawrate and deceleration sensor. The yawrate and
deceleration sensor detects the yaw rate, longitudinal and lateral acceleration of the vehicle and transmits
signals to the skid control ECU via the CAN communication.
*1 Yawrate and Deceleration - -

Sensor
Front - -
NOTICE:
After replacing the yaw rate sensor or the skid control ECU, initialization of the yaw rate sensor is required.
For the actual procedure, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUN
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The following brake control functions are provided: Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD), brake assist, Auto LSD, Traction Control (TRAC) and Vehicle Stability Control (VSC).
(b) The cooperative control with the EPS and AWD system is used.
2. MAIN FEATURES
(a) Cooperative Control with EPS and AWD System
(1) The cooperative control with the EPS and AWD system uses a cooperative control function that performs
integrated control of the brake control system, Electric Power Steering (EPS) system and dynamic torque
control AWD system* in accordance with driving conditions. Thus, the cooperative control with the EPS
and AWD system improves the dynamic performance of the vehicle to run, turn and stop, and ensures
excellent driving stability, driveability and acceleration performance during cornering.
*: AWD models
3. PRECAUTION
expressions listed in the table below are used in this section:

(b) When the brake control system is activated, the brake pedal could shudder. This is a normal occurrence of the
system in operation and should not be considered a malfunction.
(c) The TRAC and VSC functions control brake hydraulic pressure and engine output to ensure vehicle stability.
Therefore, operate the VSC OFF switch (stop the operation of the TRAC and VSC functions) only when it is
necessary.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUO
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUP
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 Front Speed Sensor RH *2 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly
Skid Control ECU

*3 Front Speed Sensor LH *4
Master Cylinder Pressure
Sensor
*5 Rear Speed Sensor LH *6 Rear Speed Sensor RH
Brake Booster Assembly

Brake Booster Assembly
*7 Brake Fluid Level Warning *8 ECM

Switch

*1 Brake Warning Light *2 ABS Warning Light
*3 Slip Indicator Light *4 Auto LSD Indicator Light

*5 TRAC OFF Indicator Light *6 VSC OFF Indicator Light
*7 Sport Mode Indicator Light *8 Power Steering ECU Assembly

*9 *10
Buzzer Body ECU)
*11 DLC3 *12 Stop Light Switch Assembly
VSC OFF Switch (Traction Control

*13 *14 Parking Brake Switch Assembly
Switch)
*15 Yawrate and Deceleration *16 Steering Sensor
Sensor
*17 Sport Mode Switch *18 4WD ECU Assembly

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUQ
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A plunger type master cylinder is used.
(b) A single diaphragm type brake booster is used.
2. SPECIFICATION
Type Tandem
Master Cylinder 20.64 mm (0.81 in.)*1
Diameter
22.22 mm (0.87 in.)*2
Type Single Diaphragm

Brake Booster
Size 10 in.
*1: LE (Base) grade excluding destination packages for Mexico and Puerto Rico
*2: XLE (Middle) and LIMITED (High) grade or destination packages for Mexico and Puerto Rico
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUR
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A ventilated disc brake is used.
(b) A 1-piston type brake caliper is used.
2. SPECIFICATION
Type Ventilated Disc
Caliper Type PE63
Wheel Cylinder Diameter 63.5 mm (2.50 in.)
275.0 mm x 25.0 mm (10.8 in. x 0.98 in.)*1

Rotor Size (Diameter x Thickness)
296.0 mm x 28.0 mm (11.7 in. x 1.10 in.)*2
Pad Material PV565H
*1: LE (Base) grade excluding destination packages for Mexico and Puerto Rico
*2: XLE (Middle) or LIMITED (High) grade or destination packages for Mexico and Puerto Rico
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUS
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A drum-in type solid disc brake is used.
(b) A 1-piston type brake caliper is used.
2. SPECIFICATION
Type Solid Disc
Caliper Type PEAL38
Wheel Cylinder Diameter 38.1 mm (1.50 in.)
Rotor Size (Diameter x Thickness) 281.0 mm x 12.0 mm (11.1 in. x 0.472 in.)
Pad Material PS558

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUT
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A duo servo inner drum type parking brake is used.
(b) A parking brake with a center lever type operating method is used.
2. SPECIFICATION
Parking Brake Type Duo Servo Drum
Drum Inner Diameter 173.0 mm (6.81 in.)
Lining Material LN513

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUU
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: POWER STEERING CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
POWER STEERING CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Changes the rotational force to lateral movement in accordance with
Steering Gear Assembly
the driver's steering operation.
Generates power assist in accordance with a signal received from the
Power Steering Motor
power steering ECU assembly.
Rotation Angle
Sensor (Built into Outputs the rotation angle of the power steering motor to the power
Power Steering steering ECU assembly.
Motor)
Reduces the speed of the power steering motor through the use of a
Reduction Mechanism
Steering worm gear and a wheel gear and transmits it to the column shaft.
Column
Detects the amount of twist of the torsion bar, creates an electrical
Assembly Power Steering
signal based on the torque applied to the torsion bar and outputs the
Torque Sensor
signal to the power steering ECU assembly.
Actuates the power steering motor mounted on the steering

Power Steering ECU column assembly to provide power assist based on the signals
Assembly received from various sensors and ECUs.
Operates in cooperation with the skid control ECU to control
the steering assist torque.
Outputs the engine speed signal or Sport mode signal to the power
ECM
steering ECU assembly via CAN communication.
Outputs the vehicle speed signal to the power steering ECU
assembly via CAN communication.
Skid Control ECU
Requests steering torque assist during cooperative control
with EPS.
Power Steering Illuminates to alert the driver when the power steering ECU assembly
Warning Light detects a malfunction in the EPS system.
Combination
Sport Mode Indicator
Meter Illuminates to inform the driver that Sport mode engaged.
Light
Assembly
Emits a warning sound to alert the driver when the power steering ECU
Buzzer
assembly detects a malfunction in the EPS system.
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
Controls of EPS System
CONTROL OUTLINE
Calculates the assist current and assist direction from the steering torque value and the
Basic Control
vehicle speed, and actuates the power steering motor.
Inertia
Ensures the starting movement of the power steering motor when the driver starts to turn
Compensation
the steering wheel.
Control
Friction
Compensation Reduces steering wheel operation friction, improving steering feeling.
Control
Recovery Assists the recovery force during the short interval between the time the driver fully turns
Control the steering wheel and the time the wheels try to recover.
Damper Regulates the amount of assist when the driver turns the steering wheel while driving at high
Control speeds, thus damping the changes in the yaw rate of the vehicle body.
Voltage Boost Boosts the battery voltage in the power steering ECU assembly, and issues the amount of
Control voltage necessary to drive the power steering motor.
System
Estimates the power steering motor temperature based on the amperage and the current
Overheat
duration. If the temperature exceeds the standard, this control limits the amperage to
Protection
prevent the power steering motor from overheating.
Control
Sport Mode
The assist characteristics are switched to achieve a suitable steering feeling for Sport mode.
Control
3. FAIL-SAFE
(a) Fail-safe operation modes are as follows:
Fail-safe Control List
DETECTED MALFUNCTION FAIL-SAFE
Power Steering Torque Sensor Malfunction Cancels the assist.
Power Steering Motor Overheat Limits the assist force.
Power Steering Motor Short (Including Drive System

Cancels the assist.
Malfunction)
Rotation Angle Sensor (Built into Power Steering

Malfunction Cancels the assist.
Motor)
Power Steering ECU Assembly Internal Temperature

Limits the assist force.
Sensor Malfunction
Power Steering ECU Assembly System Malfunction Cancels the assist.
Vehicle Speed and Engine Speed Signal Malfunction Limits the assist force.
Pauses the assist (provides normal assist after the

Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
voltage recovers).
4. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If the power steering ECU assembly detects a malfunction in the EPS system, the power steering ECU
assembly lights up the power steering warning light in order to alert the driver. At the same time,
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are stored in memory.
(b) The DTCs can be read by connecting the Techstream to the DLC3. For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUV
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: STEERING GEAR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
STEERING GEAR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Operability is ensured through a lightweight, compact rack and pinion type steering gear assembly.
(b) A light weight has been achieved through a unified aluminum housing unit.
(c) To keep the steering rigidity, the steering gear assembly is installed in the front suspension crossmember sub-
assembly directly without elastic material.
Front Suspension Crossmember Sub-

*1 Steering Gear Assembly *2
assembly
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUW
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The steering column assembly includes a power steering motor, reduction mechanism and power steering
torque sensor.
(b) The power steering ECU assembly is integrated into the power steering motor.
*1 Power Steering Motor *2 Reduction Mechanism
*3 Power Steering Torque Sensor *4 Power Steering ECU Assembly

*a Top View *b A - A Cross Section
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: POWER STEERING MOTOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
POWER STEERING MOTOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A low-inertia, low-noise, high-power output brushless motor is used.
(b) The operating range of the power steering motor is 9 V to 16 V.
(c) The power steering motor consists of a rotor, stator, motor shaft and rotation angle sensor.
(d) The torque generated by the power steering motor is transmitted via the joint to the worm gear. This torque
is then transmitted via the wheel gear to the column shaft.
(e) The rotation angle sensor consists of a resolver sensor which excels in reliability and durability. The rotation
angle sensor detects the rotation angle of the power steering motor and outputs it to the power steering ECU
assembly. As a result, the rotation angle sensor ensures efficient EPS control.
*1 Worm Gear *2 Wheel Gear

Rotor
*3 Column Shaft *4
Stator
Rotation Angle Sensor
*5 Motor Shaft - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUY
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: REDUCTION MECHANISM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012
- ]
REDUCTION MECHANISM
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) This mechanism reduces the speed of the power steering motor via the worm gear and the wheel gear, and
transmits it to the column shaft.
(b) The wheel gear is made of a high strength, low friction and low wear plastic material, thus achieving low noise
and a lightweight construction.
(c) A worm gear supported by ball bearings is used. Also, a torsion spring is provided to ensure the optimal
meshing of the gears at all times.
*1 Torsion Spring *2 Wheel Gear

*3 Column Shaft *4 Ball Bearing
*5 Worm Gear - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PUZ
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: POWER STEERING TORQUE SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
POWER STEERING TORQUE SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The power steering torque sensor is built into the steering column assembly. The power steering torque
sensor consists of a detection ring, a stub shaft and 2 detection coils.
(b) The detection ring is mounted on the input shaft and the stub shaft is mounted on the output shaft. The
input shaft and the output shaft are joined by the torsion bar. The detection coils are placed on the outside of
the detection ring to complete an excitation circuit without making contact.
(c) When the steering wheel is turned, the twist that is created in the torsion bar creates a relative displacement
between the detection ring and the stub shaft. The torque sensor outputs this change as an electrical signal
to the power steering ECU assembly.
*1 Input Shaft *2 Torsion Bar
*3 Output Shaft *4 Power Steering Torque Sensor

*5 Detection Coil *6 Detection Ring
*7 Stub Shaft - -
2. OPERATION
(a) The torque detection circuit built into the power steering ECU assembly calculates the torque sensor 1 output
(VT1) and the torque sensor 2 output (VT2) in accordance with the signals from the 2 detection coils of the
torque sensor.
(b) The power steering ECU assembly detects the steering torque and the steering direction in accordance with
VT1 and VT2.
(c) When the driver does not turn the steering wheel, VT1 and VT2 output a specified voltage (approximately 2.5
V). As long as the specified voltage is output, the power steering ECU assembly determines that steering
torque is not being generated.
(d) When the driver turns the steering wheel to the right or left, VT1 and VT2 change as shown in the graph
below. Based on the changes, the power steering ECU assembly determines the steering torque and steering
direction input by the driver.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005PV1
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION

*1 *2 ECM
Skid Control ECU
Steering Column Assembly

Power Steering ECU
Assembly
*3 Steering Gear Assembly *4 Rotation Angle Sensor
Reduction Mechanism
Power Steering Torque
Sensor
Sensor
*A AWD Models - -
*1 Power Steering Warning Light *2 Sport Mode Indicator Light

*3 *4 DLC3
Buzzer
*5 Power Steering ECU Assembly *6 Sport Mode Switch

Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING LOCK SYSTEM: STEERING LOCK CONTROL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 -
]
STEERING LOCK CONTROL

1. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The steering lock system is integrated in the steering lock ECU, and the ECU controls the lock bar
operation in the steering lock actuator assembly through the control of the lock/unlock motor.
(b) The steering lock ECU detects the position (lock/unlock) of the lock bar and transmits this information to
the certification ECU.
(c) In this system, the certification ECU determines whether to lock and unlock the steering wheel based on
communication with the steering lock ECU. Then, the certification ECU sends the lock or unlock
command signals to the steering lock ECU through the LIN communication. Upon receiving the signals,
the steering lock ECU operates the lock/unlock motor to lock or unlock the steering wheel.
HINT:
It is not possible to replace only the steering lock ECU in the steering lock actuator assembly. Therefore,
if the ECU malfunctions, the entire steering lock actuator assembly must be replaced.
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING LOCK SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) An electrical steering lock system is used on models with smart key system.
(b) In accordance with the use of the smart key system, the steering lock system uses a lock/unlock motor
to lock and unlock the steering wheel.
(c) The steering lock system mainly consists of a steering lock actuator assembly, main body ECU and
certification ECU.
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING LOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING LOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION

*1 Entry Warning Indicator *2
Body ECU)
Steering Lock Actuator Assembly
Lock/Unlock Motor
*3 Lock Sensor *4 Engine Switch (Push Start Switch)
Unlock Sensor
Steering Lock ECU

*5 - -
Assembly)
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN SYSTEM: MANUAL TILT AND TELESCOPIC MECHANISM;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
MANUAL TILT AND TELESCOPIC MECHANISM

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The manual tilt and telescopic mechanism allows adjustment of the steering wheel position in the vertical and
longitudinal (extending and retracting) directions through lever operation. This provides the driver with the
most comfortable driving position.
(b) The tilt and telescopic mechanism mainly consists of a tilt and telescopic lever, column bracket, breakaway
bracket and tilt and telescopic steering stoppers. For the tilt and telescopic mechanism, the steering column
main shaft is connected at the serration engagement.
(c) The tilt adjustment range is 4° and the telescopic adjustment range is 40 mm (1.57 in.).
(d) When the tilt and telescopic mechanism is in its locked state, the tilt and telescopic lever at the lock position
causes the cam of the tilt and telescopic steering stopper to tighten the column bracket. This secures the
breakaway bracket, column bracket and column tube, so movement in the tilt direction and in the telescopic
direction is locked.
(e) When the tilt and telescopic mechanism is in its free state, the tilt and telescopic lever at the free position
causes the cam of the tilt and telescopic steering stoppers to loosen the column bracket. This frees the
column tube to move in the tilt direction and in the telescopic direction, enabling adjustment.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Stopper
*1 Tilt and Telescopic Lever *2
(Cam)
*3 Column Tube *4 Column Bracket

*5 Breakaway Bracket - -
*a Tilt Stroke Stroke 4° *b Telescopic Stroke 40 mm (1.57 in.)
*c Lock Position *d Free Position
*e A - A Cross Section (Locked State) *f Wide

*g Tighten *h A - A Cross Section (Free State)
*i Narrow *j Loosen
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN SYSTEM: ENERGY ABSORBING MECHANISM;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
ENERGY ABSORBING MECHANISM

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The energy absorbing mechanism mainly consists of a breakaway bracket, steering intermediate shaft
assembly and column tube. The steering column assembly is mounted on the instrument panel reinforcement
via the breakaway bracket. The steering column assembly and the steering gear assembly are connected with
a contractile steering intermediate shaft assembly.
2. OPERATION
(a) Primary Collision
(1) When the steering gear assembly moves during a collision (primary collision), the steering intermediate
shaft assembly contracts, thus helping reduce the possibility of the steering column assembly and the
steering wheel protruding into the cabin.
*1 Breakaway Bracket *2 Instrument Panel Reinforcement
*3 Column Tube *4 Steering Intermediate Shaft Assembly

*a Before Collision *b After Collision
Contract - -
(b) Secondary Collision
(1) When a collision impact is transmitted to the steering wheel (secondary collision), the steering wheel and
the airbag help absorb the impact. In addition, the breakaway bracket separates and the column tube
contracts. At this time, the friction resistance of the sliding portion, which is staked to the column tube,
absorbs the energy. This sequential energy absorbing mechanism helps absorb the impact of the
secondary collision.
*1 Breakaway Bracket *2 Column Tube
*3 Inner Tube *4 Outer Tube
*a Before Collision *b After Collision
Contract - -
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A manual tilt and telescopic mechanism is used.
(b) The steering column assembly uses an energy absorbing mechanism.
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A rack and pinion type steering gear assembly is used.
(b) A vehicle speed sensing type Electric Power Steering (EPS) system is used.
(c) The EPS system uses a power steering motor, a reduction mechanism and a power steering torque
sensor that are built into the steering column assembly to generate assist torque, in order to assist the
driver's steering effort.
(d) The EPS system performs control in cooperation with the brake control system. The power steering ECU
assembly controls the assist torque for the power steering motor based on the assist torque request sent
from the skid control ECU. For details, see the Brake Control/Dynamic Control Systems section.
2. MAIN FEATURES
FEATURE OUTLINE
The conventional hydraulic power steering system ordinarily operates the oil pressure pump
using the driving force of the engine. However, the EPS system activates the power steering
Fuel Efficiency
motor only when the driver turns the steering wheel. As a result, no energy is consumed
when the vehicle is traveling in a straight line, enhancing fuel economy.
Simple and A power steering motor, a power steering ECU, a reduction mechanism and a power steering
Compact torque sensor that are contained in the EPS system are built into the steering column
Structure assembly. This achieves more simple structure.
Discontinuance Unlike the conventional hydraulic power steering system, the EPS system excels in
of Oil Pressure serviceability because it does not require pipes, a vane pump, a pulley and power steering
System fluid.
In accordance with the discontinuance of the piping system and the reduction in size of the
Lightweight
system overall, weight reduction has been achieved.
Steering Assist characteristics have been optimized based on the signals from the speed sensor to
Feeling achieve a steering torque feeling that is light at low speeds and effective at high speeds.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6P
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
ATF Warmer (Transmission Oil

Warms up the ATF quickly.
Cooler)
Transmits engine power to the transaxle.

Torque Converter Assembly
Increases engine torque.
Oil Pump Assembly Provides oil pressure necessary for the transaxle operation.
No. 1 Clutch (C1) Connects the intermediate shaft and the Ravigneaux planetary rear sun gear.
No. 2 Clutch (C2) Connects the intermediate shaft and the Ravigneaux planetary ring gear.
Prevents the Ravigneaux planetary front sun gear and the underdrive planetary carrier from
No. 1 Brake (B1)
turningclockwise or counterclockwise.
No. 2 Brake (B2) Prevents the Ravigneaux planetary ring gear from turning clockwise or counterclockwise.
No. 3 Brake (B3) Prevents the underdrive planetary ring gear from turning clockwise or counterclockwise.
No. 1 1-way Clutch (F1) Prevents the Ravigneaux planetary ring gear from turning counterclockwise.
Change the route through which driving force is transmitted in accordance with the operation
Planetary Gears
of each clutch and brake in order to increase or reduce the input and output speed.
Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 Controls the No. 1 clutch (C1) pressure.
Shift Solenoid Valve SL2 Controls the No. 2 clutch (C2) pressure.
Shift Solenoid Valve SL3 Controls the No. 1 brake (B1) pressure.
Shift Solenoid Valve SL4 Controls the No. 3 brake (B3) pressure.
Controls the lock-up clutch pressure.

Shift Solenoid Valve SLU
Controls the No. 2 brake (B2) pressure.
Shift Solenoid Valve SLT Controls line pressure.
Switches the lock-up relay valve.

Shift Solenoid Valve SL
Switches the B2 apply control valve and the reverse sequence valve.
Counter Gear Speed Sensor Detects the speed of the counter gear.
Input Turbine Speed Sensor Detects the input speed of the transaxle.
ATF Temperature Sensor Detects the ATF temperature.
Park/Neutral Position Switch Detects the shift lever position.

Assembly
Detects that the shift lever is in S.

Transmission Control Switch
Detects the driver's upshift and downshift operations when the shift lever is in S.
Combination Sport Mode Switch Turns the Sport mode on and off.
Switch
Assembly ECO Mode Switch Turns the ECO mode on and off.
Controls engine output and each shift solenoid valve in response to a signal from
each sensor and switch.
ECM
Makes a diagnosis and memorizes the failed section when the ECM detects a
malfunction.
Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly Detects the air conditioning system operation.
Shift Position and

Indicates the shift lever position.
Shift Range
Indicates the shift range (S1 to S6).
Indicator
Sport Mode Illuminates when the Sport mode switch is pressed to inform the driver that Sport mode is
Indicator Light active.
ECO Mode Indicator Illuminates when the ECO mode switch is pressed an to inform the driver that ECO mode is
Combination Light active.
Meter
Assembly MIL Illuminates or blinks to inform the driver when the ECM detects a malfunction.
ATF Temperature
Warns the driver by lighting up when the ATF is at a high temperature.
Warning Light
Sounds when the downshift operation is rejected.

Buzzer Warns the driver by sounding when a message is shown on the multi-information
display.
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
Electronic Control of Automatic Transaxle
CONTROL OUTLINE
The ECM sends current to shift solenoid valves SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4 and/or SLU based on signals from
Shift Timing Control
various sensors in order to shift the gears.
Clutch to Clutch Controls the pressure applied directly to the No. 1 Clutch (C1), No. 2 Clutch (C2), No. 1 Brake (B1) and No.
Pressure Control 3 Brake (B3) by actuating the shift solenoid valves (SL1, SL2, SL3 and SL4) in accordance with ECM signals.
Line Pressure Optimal Actuates the shift solenoid valve SLT to control the line pressure in accordance with information from the
Control ECM and the operating conditions of the transaxle.
Powertrain Cooperative Performs both shift control and engine output control in an integrated way, achieving excellent shift
Control characteristics and driveability.
Artificial Intelligence-
Based on the signals from various sensors, the ECM determines the road conditions and the intention of the
shift Control (AI-shift
driver. Thus, an appropriate shift pattern is automatically determined, improving driveability.
Control)
Deceleration Downshift To prevent engine speed from decreasing and thereby maintain the fuel cut, the ECM performs downshifts
Control before the fuel cut ends.
Makes it possible to skip unnecessary shifts, enabling the vehicle to downshift directly from 6th to 3rd or
Direct Downshift Control
from 5th to 2nd, enhancing downshift response when the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly.
The ECM sends current to the shift solenoid valves SL and SLU based on signals from various sensors to
Lock-up Timing Control
engage or disengage the lock-up clutch.
Flex Lock-up Clutch Controls the shift solenoid valve SLU, provides an intermediate mode between the on and off states of the
Control lock-up clutch, and increases the operating range of the lock-up clutch to improve fuel economy.
Multi-mode Automatic The ECM appropriately controls the automatic transaxle in accordance with the shift range selected using
Transmission the shift lever while the shift lever is in S.
High Response Upshift Achieves a crisp and high response upshift using the clutch to clutch pressure control and powertrain
Control cooperative control.
Blipping Downshift Achieves smooth and quick downshift using clutch to clutch pressure control and powertrain cooperative
Control control.
*: Models with shift paddle
(a) Clutch to Clutch Pressure Control
Clutch to clutch pressure control is used for shift control. As a result, shift control in 2nd gear or above can be performed
without using a 1-way clutch, making the automatic transaxle lightweight and compact.
Based on the information about transaxle input and output speed, engine torque and other items, the ECM controls
each clutch and brake in accordance with the optimum fluid pressure and timing, in order to shift the gears. The ECM
changes gears using fluid pressure circuits which enable the No. 1 clutch (C1), No. 2 clutch (C2), No. 1 brake (B1) and
No. 3 brake (B3) to be controlled independently, and using the high flow SL1, SL2, SL3 and SL4 shift solenoid valves
which directly control the line pressure. As a result, highly responsive and excellent shift characteristics have been
achieved.
(b) Line Pressure Optimal Control
The line pressure is controlled using shift solenoid valve SLT.
Through the use of shift solenoid valve SLT, the line pressure is optimally controlled in accordance with the engine
torque information, as well as with the internal operating conditions of the torque converter and the transaxle.
Accordingly, the line pressure can be accurately controlled in accordance with the engine output, traveling condition and
the ATF temperature, thus achieving smooth shift characteristics and regulating the workload of the oil pump (reducing
unnecessary parasitic losses).
(c) Powertrain Cooperative Control
(1) Throttle Control at Starting
The engine output is optimally controlled using the Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i) in real
time and in accordance with the transient force from the torque converter when the vehicle is launched. This
achieves a suppressed sense of lurching forward, tire slippage suppression and improved responsiveness, ensuring
excellent launch performance.
(2) Deceleration Force Control
The ECM determines the gear that is to be selected when the accelerator pedal is released (released completely) in
accordance with the way the accelerator pedal is released (suddenly or slowly) during deceleration. In this way,
unnecessary upshifts are prevented during deceleration, matching the driver's intentions. In addition, unintended
downshifts are prevented when accelerating the vehicle again, achieving smooth acceleration.
(3) Transient Shifting Control
Through cooperative control with the Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i) and Electronic Spark
Advance (ESA), and electronic control of the engagement and release speed of the clutch and brake hydraulic
pressures, quick response and shift shock reduction have been achieved.
(d) Artificial Intelligence Shift Control (AI-shift Control)
The automatic transaxle gear is determined by the shift pattern, which uses the vehicle speed and accelerator pedal
depression angle.
Additionally, AI-shift control enables the ECM to estimate the road conditions and the driver's intention in order to
automatically control the shift pattern in an optimal manner. As a result, a comfortable ride has been achieved.
AI-shift control includes road condition support control and driver's intention support control.
AI-shift control determines optimal transaxle control based on input signals and automatically changes the shift pattern.
(1) Road Condition Support Control
Under road condition support control, the ECM determines from the accelerator pedal depressing angle and the
vehicle speed whether the vehicle is being driven uphill or downhill. To achieve the optimal drive force while driving
uphill, this control prevents unnecessary upshifts. To achieve the optimal engine brake effect while driving downhill,
this control automatically performs downshifts.
(2) Driver's Intention Support Control
The driver's intention is estimated based on the accelerator pedal depression angle and vehicle condition to switch to
a shift pattern that is well-suited to the driver.
(3) Quick Brake Downshift Control
When sudden braking is applied in Sport mode, the quick brake downshift control improves re-acceleration response
and engine brake force by downshifting.
(e) Deceleration Downshift Control
The ECM performs downshift control to help prevent the engine speed from decreasing, thus keeping fuel cut control
operating for as long as possible. In this way, fuel economy is improved.
When the vehicle is in 6th gear and starts decelerating, the transaxle downshifts from 6th to 5th, 5th to 4th and 4th to
3rd* before fuel cut control ends so that the fuel cut control can continue operating.
HINT:
*: The operation of 4th to 3rd downshift control is limited when the air conditioning is off.
(f) Direct Downshift Control
For conventional downshift control, when shifting from 6th to 3rd or 5th to 2nd, downshifts use an intermediate gear in
order to achieve smooth acceleration response. In addition to conventional control, direct downshift control is used for
this model. This control skips unnecessary shifts, enabling the vehicle to downshift directly from 6th to 3rd or from 5th
to 2nd.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly, direct downshift control enables direct downshifts with a quick shift
response, skipping unnecessary shifts. Direct downshift control places the emphasis on reducing the time required to
achieve the target gear. Conventional downshift control is used when the accelerator pedal is depressed slowly,
providing smooth acceleration response. As a result, this logic achieves downshift responsiveness in accordance with the
driver's intentions.
(g) Lock-up Timing Control
The ECM uses lock-up timing control in order to improve fuel consumption performance in 2nd or higher when the shift
lever is in D, or when the S6, S5 or S4 range is selected.
Lock-up Timing Control Operation
GEAR POSITION SHIFT LEVER POSITION OR SHIFT RANGE
D OR S6 S5 S4
1st X X X
2nd ○ ○ ○
3rd ○ ○ ○
4th ○ ○ ○
5th ○ ○ -
6th ○ - -
HINT:
○: Available
X: Not available
-: Not applicable
(h) Flex Lock-up Clutch Control
During acceleration, partial control of the power transmission between the lock-up clutch and torque converter greatly
boosts transmission efficiency in accordance with the driving conditions, improving fuel economy.
Even when the vehicle is decelerating (the accelerator pedal is released), flex lock-up clutch control operates. As a
result, the fuel-cut area is expanded and fuel economy is improved.
By allowing flex lock-up clutch control to continue operating during gearshifts, smooth torque transmission is obtained.
As a result, fuel economy and driveability are improved.
For flex lock-up clutch control, H infinity (H∞) control theory is used to achieve a high level of system stability and
response to various characteristic changes.
Flex Lock-up Clutch Control Operation
GEAR POSITION SHIFT LEVER POSITION OR SHIFT RANGE
D, S6 S5 S4
1st ○ X X
2nd ○ ○ ○
3rd ○ ○ ○
4th ○* ○* ○*
5th ○* ○* -
6th ○* - -
HINT:
○: Available
X: Not available
-: Not applicable
*: Flex lock-up clutch control also operates during deceleration.
(i) Multi-mode Automatic Transmission
The multi-mode automatic transmission is designed to allow the driver to switch between gear ranges. By moving the
shift lever to S and then moving the shift lever toward "+" (forward) or to "-" (backward), the driver can select the
desired shift range. Thus, the driver is able to shift gears with a manual-like feel.
This multi-mode automatic transmission is designed to allow the driver to switch gear ranges;; it is not for manually
selecting single gears.
When the vehicle is being driven at a speed that is higher than the maximum safe speed for a downshift, any attempt
to shift to a lower range by operating the shift lever will not be performed. This is done in order to protect the automatic
transaxle. In this case, the ECM sounds the buzzer in the combination meter assembly twice to alert the driver.
The driver can select S mode by moving the shift lever to S. At this time, the 4th or 5th shift range will be selected
according to the vehicle speed (during AI-shift control, however, the 3rd shift range may be selected).
Under this control, the ECM performs shift control within the usable gear range that the driver selects. As with an
ordinary automatic transaxle, the ECM shifts to 1st gear when the vehicle is stopped.
The shift lever position and the shift range are indicated by the shift indicator light in the combination meter assembly
(the shift range is shown only when the shift lever is in S, and it is not shown when the shift lever is in P, R, N or D).
When the shift lever is in S, the S mode indicator light in the combination meter assembly illuminates. The shift
indicator light indicates the shift range that the driver has selected.
Holding the shift lever toward "+" with the shift lever in S changes the shift range to the S6 range regardless of the
current range (S1 to S5).
In order to prevent an excessive engine speed, a function is used that automatically selects a higher shift range before
the engine speed becomes excessive.
In order to protect the automatic transaxle, a function is used that automatically selects a higher shift range when the
fluid temperature is high.
*a Transition of Shift Ranges *b Shift Pattern
Default Shift Range - -
Usable Gear Chart
SHIFT RANGE SHIFT RANGE INDICATOR DISPLAY USABLE GEAR
S6 6 1st to 6th
S5 5 1st to 5th
S4 4 1st to 4th
S3 3 1st to 3rd
S2 2 1st to 2nd
S1 1 1st
(j) High Response Upshift Control
The high response upshift control achieves highly responsive upshift operation using clutch to clutch pressure control,
which regulates each clutch and brake quickly and precisely, and by using the powertrain cooperative control, which
optimally regulates engine torque during shifting.
When the shift lever is in D or S, the high response upshift control activates when Sport mode is selected.
(k) Blipping Downshift Control
The blipping downshift control regulates each clutch and brake using the clutch to clutch pressure control, allowing
them to be engaged smoothly and disengaged quickly. In addition, fuel injection volume is increased and engine speed
is boosted by the powertrain cooperative control, thus ensuring proper engine brake force. In this way, a smooth and
quick downshift is achieved.
The blipping downshift control activates by downshifting with the shift lever in S when Sport mode is selected.
3. FUNCTION
(a) Shift Pattern Select System
(1) The driver can select 2 different settings for the shift schedule and AI-shift control.
(2) When the pattern select switch is on (Sport mode), a more aggressive shift schedule and AI-shift tuning are selected for
sporty driving.
(3) When Sport mode is selected with the shift lever in D, the shift schedule is changed to Sport and driver's intention support
control, quick brake downshift control and high response upshift control are operated. As a result, the system determines the
driver's intention, thus enabling a dynamic drive on winding roads even in the D range. In addition, when Sport mode is
selected with the shift lever in S, the blipping down shift control is activated in addition to the controls mentioned above.
Control Condition
MODE NORMAL SPORT
SHIFT LEVER POSITION D, S D S
Shift Schedule Normal Sport Sport
Driver's Intention Support Control Normal Sport Sport
Quick Brake Downshift Control - ○ ○
High Response Up Shift Control - ○ ○
Blipping Down Shift Control - - ○
HINT:
○: Applicable
-: Not applicable

4. FAIL-SAFE
(a) The fail-safe function minimizes the loss of operability when an abnormality occurs in a sensor or a shift solenoid valve.
(b) For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
5. DIAGNOSIS
(a) When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM records the malfunction and memorizes the information related to the fault.
Furthermore, the ECM illuminates or blinks the MIL in the combination meter to inform the driver.
(b) The ECM will also store the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) of the malfunctions. The DTCs stored in the ECM are output to the
Techstream via the DLC3.
(c) For details, refer to the Repair Manual.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6Q
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: TORQUE CONVERTER;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TORQUE CONVERTER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A compact, lightweight and high-capacity torque converter is used.
(b) This torque converter has optimally designed impeller configuration and fluid passages, resulting in
substantially enhanced transmission efficiency to ensure good starting, acceleration and fuel economy.
(c) Furthermore, a hydraulically-operated lock-up mechanism, which cuts power transmission losses caused by
slippage at medium and high speeds, is used.
*1 Lock-up Damper *2 Turbine Runner

*3 Lock-up Clutch *4 1-way Clutch
*5 Stator *6 Pump Impeller

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6R
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: OIL PUMP;; 2013 MY
RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
OIL PUMP
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The oil pump is operated by the torque converter. The oil pump lubricates the planetary gear units and
supplies operating fluid pressure for hydraulic control.
(b) The pump cover is made of aluminum to reduce weight.
*1 Pump Body *2 Drive Gear
*3 Driven Gear *4 Stator Shaft

*5 Pump Cover - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6S
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: PLANETARY GEAR;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PLANETARY GEAR
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A 6-speed configuration has been achieved by using 2 planetary gear units, creating a 6-speed automatic
transaxle.
(b) A Ravigneaux type planetary gear unit is used as the rear gear unit. The gear unit consists of pairs of sun
gears (front and rear) and planetary pinion gears (long and short) with different diameters within a single
planetary gear.
(c) A centrifugal fluid pressure canceling mechanism is used in the No. 1 clutch (C1) and No. 2 clutch (C2) that
are applied when shifting between 1st to 6th gears.
(d) The shapes of the grooves in the clutches and brake linings have been optimized in order to reduce drag.
*1 No. 1 Clutch (C1) *2 Intermediate Shaft

*3 Ravigneaux Planetary Gear Unit *4 Counter Driven Gear
*5 Differential Drive Pinion *6 Input Shaft

*7 Underdrive Planetary Gear Unit *8 No. 1 Brake (B1)
*9 No. 3 Brake (B3) *10 Counter Drive Gear
*9 No. 3 Brake (B3) *10 Counter Drive Gear
*11 No. 2 Brake (B2) *12 No. 1 1-way Clutch (F1)
*13 No. 2 Clutch (C2) - -
Rear Sun Gear (Ravigneaux Planetary

*1 Intermediate Shaft *2
Gear Unit)
Ring Gear (Ravigneaux Planetary Gear
*3 *4 Counter Driven Gear
Unit)
*5 Ring Gear *6 Differential Drive Pinion
Pinion Gear (Underdrive Planetary Gear Ring Gear (Underdrive Planetary Gear
*7 *8
Unit) Unit)
Sun Gear (Underdrive Planetary Gear
*9 Input Shaft *10
Unit)
Front Sun Gear (Ravigneaux Planetary

*11 *12 Counter Drive Gear
Gear Unit)
Short Pinion Gear (Ravigneaux Long Pinion Gear (Ravigneaux

*13 *14
Planetary Gear Unit) Planetary Gear Unit)
2. OPERATION
(a) Transaxle Power Flow
1st Gear (Shift Lever in S1 Range)

Input Operates
1st Gear (Shift Lever in D or in S6, S5, S4, S3 or S2 Range)
Input Operates
Input Operates
2nd Gear (Shift Lever in D or S)
Input Operates
3rd Gear (Shift Lever in D or S)

Input Operates
4th Gear (Shift Lever in D or S)
Input Operates
Input Operates

Input Operates
Reverse Gear (Shift Lever in R)
Input Operates
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6T
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: CENTRIFUGAL FLUID
PRESSURE CANCELING MECHANISM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CENTRIFUGAL FLUID PRESSURE CANCELING MECHANISM

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) For the following reason, a centrifugal fluid pressure canceling mechanism is used on the No. 1 clutch (C1)
and No. 2 clutch (C2):
(b) The clutch shifting operation is affected not only by the valve body controlling fluid pressure but also by the
centrifugal fluid pressure from the fluid that is present in the clutch piston oil pressure chamber (chamber A).
The centrifugal fluid pressure canceling mechanism uses chamber B to reduce the effects of the centrifugal
fluid pressure caused by the fluid in chamber A. As a result, smooth shifting with excellent response is
achieved.
*1 No. 2 Clutch (C2) Piston *2 No. 1 Clutch (C1) Piston

*3 No. 2 Clutch (C2) *4 No. 1 Clutch (C1)
Chamber A Chamber B
(c) Chamber B is filled by fluid supplied to the shaft for lubrication. As a result of filling chamber B, the same
amount of fluid pressure is present on both sides of the piston due to centrifugal force. This cancels the effects
of fluid pressure on the piston caused by centrifugal force. Accordingly, it is not necessary to discharge the
fluid through the use of a check ball, and highly responsive and smooth shifting characteristics are achieved.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6U
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: TRANSMISSION VALVE
BODY;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The valve body unit consists of a No. 1 upper valve body, a No. 2 upper valve body, a lower valve body and 7
shift solenoid valves (SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4, SLU, SLT, SL).
Valve Body Unit
*1 Shift Solenoid Valve SLU *2 Shift Solenoid Valve SLT
*3 Shift Solenoid Valve SL2 *4 Shift Solenoid Valve SL

*5 Shift Solenoid Valve SL3 *6 Shift Solenoid Valve SL4
*7 Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 *8 Lower Valve Body

*9 Plate *10 No. 1 Upper Valve Body
*11 No. 2 Upper Valve Body - -
No. 1 Upper Valve Body

*1 Solenoid Modulator Valve *2 B2 Control Valve
*3 B2 Apply Control Valve *4 Clutch Apply Control Valve
*5 Clutch Control Valve *6 Sequence Valve
*7 Primary Regulator Valve *8 B1 Apply Control Valve
No. 2 Upper Valve Body
*1 Lock-up Control Valve *2 Lock-up Relay Valve

*3 Reverse Sequence Valve *4 Secondary Regulator Valve
Lower Valve Body

*1 Shift Solenoid Valve SL *2 Shift Solenoid Valve SLT
*3 Shift Solenoid Valve SLU *4 Shift Solenoid Valve SL2

*7 Shift Solenoid Valve SL4 - -

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6V
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) In order to provide a hydraulic pressure that is proportional to the current that flows to the solenoid coil, shift
solenoid valves SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4, SLU and SLT linearly control the line pressure and clutch and brake
engagement pressure based on the signals from the ECM.
(b) Shift solenoid valves SL1, SL2, SL3 and SL4 are high flow linear solenoid valves that can supply more
pressure than conventional ones. These shift solenoid valves control engagement elements by directly
regulating the line pressure without using a pressure regulation valve (control valve) or a pressure reduction
valve (solenoid modulator valve). Thus, the number of valves and the length of the valve body fluid passage
have been reduced, the shifting response has been increased and shift shock has been minimized.
(c) Shift solenoid valve SL is a 3-way solenoid valve.
(d) A filter is provided at the tip of the solenoid valve to further improve operational reliability.
*1 Filter - -
*a Off Condition *b On Condition
Drain Control Pressure
Modulated Pressure - -
Function of Shift Solenoid Valves
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
SL1 No. 1 clutch (C1) pressure control
SL2 No. 2 clutch (C2) pressure control
SL3 No. 1 brake (B1) pressure control
SL4 No. 3 brake (B3) pressure control
Lock-up clutch pressure control

SLU
No. 2 brake (B2) pressure control
SLT Line pressure control
Switches the lock-up relay valve.

SL
Switches the B2 apply control valve and the reverse sequence valve.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6W
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The ATF temperature sensor is installed in the transmission valve body assembly for direct detection of the
fluid temperature.
(b) The ATF temperature sensor is used for hydraulic pressure control. This sensor is used for fine-tuning the
pressure used to operate the clutches and brakes. This helps to ensure smooth shift quality.
*1 Lower Valve Body *2 ATF Temperature Sensor

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6X
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: TRANSMISSION
REVOLUTION SENSOR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The U760F automatic transaxle uses an input turbine speed sensor (for the NT signal) and a counter gear
speed sensor (for the NC signal). Using these, the ECM can determine the timing of the shifting of the gears
and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure in response to the various conditions.
(b) The input turbine speed sensor detects the input speed of the transaxle. The No. 2 clutch piston is used as
the timing rotor for this sensor.
(c) The counter gear speed sensor detects the speed of the counter gear. The counter drive gear is used as the
timing rotor for this sensor.
(d) A Hall type speed sensor consists of a magnet and a Hall IC. The Hall IC converts the changes in the magnetic
flux density that occur through the rotation of the timing rotor into an electric signal, and outputs the signal
to the ECM.
*1 No. 1 Upper Valve Body *2 Lower Valve Body

*3 Counter Gear Speed Sensor *4 Input Turbine Speed Sensor
*5 No. 2 Upper Valve Body - -
Engine Side - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6Y
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: ATF WARMER;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ATF WARMER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) The ATF warmer uses engine coolant that has been warmed by the engine to warm up the ATF quickly and to
keep the ATF temperature higher (within limits). Consequently, the friction losses of the automatic transaxle
are quickly reduced, thus improving fuel economy.
(b) After warming up the ATF, the engine coolant flows into the ATF warmer to cool down the ATF.
*1 ATF Warmer (Transmission Oil Cooler) - -

*a From Transaxle *b To Transaxle
*c From Engine *d To Engine
ATF Flow Engine Coolant Flow

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q6Z
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: SHIFT CONTROL
MECHANISM;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SHIFT CONTROL MECHANISM

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A gate type shift lever that uses a transmission control cable is used.
(b) The shift control mechanism consists of a shift lock control unit assembly and a transmission control cable
assembly.
(c) The transmission floor shift lever assembly consists of a transmission control switch, a shift lock solenoid and
a shift lock control ECU.
Shift Lock Solenoid

*1 *2 Transmission Control Switch
Shift Lock Control ECU
*3 Shift Lever Knob Sub-assembly *4 Floor Shift Lever Assembly
*5 Transmission Control Cable Assembly - -
*a Shift Pattern - -
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q70
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: ATF FILLING
PROCEDURE;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ATF FILLING PROCEDURE

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A special ATF filling procedure is used in order to improve the accuracy of the ATF level when the transaxle is
being repaired or replaced. As a result, the oil filler tube and the oil level gauge used in the conventional
automatic transmission have been discontinued, eliminating the need to inspect the fluid level as a part of
routine maintenance.
(b) This filling procedure uses a refill plug, an overflow plug, an ATF temperature sensor and a D indicator. For
details about the ATF filling procedure, refer to the Repair Manual.
*1 Refill Plug *2 Overflow Plug

*a Proper Level - -
ATF - -
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: COUNTER DRIVE
GEAR;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
COUNTER DRIVE GEAR

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) Angular ball bearings are used to support the counter drive gear and the Ravigneaux planetary gear unit,
reducing the rolling resistance and noise.
*1 Angular Ball Bearing *2 Counter Drive Gear

Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: CLUTCH AND BRAKE
PISTON;; 2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
CLUTCH AND BRAKE PISTON

1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) 2 types of pistons are used: a non-split piston that acts in the push direction for the No. 1 clutch (C1)
operation, and a split piston that acts in the pull direction for the No. 2 clutch (C2) operation. These 2 types of
pistons contribute to making the entire clutch structure compact.
(b) A split type piston is used for the C2 piston, achieving a compact design.
(c) A wave spring is used to ensure C2 piston transfer efficiency.
(d) By setting the piston for the No. 3 brake (B3) operation around the counter drive gear, the brake structure
has been made more compact.
*1 Piston (Split Type) *2 Wave Spring

*3 Piston (Non-split Type) *4 Counter Drive Gear
*5 No. 3 Brake (B3) *6 Piston
*7 No. 2 Clutch (C2) *8 No. 1 Clutch (C1)
*a Point of Separation - -
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: ATF STRAINER;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
ATF STRAINER
1. CONSTRUCTION
(a) A felt type ATF strainer is used for its light weight, excellent debris capturing ability and increased reliability.
This ATF strainer is maintenance-free.
*1 ATF Filter *2 ATF Strainer

Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) The U760F 6-speed Super Electronically Controlled Transaxle (Super ECT) is used on the AWD models.
(b) An ATF warmer is used in the ATF cooling system.
(c) A gate type shift lever is used.
(d) A multi-mode automatic transmission is used.
(e) A shift pattern select system is used to select the driving mode (Normal and Sport). In Sport mode, a
higher level of responsiveness and a linear acceleration feel have been achieved.
2. SPECIFICATION
Automatic Transaxle Assembly
1st 3.300
2nd 1.900
3rd 1.420
Gear Ratio 4th 1.000
5th 0.713
6th 0.608
Reverse 4.148
Differential Gear Ratio*1 4.071
Fluid Type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Fluid Capacity*2 6.5 Liters (6.9 US qts, 5.7 Imp. qts)
HINT:
*1: Counter gear ratio included.
*2: Differential included.
Friction Engagement Components and 1-way Clutch
No. 1 Clutch (C1) 3
No. 2 Clutch (C2) 2
No. 1 Brake (B1) No. of Discs 3
No. 2 Brake (B2) 4
No. 3 Brake (B3) 3
No. 1 1-way Clutch (F1) No. of Rollers 20

Planetary Gears and Counter Gear
No. of Front Sun Gear Teeth 27
No. of Rear Sun Gear Teeth 30
Ravigneaux Planetary Gear Unit No. of Long Pinion Gear Teeth 20
No. of Short Pinion Gear Teeth 22
No. of Ring Gear Teeth 69
No. of Sun Gear Teeth 66
Underdrive Planetary Gear Unit No. of Pinion Gear Teeth 21
No. of Ring Gear Teeth 110
No. of Drive Gear Teeth 44

Counter Gear
No. of Driven Gear Teeth 46
Torque Converter Assembly
Torque Converter Type 3-element, 1-step, 2-phase
Stall Torque Ratio 1.850
3. PRECAUTION


Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;;
2013 MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*1 ATF Temperature Sensor *2 Shift Solenoid Valve SL4

*5 Shift Solenoid Valve SL2 *6 Shift Solenoid Valve SLU

*7 Shift Solenoid Valve SLT *8 Shift Solenoid Valve SL
*9 Input Turbine Speed Sensor *10 Counter Gear Speed Sensor

*11 ATF Warmer (Transmission Oil Cooler) *12 Valve Body Unit
*13 Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly *14 ECM
*1 Shift Position and Shift Range Display *2 Sport Mode Indicator Light
*3 ECO Mode Indicator Light *4 MIL

*5 ATF Temperature Warning Light *6
Buzzer
*7 DLC3 *8 Air Conditioning Amplifier Assembly
Combination Switch Assembly
*9 Transmission Control Switch *10 Sport Mode Switch

ECO Mode Switch
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM: GENERAL;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
GENERAL
1. OUTLINE
(a) A shift lock system consisting of a key interlock mechanism* and a shift lock mechanism is used.
*: Models without smart key system
2. PRECAUTION


Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM: SHIFT LOCK CONTROL;; 2013
MY RAV4 [12/2012 - ]
SHIFT LOCK CONTROL

COMPONENT FUNCTION
Shift Lock
Locks the shift lever in P.
Solenoid
Shift Lock P Detection

Detects that the shift lever is in P.
Solenoid Switch
Shift Lock Controls the shift lock solenoid and the key interlock solenoid based on
Control ECU signals from each switch.
Stop Light Switch Assembly Detects that the brake pedal is depressed.
Key Interlock Solenoid* Disables the key to be pulled out in any position other than P.
2. SYSTEM CONTROL
(a) The shift lock control ECU uses the P detection switch to detect the shift lever position, and receives
input signals from the stop light switch assembly and ignition switch. Upon receiving these signals, the
shift lock control ECU turns on the key interlock solenoid* and the shift lock solenoid in order to release
the key interlock* and shift lock.
3. FUNCTION
(a) Key Interlock Mechanism (Models without Smart Key System)
(1) The key interlock mechanism prevents the key from being pulled out after the ignition switch has
been turned off, unless the shift lever has been moved to P. Thus, the driver is urged to park the
vehicle with the shift lever in P.
(b) Shift Lock Mechanism
(1) The shift lock mechanism prevents the shift lever from being moved to any position other than P,
unless the ignition switch is ON, and the brake pedal is depressed. This mechanism helps to prevent
unintentional acceleration.
(2) A shift lock release button, which manually overrides the shift lock mechanism, is used.
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q7B
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
*A Models with Smart Key System *B Models without Smart Key System
*1 *2 Stop Light Switch Assembly
Body ECU)
Shift Lock Solenoid
*3 Floor Shift Lever Assembly *4 P Detection Switch

Shift Lock Control ECU
*5 Shift Lock Release Button *6 Engine Switch (Push Start Switch)
Ignition Switch
*7 - -
Key Interlock Solenoid
Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.4 F Doc ID: NM1000000005Q7A
Title: U760F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM;; 2013 MY RAV4
[12/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

2013 RAV4 New Features PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 RAV4 New Features PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 RAV4 New Features PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Last Modified: 03-­12-­2013 6.

4 F Doc ID: NM1000000004HD2

No. of Cyls. and Arrangement 4-­cylinder, In-­line

16-­valve DOHC, Chain Drive

Combustion Chamber Pentroof Type

Fuel System Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI)

Ignition System Direct Ignition System (DIS)

Displacement 2494 cm 3 (152.2 cu. in.)

Bore x Stroke 90.0 x 98.0 mm (3.54 x 3.86 in.)

Compression Ratio 10.4 : 1

Max. Output (SAE-­NET)*1 131 kW (176 HP) @ 6000 rpm

Max. Torque (SAE-­NET)*1 233 N*m (172 ft*lbf) @ 4100 rpm

Open 3° to 43° BTDC

Spark Plug Type SK16HR11

Firing Order 1 -­ 3 -­ 4 -­ 2

Octane Rating 87 or higher

Research Octane Number 91 or higher

U.S.A. and Canada ULEV2, SFTP

Evaporative Emission Regulation U.S.A. and Canada LEV2, ORVR

Others Tier2, ORVR

Engine Service Mass (Reference)*2 147 kg (324.0 lb)

(1) High performance and reliability

(2) Low noise and vibration

(3) Lightweight and compact design

(4) Good serviceability

(5) Clean emissions and fuel economy

ITEM (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

A cylinder head cover sub-­assembly made of magnesium alloy is

A taper squish shape is used for the combustion chamber. ○ -­ -­ -­ ○

Spiny-­type liners are used in the cylinder bores. ○ -­ ○ -­ ○

The piston skirt is coated with resin. ○ ○ -­ -­ ○

Low tension piston rings are used. ○ -­ -­ -­ ○

A resin gear balance shaft is used. -­ ○ ○ -­ -­

A timing chain and chain tensioner are used. -­ ○ -­ ○ -­

Valve Mechanism Valve lash adjuster assemblies are used. -­ ○ -­ ○ -­

Valve rocker arm sub-­assemblies are used. ○ -­ -­ -­ ○

Lubrication System An oil filter with a replaceable element is used. -­ -­ -­ ○ -­

A charcoal filter is used in the air cleaner cap. -­ -­ -­ -­ ○

A thin-­wall ceramic Three-­Way Catalyst (TWC) is used. -­ -­ -­ -­ ○

A fuel returnless system is used. -­ -­ ○ ○ ○

12-­hole type fuel injector assemblies with high atomizing

Serpentine Belt Drive

Long-­reach type iridium-­tipped spark plugs are used. ○ -­ -­ ○ ○

The Direct Ignition System (DIS) makes ignition timing

An Electronic Throttle Control System-­intelligent (ETCS-­i) is used. ○ -­ -­ -­ ○

An Acoustic Control Induction System (ACIS) is used. ○ -­ -­ -­ ○

A tumble control system is used. ○ -­ -­ -­ ○

A starter control (cranking hold function) is used.* ○ -­ -­ -­ -­

*: Models with smart key system

-­: Not applicable

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-­intelligent (ETCS-­

DUAL VVT-­i CONTROL

Intake Mass Air Flow Meter

(1) During Idling

Stabilized idling speed

(2) At Light Load

(3) At Medium Load

Better fuel economy

Last Modified: 03-12-2013 6.

No. of Cyls. and Arrangement 4-cylinder, In-line

16-valve DOHC, Chain Drive

Max. Output (SAE-NET)*1 131 kW (176 HP) @ 6000 rpm

Max. Torque (SAE-NET)1 233 Nm (172 ft*lbf) @ 4100 rpm

Firing Order 1 - 3 - 4 - 2

A cylinder head cover sub-assembly made of magnesium alloy is

A taper squish shape is used for the combustion chamber. ○ - - - ○

Spiny-type liners are used in the cylinder bores. ○ - ○ - ○

The piston skirt is coated with resin. ○ ○ - - ○

Low tension piston rings are used. ○ - - - ○

A resin gear balance shaft is used. - ○ ○ - -

A timing chain and chain tensioner are used. - ○ - ○ -

Valve Mechanism Valve lash adjuster assemblies are used. - ○ - ○ -

Valve rocker arm sub-assemblies are used. ○ - - - ○

Lubrication System An oil filter with a replaceable element is used. - - - ○ -

A charcoal filter is used in the air cleaner cap. - - - - ○

A thin-wall ceramic Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) is used. - - - - ○

A fuel returnless system is used. - - ○ ○ ○

12-hole type fuel injector assemblies with high atomizing

Long-reach type iridium-tipped spark plugs are used. ○ - - ○ ○

An Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i) is used. ○ - - - ○

An Acoustic Control Induction System (ACIS) is used. ○ - - - ○

A tumble control system is used. ○ - - - ○

A starter control (cranking hold function) is used.* ○ - - - -

-: Not applicable

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-intelligent (ETCS-

DUAL VVT-i CONTROL

DUAL VVT-i CONTROL

Starter Type Planetary Reduction-Segment Conductor Motor (PS) Type

1 Crank Position Sensor 2 ECM

1 Tumble Control Valve 2 Actuator (DC motor)

1 Steel Weight 2 Piezoelectric Element

*1 Knock Control Sensor - -

1 Crank Position Sensor 2 Timing Rotor

MRE PICK-UP COIL

1 Long-reach Type Spark Plug 2 Conventional Type Spark Plug

1 Throttle Body Assembly 2 Throttle Control Motor

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM-intelligent (ETCS-

1 Hot-wire Element 2 Temperature Sensing Element

*3 Intake Air Temperature Sensor - -

(3) Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent (ETCS-i)

(4) Dual Variable Valve Timing-intelligent (Dual VVT-i)

(8) Air Conditioning Cut-off Control

The fuel injector assembly is an electromagnetically-

Intake Mass Air Flow Meter Sub-

3 ECM 4 Accelerator Pedal Sensor Assembly

13 Built-in Tumble Control 14 Throttle Position Sensor

15 Camshaft Position Sensor (Intake) 16 Ignition Coil Assembly

19 Knock Control Sensor 20 Crank Position Sensor